Você está na página 1de 219

d

ve
er
es
R
s
ht
ig
lR
Al
13
OPERATING HANDBOOK

20 *
up y*
ro p
G co
rs ial
ne ic
w off
r O *un
COMMANDER 114 an
de *
m
om
P/N M114001-1
C
ht
y rig
op

Print Date. 1 O/1 /98


C
GULFSTREAM COMMANDER

114
C
op
yrig
ht
C
om
m
an
de *
r O *un

ISSUED: 21 FEBRUARY 1976


w off

REVISED: 16 JULY 1986


ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*

MANUFACTURERS SERIAL NO. ____________________ _


20 *
13

REGISTRATION NO. ____________________________ _


Al
lR
ig

FAA Approved in Normal Category based on FAR 23. This document


ht
s

must be carried in the airplane at all times.


R
es
er

This Handbook includes the material required to be furnished to the


ve

pilot by FAR 23 and constitutes the Approved Airplane Flight Manual.


d

This Handbook should not be used for operation purposes unless it is


maintained in a current status.

FAA Approved tl t!Ja~---"


A.C.
tJ ~ ~
L!JI -

DEL OP PC-203

QII
Gulfstream Aerospace Corporation
Wiley Post Airport
P.O. Box 22500 PIN M114001 1
Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73123
GCLFSTREAM PILOT'S
CQ;\Il\IANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
114

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

THE TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS HANDBOOK IS 173 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING.
THIS TOTAL DOES NOT INCLUDE THE SUPPLEMENTS PROVIDED IN SECTION IX.

Page Date Page Date Page Date


Title. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7/16/86 4-4 .............. 12/16/77 5-38 .............. 4/22/77
A ............... 7f16/86 4-5 .............. 12/16/77 5-39 .............. 4/22/77
B ............... 7/16/86 4-6 .............. 2/17/78 5-40 .............. 4/22/77
i ................. Original 4-7 .............. 4/11/80 5-41 .............. 4/22/77
ii Blank ........... Original 4-8 .............. 4/11/80 5-42 ...... '" ..... 4/22/77
C

1-1 ................ 4/6/77 4-9 .............. 4/11/80 5-43 .............. 4/22/77


op

1-2 ............... 10/1/76 4-10 .............. 4/11/80 5-44 .............. 4/22/77


yr

1-3 ............... 4/11/80 4-11 ............... 4/6/77 5-45 .............. 4/22/77


ig
ht

1-4 ................ 4/6/77 4-12 .............. 4/11/80 5-46 .............. 4/22/77


C

1-4A ............... 4/6/77 5-1 ............... 4/22/77 5-47 .............. 4/22/77


om

1-4B Blank .......... 4/6/77 5-2 ............... 4/22/77 5-48 .............. 4/22/77
1-5 ............... 10/1/76 5-3 ............... 4/22/77 5-49 Blank ......... 4/22/77
m
an

1-6 .............. 12/16/77 5-4 ............... 4/22/77 5-50 .............. 4/22/77


de

1-7 ................ 4/6/77 5-5 ............... 4/22/77 5-51 .............. 4/22/77


1-8 ............... 10/1/76 5- 6 ............... 4/22/77 5-52 .............. 4/22/77
r O **un

2-1 .............. 2/17/78 5-7 ............... 4/22/77 5-53 .............. 4/22/77


w off

2-2 ................ 4/6/77 5-8 ............... 4/22/77 5-54 .............. 4/22/77


ne ic

2-3 .............. 12/16/77 5-9 ............... 4/22/77 5-55 .............. 4/22/77


rs ial

2-4 .............. 12/16/77 5-10 .............. 4/22/77 5-56 .............. 4/22/77


G co

2-4A . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2/17/78 5-11 .............. 4/22/77 5-57 .............. 4/22/77


ro p

2-4B ............... 4/6/77 5-12 .............. 4/12/77 5-58 .............. 4/22/77


up y*

2-5 ............... 9/25/78 5-13 .............. 4/22/77 5-59 .............. 4/22/77


20 *

2-6 ............... 2/17/78 5-14 .............. 4/22/77 5-60 .............. 4/22/77


13

2-7 ............... 4/12/76 5-15 .............. 4/22/77 5-61 .............. 4/22/77


2-8 ................ 4/6/77
Al

5-16 .............. 4/22/77 5-62 .............. 4/22/77


l

2-9 ................ 4/6/77 5-17 .............. 4/22/77 5-63 .............. 4/22/77


R

2-10 Blank ......... 4/6/77 5-18 .............. 4/22/77 5-64 .............. 4/22/77
ig
ht

3-1 ............... Original 5-19 .............. 4/22/77 5-65 .............. 4/22/77


s

3-2 ............... Original 5-20 .............. 4/22/77 5-66 '" ........... 4/22/77
R

3-3 ................ 4/6/77 5-21 .............. 4/22/77 5-67 .............. 4/22/77


es

3-4 ................ 4/6/77 5-22 .............. 4/22/77 5-68 .............. 4/22/77


er

3-5 ................ 4/6/77 5-23 .............. 4/22/77 5-69 .............. 4/22/77


ve

3-6 ................ 4/6/77 5-24 ............. 4/22/77 5-70 .............. 4/22/77


d

3-7 ................ 4/6/77 5-25 .............. 4/22/77 5-71 .............. 4/22/77


3-8 ............... Original 5-26 .............. 4/22/77 5-72 .............. 4/22/77
3-9 ................ 3/3/77 5-27 .............. 4/22/77 6-1 ............... 10/1/76
3-10 ............... 4/6/77 5-28 .............. 4/22/77 6-2 ............... Original
3-11 .............. Original 5-29 .............. 4/22/77 6-3 ............... 10/1/76
3-12 .............. Original 5-30 .............. 4/22/77 6-4 ............... 10/1/76
3-13 .............. Original 5-31 .............. 4/22/77 6-5 ............... 10/1/76
3-14 .............. 2/17/78 5-32 .............. 4/22/77 6-6 ............... 10/1/76
3-15 ............. 2/17/78 5-33 .............. 4/22/77 6-7 ................ 3/3/77
3-16 Blank ........ Original 5-34 .............. 4/22/77 6-8 ................ 3/3/77
4-1 ................ 4/11/80 5-35 .............. 4/22/77 6-9 ............... 10/1/76
4-2 ................ 4/11/80 5-36 .............. 4/22/77 6-10 ............... 4/6/77
4-3 ............... 10/1/76 5-37 .............. 4/22/77 7-1 ............... 10/1/76

INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

Issued: 21 February 1976 A


Revised: 16 July 1986
PI LOT'S GULFSTREAM
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
114

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (CONTD)

Date

7-2 ............... 12/16/77


7-2A .............. 2/17/78
7-2B Blank ......... 12/16/77
7-3 ............... 12/16/77 Supplements (Refer to
7-4 .. , ............. 10/1/76 Section IX Log of
7-5 ................ Original Supplements)
7-6 ............... 12/16/77
C
op

7-7 ............... 2/17/78 FAA Approved: 16 July 1986


y

7-8 ............... 12/16/77


rig

7-9 ............... 12/16/77


()C~
ht

7-10 .............. 12/16/77


C

7-1OA ............. 12/16/77


om

7-10B ............. 2/17/78 Delegation Option PC-203


m

7-11 .. .. . .. .. .. .... 4/11/80


an

7-12 ............... 12/16/77


de *

7 -13 ................. 4/6/77


r O *un

7-14 ............... 12/16/77


7-15 ................. 3/3/77 Revision 1 5-18-76
w off
ne ic

7-16 ................ 10/1/76 Revision 2 6-21-76


10-01-76
rs ial

7-17 ................ 10/1/76 Revision 3


7-18 ............... 12/16/77 Revision 4 3-03-77
G co
ro p

7-19 ................ 10/1/76 Revision 5 4-06-77


up y*

7-20 ................. 7/16/86 Re'vision 6 4-22-77


7-21 ................ 10/1/76 Revision 7 12-16-77
20 *

7-22 ................. 3/3/77 Revision 8 2-17-78


13

7-23 ................ 10/1/76 Revision 9 9-25-78


Al

7 - 24 ................ 10/1/76 Revision 10 4-11-80


lR

8-1 ................ Original Revision 11 7/16/86


ig

8-2 ................ Original


ht

8-3 ................ Original


s

8-4 ................ Original


R
es

8- 5 ................ 10/1/76
er

8-6 ................ 5-18/76


ve

8-7 ................ 10/1/76


d

8-8 ................ 10/1/76


8-9 ................. 3/3/77
8-10 ................. 3/3/77
8-11. ............... 5/18/76
8-12 ................ Original

INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.

B Issued: 21 February 1976


Revised: 16 July 1986
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK TABLE OF CONTENTS
114

Tobie of Contents

SECTION I ................................................... GENERAL


SECTIOI'J II ................................................. LIMITATIONS
C

SECTION III ................................ EMERGENCY PROCEDURES


op
yr
ig

SECTION IV .................................... NORMAL PROCEDURES


ht
C
om

SECTION V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. PERFORMANCE
m
an

SECTION VI ................... WEIGHT & BALANCE/EQUIPMENT LIST


de
r O **un

SECTION VII ..................... AIRPLANE & SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION


w off
ne ic
rs ial

SECTION VIII ....... AIRPLANE HANDLlI'JG, SERVICE & MAINTENANCE


G co
ro p

SECTION IX .............................................. SUPPLEMENTS


up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

Issued: 21 February 1976 Vii


ROCKWELL PILOTS
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION I
114 GENERAL

SECTION I

GENERAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Page
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l- 1 Baggage Space and Entry Dimensions . . . . . . l-4A <>
C

CONTENTS OF HANDBOOK DBOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-l Specific Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-5


op

REVISING THE HANDBOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND


y rig

AIRPLANE DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-2 TERMINOLOGY .......................... l-5


ht

DESCRIPTIVE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-2 General Airspeed Terminology


and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-5
C

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-2
om

Propeller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-2 Meteorological Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5


l-2 Power Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-6
m

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
an

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-2 Engine Controls and Instruments . . . . . . . . . . l-6


de *

maximum Certificated Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . l-4 Airplane Performance and Flight


l-4 Planning Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-6
r O *un

Minimum Certificated Weights . . . . . . . . . . . .


Standard Airplane Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-4A Weight and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-7
w off

Cabin and Entry Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-4A DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-8


ne ic

I
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *

INTRODUCTION
13
Al
lR

This handbook must be read carefully by the owner and operator in order to become familiar with the operation
ig

of the Rockwell Commander 114. This handbook includes the material required to be furnished to the pilot by
ht

FAR Part 23 and constitutes the Approved Airplane Flight Manual. It also contains additional data supplied
s

by the airframe manufacturer. The FAA Approved data is identified by the notation Data on this page is F.A.A.
R
es

Approved at the bottom of each page, as applicable.


er
ve
d

CONTENTS OF HANDBOOK

The Pilots Operating Handbook is designed to contain information necessary for safe and efficient operation of
the Rockwell Commander 114. The handbook is divided into nine sections as follows:

Section I General Section VI Weight and Balance/Equipment List

Section II Limitations Section VII Airplane and Systems Description

Section III Emergency Procedures Section VIII Airplane Handling, Service and
Maintenance
Section IV Normal Procedures
Section IX Supplements
Section V Performance

Issued: 21 February 1976 l-l


Revised: 16 July 1986 11986986
PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION I OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
GENERAL 114

NOTE
Since a large number of Rockwell Commander 114's are equipped
with different varieties of optional equipment, the illustrations
shown in this handbook \\'ill not be typical of every airplane.

REVISING THE HANDBOOK

The "List of Effective contains a list of all pages in the Pilot's Operating Handbook and their issue date.
When a page of the handbook is re'vised or changed, the "List of Effective Pages" will reflect the revision num-
ber and date of that revision. Upon receipt of revised pages from Rockwell International , the revised pages
must be inserted in the handbook and the obsoleted pages removed and destroyed.

NOTE
It is the responsibility of the pilot to assure this handbook is current
C

when using it to operate the Rockwell Commander 114.


op
y
rig
ht

AIRPLANE DIMENSIONS
C
om
m
an

See Figure 1-1.


de *
r O *un
w off

DESCRIPTIVE DATA
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p

ENGINE
up y*

I
20 *

One Lycoming IO-540-T4A5D (Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149)


IO-540-T4B5D (Serial Number 14150 and Subs.)
13
Al

Engine Type: Reciprocating, normally-aspirated, fuel injected, direct-drive, air-cooled, horizontally-


lR

opposed, six-cylinder, 541. 5 cubic inch displacement.


ig
ht
s

Maximum Horsepower Rating: 260 BHP at 2700 RPM.


R
es
er

PROPEllER
ve
d

One constant speed, hydraulically actuated, two-bladed Hartzell propeller, Model Number HC-C2YR-
IBF/F8467-7R. Diameter: 77 inches. Pitch Change: 14.20 (low pitch) to 30 0 (high pitch) at Pro-
peller Station 30. O.

FUEL

Approved Fuel Grade (Color): 100/130 Aviation Fuel (Green). 100 LL Aviation Fuel (Blue) is an
approved alternate.
Total Fuel Capacity: 70 Gallons.
Usable Fuel Capacity: 68 Gallons.

OIL

TYPES (Specifications) MINERAL ASHLESS DISPERSANT


(MIL-L-6082B) (MIL-L-22851)

1-2 Issued: 21 February 1976


n_ .. ..: -.""..J.. .. 1"""\_4_t.. __ l' f\,.,C
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION I
114 GENERAL

25' - 0 . 5 0 " - - - - - - - - ' 1 _ _

1
8'-5"

NOTE
TURN RADIUS CAN BE REDUCED BY
C

USING HEAVY DIFFERENTIAL


op

BRAKING. THIS PROCEDURE MAY


y rig

RESULT IN REDUCED TIRE LIFE DUE


TO SCRUBBING OF INBOARD AND
ht

NOSE WHEEL TI RE.


C
om
m
an
de *

TOTAL WING
r O *un

AREA 152 SQ FT
NORMAL TURN
w off
ne ic

RADIUS
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

1------------- 32' - 9.10" - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1

f.-==""""=......J..l<--- 77" DIA. MAX.


c::.a:::::::::::::::::::=:-__-.i1

.....----10' - 11.40,,-1

X161A

Figure 1-1. Airplane Dimensions


Issued: 21 February 1976 1-3
PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION I OPERATING HANDBOOK COMlVIANDER
GENERAL 114

Grades and Recommended :MINERAL


Operating Temperatures: (:MIL-L-6082B) A MBIENT AIR TEMP.

SAE 50 Above 600F


SAE 40 300 to gOOF
SAE 30 0 to 70F
SAE 20 Below 10F

ASHLESS DISPERSANT
(rvllL-L-22851) AMBIENT AIR TEMP.

SAE 50 or 40 Above 60 0 F
SAE 40 30 to 90F
SAE 40 or SAE 30 0 to 700 F
SAE 30 Below 100F

NOIE
C

For more detailed information concerning oil servicing, refer to the


op

airplane maintenance manual.


yrig
ht

Total Oil Capacity: 8 Quarts Normal Oil Quantity Operating Range: 6 to 8 Quarts
Minimum Safe Oil Quantity: 2 Quarts
C
om
m
an

MAXI MUM CERTIFICATED WEIGHTS


de *
r O *un

NOI.

I
w off
ne ic

Utility Category applicable to Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14254 with


rs ial

Custom Kit No. CK-114-1 installed, and Serial Numbers 14255 and Subs.
G co
ro p
up y*

Maximum Takeoff Weight: Maximum Zero Fuel Weight 2852 Ibs from 24.

I Normal Category 3140 Ibs. for Normal Category MAC to 31.5% MAC
20 *

Utility Category 2800 lbs. 2250 Ibs at 12% MAC


13

varying linearly to
Al

Maximum Landing Weight: 3140 lbs 2852 lbs at 24.7% MAC.


lR

Ma:timum Weight in Baggage


ig

Compartment: 200 Ibs. Maximum Zero Fuel Weight 2500 lbs from 17.27%
ht

for Utility Category MAC to 26.0% MAC


s

2250 Ibs at 12% MAC


R
es

varying linearly to
er

2500 lbs at 17.27% MAC .


ve
d

MINIMUM CERTIFICATED WEIGHTS

Minimum Weight - Normal Category Minimum Weight - Utility Category


2023 lbs at 12.00% MAC to 2023 Ibs at 12.00% !viAC to
2028 ihs at 14.70% MAC to 2028 Ibs at 14.70% !viAC to
2266 Ibs at 26.00% l\{AC to 2266 Ibs at 26.00% !viAC.
2503 Ibs at 31. 50% !viAC.

NOI.
Straight line variation between points.

1-4 Issued: 21 February 1976


Revised: 6 April 1977
ROCKWELL PilOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION I
114 GENERAL

STANDARD AIRPLANE WEIGHTS

Standard Airplane Weight for Standard Useful Load for


Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149: 1840 lbs Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149: 1300 Ibs

Standard Empty Weight for Standard Useful Load for


Serial Numbers 14150 and Subs: 1885 Ibs Serial Numbers 14150 and Subs: 1255 Ibs

CABIN AND ENTRY DIMENSIONS

Maximum Cabin Width: 47 in. Minimum Entry Width: 18 in.


Maximum Cabin Length: 75 in. Minimum Entry Height: 34 in.
Maximum Compartment : 49 in. Minimum Door Sill Height: 11 in.

BAGGAGE SPACE AND ENTRY DIMENSIONS


C
op

Compartment Width: 44 in. Front Compartment Volume: 22 eu.ft.


y

40 in. Rear Minimum Entry Width: 21 in.


rig

Compartment Length: 28 in. Minimum Entry Height: 18 in.


ht

Compartment Height: 36 in.


C
om
m
an
de *
r O *un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

Issued: 6 April 1977 1-4A/1-4B


ROCKWELL PilOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION I
114 GENERAL

SPECIFIC LOADINGS

Wing Loading: 20.7 Ibs /sq . it. Power Loading: 12.1Ibs/hp.

SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

GENERAL AIRSPEED TERMINOlOGY AND SYMBOLS

CAS Calibrated Airspeed means the indicated speed of an aircrait, corrected for position and instru-
ment error. Calibrated airspeed is equal to True Airspeed in a standard atmosphere at sea level.

KCAS Calibrated Airspeed expressed in "Knots".

_G_l',_.lU_r_ld----'__ is the speed of the aircrait relative to the ground.

lAS Indicated Airspeed is the speed of an aircrait as shown in the airspeed indicator when corrected
for \,:,;trument error. lAS values published in this handbook assumes zero instrument error.
C
op

KIAS Indicated Airspeed expressed in "Knots".


yr
ig
ht

TAS True Airspeed is the airspeed of an airplane relative to undisturbed air and is the CAS corrected
C

for altitude, temperature and compressibility.


om
m

Maneuvering Speed is the maximum speed at which application of maximum available aerody-
an

namic control will not overstress the airplane.


de
r O **un

Maximum Flap Extended Speed is the highest speed permissible with wing flaps in a prescribed
extended position.
w off
ne ic
rs ial

VLE Maximum Landing Gear Extended Speed is the maximum speed at which an aircrait can be saiely
flown with the landing gear extended.
G co
ro p
up y*

Ma.ximum Landing Gear Operating Speed is the maximum speed at which the landing gear can be
20 *

safely ex1:ended or retracted.


13

or mach number is the speed limit that may not be exceeded at any time.
Al

~~:~~~~~~
lR

VKO Max> ~'l1n Structural Cruising Speed or Mach Number is the speed that should not be exceeded
ig

MKO except in smooth air and then only with caution.


ht
s
R

Vs Stalling Speed 01' the minimum steady flight speed at which the aircraft is controllable.
es
er

VSO Stalling Speed or the minimum steady flight speed at which the airplane is controllable in the
ve

landing confi guration.


d

Vx Best Angle of Climb Speed is the airspeed which delivers the greatest gain of altitude in the
shortest possible horizontal distance.

Vy Best Rate-of-Climb Speed is the airspeed which delivers the greatest gain in altitude in the
shortest possible time.

METEOROlOGICAL TERMINOLOGY ;

ISA International Standard Atmosphere in which


(1) The air is a dry perfect gas;
(2) The temperature at Sea Level is 15 0 Celsius (590 Fahrenheit);
(3) The pressure at Sea Level is 29.92 inches Hg. (1013.2 Millibars);
(4) The temperature gradient from sea level to the altitude at which the temperature is
-56.6 o C (-69.7 0 F) is -O.00198 o C (-O.003566 0 F) per foot and Zero above that altitude.

OAT Outside Air Temperature is the free air static temperature obtained either from inflight tem-
perature indications or ground meteorological sources, corrected for instrument error and
compressibility effects.

Issued: 21 February 1976 1-5


PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION I OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
GENERAL 114

Indicated The number actually read from an altimeter when the barometric subscale has been set to
Pressure 29.92 inches Hg. (1013.2 Millibars).
Altitude

I'res:-;ure Altitude measured from standard sea level pressure (29.92 In. Hg.) by a pressure or barometric
AltItude altimeter. It is the indicated pressure altitude corrected for position and instrument error. In
this handbook, altimeter instrument errors are assumed to be zero.

Station Actual atmospheric pressure at field elevation.


Pressure

Wind The wind velocities recorded as variables on the charts of mis handbook are to be understood
as the headwind or tailwind components of me reported winds.

POWER TERMINOLOGY

MCP Maximum Continuous Power (MCP) is the maximum power rating not limited by time. It is
obtained by setting full throttle at 2700 RPM, full rich mixture setting. For this airplane,
the takeoff power limitation is me same as maximum continious power.

Leaning Above 75%: Full rich only.


Procedure
75% and Below: BEST POWER: This mixture guarantees, for a given manifold pressure and
engine speed setting that maximum power is obtained from me engine. It is
recommended mat me best power mixture be determined by using me EGT
gauge to determine the peak temperatures and then enrichening me fuel mixture
until the EGT decreases by 100 degrees Fahrenheit from peak.
BEST ECONOMY: This mixture guarantees for a given manifold pressure and
C

engine speed setting the minimum acceptable fuel flow rates for a particular
op

power level. It is recommended mat the best economy mixture be determined


y
rig

by setting peak EGT. For flight planning purposes use schedules on fuel flow
ht

rates found in Section V.


C
om
m

ENGINE CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS


an
de *

Throttle A control in the cockpit that enables the pilot to control manifold pressure.
r O *un

Propeller A control in the cockpit that enables the pilot to adjust propeller speed.
w off

Control
ne ic
rs ial

Mixture A control in the cockpit that enables the pilot to control the fuel/air ratio.
G co

Control
ro p
up y*

Alternate A control in the cockpit that enables the pilot to select induction air from an alternate
20 *

Air Control sheltered source.


13
Al

EGT Exhaust Gas Temperature is the temperature of me exhaust gases measured in the exhaust riser
lR

of cylinder No.2. As a direct relationship exists between EGT and fuel/air ratio,leaning is often
ig

accomplished with reference to the peak EGT.


h
ts

Tachometer An instrument that indicates engine speed


R

0
es

I
er

'v1anifold An instrument that indicates me pressure in the induction air manifold.


ve

Pressure
d

Gage
Propeller An engine component located on me engine which maintains a selected propeller RPM, and is
Governor set by the propeller control.

AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE AND FLIGHT PLANNING TERMINOLOGY

Climb The ratio of me height gained during some period of a climb, to the horizontal distance traversed
Gradient in the same time interval.

1-6 Issued: 21 February 1976


Hpv; "",r!' 1 f) n",,,pmhp.,. H17?
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION I
114 GENERAL

Demon- The demonstrated crosswind velocity (19kts) is the velocity of the crosswind component for
strated which adequate control of the airplane during takeoff and landing was actually demonstrated dur-
Crosswind ing certification tests. The value shown is not considered to be limiting.
\' elocity

\1,\ Minimum enroute I FR altitude.

Route A part of a route. Each end of that part is identified by: (1) a geographical location; or (2) a
Se"lllcnt point at which a definite radio fix can be established.

WEIGHT AND BALANCE

Heference An imaginary vertical plane from which all horizontal distances are measured for balance pur-
Datum poses.

Fu A location along the airplane fuselage in terms of distance from the reference datum.
Station

Arm The horizontal distance from the reference datum to the center of gravity (C. G.) of an item.

:\loment The product of the weight of an item multiplied by its arm. (For convenience, moment is some-
times quoted in 1000's of In-Lbs to reduce the number of digits.)

Tare The weight of chocks, blocks, stands, etc., that were on the scales when the airplane was
weighed. The weight of these items or other items present during weighing which will not be
present during flight has to be subtracted from the scale reading(s) to determine the actual
weight of the airplane.
C

Center of The datum station about which an airplane would balance, if suspended. Its distance from the
op

Gravity reference datum is found by dividing the total moment by the total weight of the airplane.
yr

(C.G.)
ig
ht

C.G. The arm obtained by adding the airplane's individual moments and dividing the sum by the total
C

AEl1
om

weight.
m

C.G. Limits The extreme center of gravity locations within which the airplane must be operated at a given
an

weight. (See Section IT, Limitations.)


de
r O **un

Usable Fuel Fuel available for flight planning (68 U.S. gallons).
w off
ne ic

Unusable Fuel remaining after a runout test has been completed in accordance with governmental regula-
rs ial

Fuel tions.
G co
ro p

Payload Weight of occupants, cargo and baggage.


up y*
20 *

Maximum Maximum weight approved for start of takeoff run.


13

Takeoff
Weight
Al
l R

Maximum Maximum weight approved for landing touchdown.


ig
ht

Landing
s

Weight
R
es

Maximum Maximum weight exclusive of usable fuel.


er

Zero Fuel
ve

Weight
d

Minimum
Flying
Weight
Minimum weight approved for all operations.

The following terms apply to Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149:


I
Airplane as The airplane as specified per Sales Order plus full oil, full operating fluids and no fuel.
Weighed

Issued: 21 February 1976 1-7


PilOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION I OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
GENER6,L 114

Corrected
Empty
Weight
Standard airplane weight plus optional equipment, unusable fuel and minus drainable oil.

Corrected empty weight minus optional equipment.


St:ll:chrd
Ai rplan

Loading Corrected empty weight plus drainable oil and 170 pound pilot.
Sub-total

Useful Load Difference between takeoff weight, or ramp weight if applicable, and corrected empty weight.

I Standard
Useful Load
Difference between takeoff weight, or ramp weight it applicable, and standard airplane weight.

The following terms apply to Serial Number 14150 and Subs:


C

Standard Standard airplane with unusable fuel, full oil, full hydraulic and operating fluids, standard inter-
op

Empty ior, seating, instruments, accessories and all other standard equipment. No optional avionics
yr

or miscellaneous equipment.
ig
ht

Airplane The airplane as specified per sales order, plus full oil, full hydraulic and operating fluids and
C
om

As Weighed unusable fuel.


m
an

Basic Airplane as weighed plus ballast for optional equipment, if required.


Empty
de

Weight
r O **un
w off

Dry Basic empty weight minus all oil, all unusable fuel and aU hydraulic and operating fluids.
ne ic

Empty
rs ial

Weig.l)t
G co
ro p
up y*

Empty Basic empty weight minus drainable oil.


Wei!ilit
20 *
13

Standard Dry empty weight of a standard airplane (no optional equipment or associated ballast).
Al

Dry Empty
l

Weight
R
ig
ht

Standard Difference between takeoff weight, or ramp weight if applicable, and standard empty weight.
s

Useful
R
es

Load
er
ve

Useful Difference between takeoff weight, or ramp weight if applicable, and basic empty weight.
d

Load

DEFINITIONS

WAR~lNG Operating procedures, techniques, etc. , which could result in personal injury or loss
of life if not carefully followed.

CAUTION Operating procedures, techniques, etc., which could result in damage to equipment if
not carefully followed.

NOTE An operating procedure, technique, etc., which is considered essential to emphasize.

1-8 Issued: 21 February 1976


T:)"" ... ...; .... ""'..;J . . . A ....... ,.,l.- _ _ 'In,.,a
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION II
114 LIMITATIONS

SECTION II

LIMIT ATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Page
INTRODUCTION ........................... 2- 1 BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT ............... 2- 4A
C

AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS ...... " ..... , ..... 2- 1 MANEUVER LIMITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2- 5


op

AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS .......... 2- 2 Normal Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2- 5


y rig

POWER PLANT LIMITATIONS .............. 2- 3 Utility Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2- 5


ht

Engine ................................ 2- 3 FLIGHT LOAD FACTOR LIMITS. . . . . . . . . . . .. 2- 5


C

POWER PLANT INSTRUMENT MARKINGS. . .. 2- 3 Normal Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2- 5


om

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LIMITS ............. 2- 4 Utility Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2- 5


m

SEATS .................................... 2- 4 TYPES OF OPERATION .................... 2- 6


an

WEIGHT LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2- 4 FUEL LIMITATIONS ....................... 2- 7


de *

CEN"TER OF GRAVITY LIMITS. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2- 4 EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS 2- 7


r O *un

Normal Category .. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2- 4A PLACARDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2- 7


Utility Category .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2- 4A
w off
ne ic
rs ial

INTRODUCTION
G co
ro p
up y*

This section of the Pilot's Operating Handbook presents the various operating limitations, the significance of
20 *

such limitations, instrument markings, color coding and basic placards necessary for the safe operation of the
13

airplane, its powerplant, standard systems and standard equipment.


Al
lR

The Limitations included in this section have been approved by the Federal Aviation Administration. For
ig

additional limitations refer to FAA Type Certificate Data Sheet # A12S0.


ht
s
R
es

AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
er
ve
d

NOTE
Utility Category is applicable to Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14254 with
Custom Kit No. CK-114-1 installed, and Serial Numbers 14255 and Subs.

SPEED KCAS KIAS REMARKS

Maneuvering Normal Category Do not make full or abrupt control


118 (3140 lbs) 116 movements above this speed.
VA 109 (2658 Ibs) 107
95 (2023 lbs) 93

Utility Category
120 (2800 Ibs) 118
107 (2250 Ibs) 105
102 (2023 Ibs) 100

Figure 2-1. Airspeed limitations (Sheet 1 of 2)

Issued: 21 February 1976 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 2-1


Pnn"icnA. 1'7 v ..... 'h_,.r>._.~ 1n""O
PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION II OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
LIMIT ATIONS 114

SPEED KCAS KIAS REMARKS

Maximum Flap 150 (0-20 0 ) 150 Do not exceed this speed with a
Extended 120 (20-25 0 ) 120 gi ven flap setting.
109 (25-35 0 ) 109

J\I:ndmum Landing Do not extend or retract landing


Gear Ope rating 130 129 gear above this speed.
VLO

Maximum Land- 186 187 Do not exceed this speed with


ing Gear Extended landing gear extended. Do not
VLE exceed VNE'

Never Exceed 186* (SL-12, 500 ft) 187 Do not exceed this speed
VNE 175 (16,000 ft) 175 in any operation.
161 (20,000 ft) 160
147 (24,000 ft) 145
C
op

Ma:umum Struc- 148* (SL-12,500 ft) 147


yr

Do not exceed this speed except


ig

tural Cruising 139 (16, 000 ft) 137 in smooth air and then only with
ht

VNO 128 (20,000 ft) 126 caution.


C

117 (24, 000 ft) 115


om
m
an

Maximum Cowl Do not exceed this speed with the


de

Flaps Open** 130 129 cowl flaps open.


r O **un
w off
ne ic

Ma.ximum Do not exceed this speed with the


rs ial

Side Vlindow 130 129 side window open.


G co

Open
ro p
up y*

~Straight Line Variation between points. **Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149 only.
20 *
13

Figure 2-1. Airspeed limitations (Sheet 2 of 2)


Al
l
R
ig

AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS


ht
s
R
es

MAR.K.ING KCAS KlAS SIGNIFICANCE


er
ve

White Arc 53-109 58-108 Full Flap Operating Range. Lower limit is
d

maximum weight stalling speed in landing


conti gura ti on. Upper limit is maximum
speed allowable with flaps fully extended.

Green Arc 60-148 65-147 Normal Operating Range. Lower limit is


maximum weight stalling speed with flaps
and landing gear retracted. Upper limit
is maximum structural cruising speed.

Yellow Arc 148-186 147-187 Operations must be conducted with caution.

Red Line 186 187 Maximum Speed for ALL operations.

NOTE: Airspeed indicator markings are based on Calibrated Airspeeds.

Figure 2-2. Airspeed Indicator Markings

2-2 Issued: 21 February 1976


..J. ~ .. ~_':1 10'1'"
ROCh.'WELL PilOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION II
114 LIMIT ATIONS

POWER PLANT LI MIT ATIONS

ENGINE

LH'oming IO-540-T4A5D (Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149


IO-540-T4B5D (Serial Numbers 14150 and Subs.).

Engine Operating Limits for Takeoff and Continuous Operations:

:-..raximum BHP
:\laximum RPM
:\Llximum Cylinder Head Temp.
:\laximum Oil Temperature
260
2700
500F
245F
Maximum Oil Pressure
SiN 14000 thru 14349
SiN 14350 and Subs
Minimum Fuel Injector Inlet Pressure
90 PSI
100 PSI
14 PSI
I
Minimum Oil Pressure 25 PSI Maximum Fuel Injector Inlet Pressure 45 PSI
Maximum Fuel Nozzle Pressure 9.5 PSI
C

POWER PLANT INSTRUMENT MARKINGS


op
y
rig
ht

RED LINE YELLOW ARC GREEN ARC YELLOW ARC RED LINE
C
om

INSTRUMENTS MINIMUM CAUTION NOR\1AL CAUTION MAXIMUM


LIMIT RANGE OPERATING RANGE LIMIT
m
an

- - 2200-2700 - 2700
de *

T ACHOivlET ER (RPM)
r O *un

OIL TEMPERATURE (OF) - 100-160 160-245 - 245


w off
ne ic

CYLINDER HEAD
rs ial

TEMPERATURE (OF) - - 200-500 - 500


G co
ro p
up y*

OIL PRESSURE (PSI)


S/N 14000 thru 14349 25 25-60 60-90 - 90
20 *

SiN 14350 and Subs 25 25-60 60-90 90-100 100


13

- - -
Al

FUEL FLOW (GPH) - 9.5 PSI


lR

(27.5 GPH)
ig
ht

FUEL PRESSURE (PSI) 14 - 14-45 - 45


s
R
es
er
ve

Figure 2-3. Power Plant Instrument Markings


d

Issued: 21 February 1976 2-3


n . . . 'f..;coA1R f"\O("OT'r"\'hOT" 1Q77
PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION II OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
LIMITATIONS 114

I
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LIMITS

Maximum allowable voltmeter reading (red line) is 16.0 volts.

SEATS

Front seats must be in upright position for takeoff and landing.

No passengers allowed in the rear seat during utility category


operations.

WEIGHT LIMITS
IIOIE
C
op

Utility Category applicable to Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14254 with


y rig

Custom Kit No. CK -114-1 installed, and 14255 and Subs.


ht

Maximum Takeoff Weight: Maximum Zero Fuel Weight 28521bs from 24.7%
C
om

Normal Category 3140 Ibs. for Normal Category MAC to 31.5% MAC
Utility Category 2800 Ibs. 2250 Ibs at 12% MAC
m
an

varying linearly to
Maximum Landing Weight: 3140 lbs. 2852 Ibs at 24.7% MAC.
de *

Maximum Weight in Baggage


r O *un

Compartment: 200 Ibs. Maximum Zero Fuel Weight 2500 lbs from 17.27%
w off

for Utility Category MAC to 26.0% :M:AC


ne ic

2250 Ibs at 12% MAC


rs ial

varying linearly to
G co

2500 Ibs at 17.27% MAC .


ro p
up y*

Minimum Weight:
20 *
13

Normal Category Utility Category


Al

2023 Ibs at 12.00% MAC to 2023 lbs at 12.00% MAC to


lR

2028 Ibs at 14.70% MAC to 2028 Ibs at 14.70% MAC to


ig

2266 lbs at 26.00% MAC to 2266 Ibs at 26.00% MAC.


ht

2503 lbs at 31. 50% MAC.


s
R
es

IIOIE
er
ve

Straight line variation between points.


d

2-4 DATA Dill THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED Issued: 1 October 1976
Revised: 16 December 1977
ROCKWELL PilOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION II
114 LIMITATIONS

CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITS


NORMAL CATEGORY
FO:r\,ard: 106.91 Inches Aft of Datum (25.0% !'vIAC) at 3140 lbs.
101.11 Inches Aft of Datum (14.5% !'vlAC) at 2658 lbs.
99.75 Inches Aft of Datum (12.0% MAC) at 2250 lbs.
99.75 Inches Aft of Datum (12. !'vIAC) at 2023 lbs.

Aft; 110.50 Inches Aft of Datum (31.5% !'vIAC) at 3140 lbs.


110.50 Inches Aft of Datum (31.5% MAC) at 2503 lbs.

Maximum Zero Fuel Weight

106.74 Inches (24.7% MAC) to 110.50 Inches (31.5% MAC) at 28521bs.


99.75 Inches (12.0% MAC) at 2250 lbs. to 106.74 Inches (24.7% MAC) at 2852 lbs.
C

UTIlITY CATEGORY
op
yr

Forward: 102.82 Inches Aft of Datum (17.57% MAC) at 2800 ibs.


ig

101.11 Inches Aft of Datum (14.5% MAC) at 26581bs.


ht

99.75 Inches Aft of Datum (12.0% MAC) at 2250 lbs.


C

99.75 Inches Aft of Datum (12.0% MAC) at 2023 Ibs.


om
m

Aft: 107.46 Inches Aft of Datum (26.0% !'vIAC) at 2800 ibs.


an

107.46 Inches Aft of Datum (26.0% !'vIAC) at 2266 Ibs.


de
r O **un

Maximum Zero Fuel Weight


w off
ne ic

102.66 Inches (17.27% MAC) to 107.46 Inches (26.0% MAC) at 2500 lbs.
rs ial

99.75 Inches (12.0% MAC) at 2250 lbs. to 102.66 Inches {17 . 27% !'vIAC} at 2500 Ibs.
G co
ro p
up y*

NOIE
20 *

Straight line variation between points.


13
Al
l

Datum Location: Fuselage Station 0.0 Inches.


R
ig
ht

Mean Aerodynamic Chord: 55.05 Inches.


s
R

L.E. of Mean Aerodynamic Chord: Fuselage Station 93.15 Inches.


es
er
ve
d

BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT

No baggage allowed in baggage compartment during Utility Category operation.

Issued: 1 October 1976 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 2-4A


PilOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION II OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
LIMITATIONS 114

CENTER OF GRAVITY CO MAC


12 14 15 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

3000
U)

5c::: 2800 I-~ '~--'-'.'~--,.~.-- --, ...--


o~
~ 2600 I----+----.--..~.-..-.,.-.--.

-
V
~
;:;
C

2400
op

E-<
Ii..
yr

~
ig
ht

~ 220 0 I--.-'-.'~-C'-"-'+' -_....___ .;.. ___+__.. +.. __ l .i...


C

:;;::
om
m
an
de
r O **un
w off

100 102 104 106 108 110 111


ne ic
rs ial

CENTER OF GRAVITY INCHES AFT OF DATUM


G co
ro p
up y*
20 *

CENTER OF GRAVITY % ~1AC


13

12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
Al
l R
ig
ht

3000
s
R
es

~
er

5 2800
ve

o
d

p.
t
G 2600
....
~
;:;
E-< 2400
Ii..

~
U
p::; 2200
:;;::

2000

102 104 106 108 110 111


CENTER OF GRAVITY INCHES AFT OF DATUM

Figure 2-4. Flight Envelope


2-4B DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED Issued: 1 October 1976
ROCKWELL PilOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION II
114 LIMIT ATIONS

MANEUVER LIMITS

This airplane is certified in the Normal Category. When operated within a reduced weight and C .G. envelope
\Vei & Center of Gra\ity Limitations), the airplane is also certified in the Utility Category. The follow-
ing maneuvers are either authorized or unauthorized as indicated.

NORMAL CATEGORY

AUTHORIZED MANEUVERS

(Angle of Bank Not to Exceed 60 0 .) 118 Knots at 3140 Ibs.


109 Knots at 2658 lbs.
95 Knots at 2023 Ibs.
Chandelles (Angle of Bank Not to Exceed 60 0 .) 118 Knots at 3140 lbs.
109 Knots at 2658 Ibs.
95 Knots at 2023 lbs.
Turns (Angle of Bank Not to Exceed 60 0 .) 118 Knots at 3140 lbs.
C

109 Knots at 2658 lbs.


op

95 Knots at 2023 Ibs.


y

Stalls (Except Whip Stalls) Slow Entry Rate Only


rig
ht

NOTE
C
om

Maximum altitude loss during a wings level stall recovery is 400 feet.
m
an

Any other maneuver incidental to normal flying.


de *
r O *un

Maneuvers
w off
ne ic

Any other intentional maneuver which involves an abrupt change in the airplanes attitude, an abnormal
rs ial

attitude, or abnormal acceleration not necessary for normal flight.


G co
ro p

Intentional spins are prohibited.


up y*

Inverted maneuvers are prohibited.


20 *
13

UTILITY CATEGORY
Al

AUTHORIZED MANEUVERS
lR
ig
ht
s

(Angle of Bank in Excess of 60 0 120 Knots at 2800 lbs.


R

.)
es

107 Knots at 2250 lbs.


er

102 Knots at 20231bs.


ve

Chandelles (Angle of Bank in Excess of 60 0 .) 120 Knots at 2800 Ibs.


d

107 Knots at 2250 Ibs.


102 Knots at 2023 lbs.
Turns (Angle of Bank in Excess of 60 0 .) 120 Knots at 2800 lbs.
107 Knots at 2250 lbs.
102 Knots at 2023 Ibs.
In addition, all maneuvers approved for Normal Category Operation.

Intentional spins and inverted maneuvers are prohibited.

FLIGHT LOAD FACTOR LIMITS


NORMAL CATEGORY

Limit Load Factors: Flaps Retracted: +3.8 G's to -1.52 G's


Flaps at 35: +2.0 G's to 0.0 G's


UTILITY CATEGORY
Limit Load Factors: Flaps Retracted: +4.4 G's to -1. 76 G's.
Flaps at 35: +2.0 G's to 0.0 G's
Issued: 21 February 1976 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 2-5
PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION II OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
LIMIT ATIONS 114

TYPES OF OPERATION

This aircralt has been certificated in accordance with FAR Part 23, Amendment 7 for day and night VFR
(;peratJlllL \Vhen the instruments. systems and equipment are installed in accordance with FAR 91.33, the
aircrait is certificated for day and night IFR.

Flight into known icing conditions is prohibited.

The following list summarizes many of the instruments, systems and equipment that, depending upon the type
of operation desired, determine the basic airworthiness of the aircraft. If an instrument, system or item of
equipment is inoperative, this list should be consulted for the kind of operation intended. Should the particular
item be required, a flight should not be undertaken until suitable repairs have been made.

This li:ot addresses only operations conducted under FAR Part 91. For other types of operations, consult the
apprc:priate regulations.

INSTRUMENT, SYSTEM OR KINDS OF OPERATION


C
op

EQUIPMENT DAY VFR NIGHT VFR DAYIFR NIGHT IFR


yr
ig

Airspeed Indicator Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd


ht

Altimeter Reqd Reqd Sensitive Sensitive


C

Altimeter Altimeter
om

Altimeter - Sensitive Not Reqd Not Reqd Reqd Reqd


m

Altimeter - Encoding Reqd above Reqd above Reqd above Reqd above
an

12,500 MSL 12,500 MSL 12,500 MSL 12,500 MSL


de

Reqd in all Reqd in all Reqd in all Reqd in all


r O **un

TCA's TCA's TCA's TCA's


w off

Ma~netic Direction Indicator Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd


ne ic

Fuel Quantity Indicators Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd


rs ial

Oil Pressure Indicator Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd


G co

Oil Temperature Indicator Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd


ro p

Tachometer Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd


up y*

Cylinder Head Temperature Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd


20 *

Indicator
13

ManifDld Pressure Indicator Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd


~1aster Switch Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd
Al

Alternator Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd


R l

All Circuit Breakers Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd


ig
ht

Seat Belts for Each Occupant Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd


s

Ammeter Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd


R

Position Light System Not Reqd Reqd Not Reqd Reqd


es

Anti-Collision Light Not Reqd Reqd Not Reqd Reqd


er

Alternate Air System Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd


ve

Alternate Static Source Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd


d

Cowl Flaps Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd


Flap Position Indicator Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd
Elevator Trim Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd
Elevator Trim Indicator Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd
Emergency Gear System Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd
Auxiliary Fuel Pump Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd

Gear Position Lights


Gear Warning Bell or Horn
Reqd
Reqd
Reqd
Reqd
Reqd
Reqd
Reqd
Reqd

Issued: 21 February 1976


2-6 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED Revised: 17 February 1978
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMA~DER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION II
114 LIMIT ATIONS

INSTRUMENT, SYSTEM OR KINDS OF OPERATION


I EQUIPMENT DAY VFR NIGHT VFR DAYIFR NIGHT IFR

Gear Warning Light Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd


Nose \V'heel Steering Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd
Rudder Trim System Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd
Stall Warning System Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd
Propeller Governor Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd
voltmeter Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd
Battery Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd
Spinner Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd
Voltage Regulator Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd
Instrument Panel Light Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd
Fuel Pressure Indicator Reqd Reqd Reqd Reqd
Gyro, Artificial Horizon Not Reqd Not Reqd Reqd Reqd
Gyro, Directiona.l Not Reqd Not Reqd Reqd Reqd
C

Clock with Swee~\ 3econd Hand Not Reqd Not Reqd Reqd Reqd
op

OAT Gage Not Reqd Not Reqd Reqd Reqd


yr

Turn-an-:- Bank Indicator Not Reqd Not Reqd Reqd Reqd


ig
ht
C
om
m
an
de
r O **un

Oxygen System Flights in excess of 30 minutes at altitudes between


w off

12,500 and 14,000 ft. MSL require the pilot to utilize


ne ic

supplemental 02. Flights in excess of 14,000 ft.


rs ial

require the pilot to utilize supplemental 02' Flights


G co

in excess of 15,000 ft. MSL require that all occupants


ro p
up y*

be provided with supplemental 02'


20 *

Emergency Locator Beacon Emergency Locator Beacons are required to be in-


13

stalled for all operations except ferrying an aircraft


Al

to location where the locator can be installed or fixed


l

or training flights that do not exceed a radius of 20


R
ig

miles from the originating airport.


ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

FUEL LIMITATIONS

Capacity 70 Gallons

Unusable 2 Gallons

Usable 68 Gallons

EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS


Leaning with reference to peak Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) is prohibited above 75% Maximum
Continuous Power (MCP).

Operation on the lean side of peak EGT is prohibited, except momentarily to establish peak EGT.

PLACARDS - See Figure 2-5.


Issued: 21 February 1976
Revised: 12 April 1976 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 2-7
PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION II OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
LIMIT A TIONS 114

MAXIMUM SPEED-
MAX. BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT WINDOW
OPEN 130K
CAPACITY 200 lBS

Near Vent Window


Baggage Door Upper Left Corner

MANEUVERING SPEEO 13140 LBSI .. 118 KCAS


MAX GEAR OPERATING SPEEO . 130 KCAS
MAX SPEEO 20 FLAP _.. 150 KCAS
MAX SPE E0 25 FLAP .... 120 KCAS
MAX SPEEO COWL fLAP OPEN .... 130 KCAS

Near Airspeed Indicator


Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149

AU.IFTI VNE (KCASI VNO IKCASI


SL12.500 186 148 MANEUVERING ~"~ ~ [) "40 L1ISI 116 KCAS
C

16.000 175 139 MAX GEAR OPERATING SPHD 130 KCAS


20.000 161 128
op

24.000 147 117 MAX SPEED 200 fLAP . . ISO KCAS


MAX SPEED 250 FlAP . 120 KCAS
y rig

Above Altimeter
Near Airspeed Indicator
ht

Serial Number 14150 and Subs.


C
om
m
an
de *
r O *un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p

Center Console at Fuel Selector


up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig

On Instrument Sub-panel Below


ht

Master Switch
s
R

Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149


es
er
ve
d

FLAPS
USE 100 TO 200 FOR TAKEOFF

Under Flap Indicator

On Instrument Sub-panel Below


Master Switch
Serial Number 14150 and Subs.

Figure 2-5. Placards (Sheet 1 of 2)


2-8 Issued: 21 February 1976
ro- " ____ :1 1 (V'.,,.,
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION II
114 LIMITATIONS

np
0.-
:0""
:: ,",p
Or
"",
,.,:n
w-
(J-, I-
(')?
-<p
- .... "''''
:>0
" r.
",:0
(")Z
0,., Sl~ EXT ->
70
80
54
75
38
38
60
60
z'"
....
(')
::'0
>-0:
70 7 18 11 29 ~;
Pp 80 9 18 15 29 n~
90
100
85
9~)
.42
48
66
77
I-<
On "''''
>-u
"'Z
90
100
12
15
15 19 24 pp
,,-
110 104 9 23 15
120 114
57
70
91
111 ~8 ~Q 110 18 a 28 a ii
s:'"
OC "'>-
Z(J
120 21 14 33 22 00
130 122 87 137
138 130 103 164 """
r-o
~m
o:W
wo:
.... a:
130
140
25
29
33
57
39
46
52
91
OC
m;n
rn
;;: -'0 158 37 118 58 190 _m
"'u 160
180
38
48
60 ;;:
AIRSPEED LIMITS sa SECT. II PILOT'S OPER,UING HANDBOOK 183 50
DO NOT OPEN 1'111'<00'"' ABOVE 130 KCAS
.AIRSPEED LIMITS, SEE SECT. II PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK
OTHfA: CQR \'v:NOOW

In Pocket on Pilot's Map Case


C
op
y rig
ht

HEADREST TC BI: IN PLACE


C

+ DURING TAKEOFF & LANDING


om

....
m
an

On Top of Pilot and Front Passenger Seat Back


Beneath Headrest.
de *
r O *un
w off
ne ic
rs ial

OPERATING LIMITATIONS OPERATING LIMITATIONS


ThiS. AIRI'LANE MUST BE
G co

THIS AIRPLANE MUST 8E OPERATEO ASA NORMAL


OPERATED AS A NORMAL OR UTILITY CATEGORY
ro p

CATEGORY AIRPLANE IN AIRPLANE IN COMPLI


up y*

ANCE WITH OPERATING


COMPLIANCE WITH OPER LIMITATIONSSTATEO IN
ATING LIMITATIONS STA PILOTS OPERATING
20 *

TED IN THE AIRPLANE HANOBOOK.


FLIGHT MANUAL. AU MARKINGS ANO
13

PLACARDS ON THE AIR


NO ACROBATIC MAN PLANE APPLY TO ITS
EUVERS ARE APPROVED. OPERATION Ab A NOR
Al

INTENTIONAL SPINS ARE MAL CATEGORY AIR


lR

PROHIBITED. PLANE. FOR UtlLITV


CATEGORV OPERATION
REFER TO THE PILOTS
ig

THIS AIRPLANE IS OPERATING HANDBOOK.


ht

APPROVED FOR FLIGHT THIS AIRPLANE IS AP


IN DAVINIGHT VfRllfR PROVED FOR FLIGHT IN
s

WHEN EOUIPPED IN DAY/NIGHT VFRIIFR


R

ACCORDANCE WITH fAR WHEN EOUIPPED IN AC


CORDANCE WITH FAR
es

91. fLIGHT INTO KNOWN 91, F LIGHT iNTO KNOWN


ICING CONDITIONS IS ICING CONDITIONS IS
er

PROHIBITED. PROHIBITED.
ve
d

Windshield Center Frame Windshield Center Frame


NORMAL CATEGORY UTILITY CATEGORY

Figure 2-5. Placards (Sheet 2 of 2)


Issued: 21 February 1976
Revised: 6 April 1977 2-9/2-10
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION III
114 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

SECTION III

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Page
INTRODUCTION .......................... . 3-1 Maximum Gliding Distance ............... 3- 9
C

AIRSPEEDS FOR SAFE OPERATIONS ....... . 3-2 Landing Gear System Emergencies ........ 3 9
op

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES CHECKLIST ... . 3-2 Failure to Retract .................... 3 9


yr

Failure to Extend .................... 3 -1 0


ig

Engine Failure ......................... . 3-2


ht

During Takeoff Roll .................. 3-2 Electrical System Emergencies............ 3-10


C

In Flight ........................... . 3-2 Excessive Battery Charging Indicated


om

Airstart ............................... 3-3 on Ammeter ........................ 3-10


m

Emergency Landings .................... . 3-3 Alternator Failure .................... 3-11


an

Power Off .......................... . 3-3 Circuit Breaker Tripping ............. 3 -11


de

Precautionary Off - Airport Landing Avionics Master Switch/Circuit Breaker


r O **un

With Power ........................ . 3-4 Tripping ........................... 3 11


Landing With a flat Main Gear Tire ... . 3-4 Power Plant Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-11
w off
ne ic

Landing With a flat Nose Gear Tire ... . 3-5 Loss of Oil Pressure Indication ........ 3-11
Excessive Oil Pressure ............... 3-12
rs ial

Landing With One Retracted or Unlocked


3-5 Excessive Oil/Cylinder Head
G co

Main Gear ........................


ro p

Landing With a Defective Nose Gear .... 3-5 Temperature ....................... 3-12
up y*

Landing With Power and With Landing Rough Running Engine or Loss of Power. 3-12
3-6 Propeller Overspeed .............. 3-12
20 *

Gear Retracted .................... .


Landing Without Power and With Miscellaneous Emergencies .............. 3-13
13

Landing Gear Retracted ............ . 3-6 Inadvertent Icing Encounter ............ 3 -13
Al

Ditching ............................ . 3-7 Extreme Turbulence Encounter ........ 3-13


lR

Smoke and Fire ........................ . 3-7 Obstructed Static Source ............. 3-13
ig

Electrical Fire on the Ground ......... . 3-7 Obstructed PUot ..................... 3-13
ht

Engine Fire on the Ground ........... . 3-8 Cabin Door Opening in flight .......... 3-14
s
R

Fire During Takeoff ................. . 3-8 Air Piracy ........................... 3-14


es

Electrical Fire in flight ............. . 3-8 Inadvertent Spins ..................... 3 -14


er

Engine Fire in Flight ................ . 3-9 AMPLIFIED EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ..... 3-14
ve

Cabin Fire ......................... . 3-9 Landing Gear Malfunctions ............... 3-14


d

Emergency Descent .................... . 3-9 Electrical System ....................... 3-15

INTRODUCTION

Emergencies caused by aircraft or engine malfunctions are extremely rare if proper pre-flight inspections and
maintenance are practiced. Weather associated emergencies are rarely encountered when adequate pre-flight
planning and good judgement are used.

The following information is presented to enable the pilot to form, in advance, a definite plan of action for cop-
ing with the most probable emergency situations which could occur in the operation of the airplane. Where
practicable, the emergencies requiring immediate corrective action are shown in checklist form for easy refer-

Issued: 21 February 1976 DATA ON THIS PAGe IS F,A.A, APPROVED 3-1


PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTlONm OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 114

ence. Amplified procedures are also presented as required to provide the pilot with a more complete under-
standing of the procedures.

Emergency procedures associated with the Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) and other optional systems
can be found in Section IX.

AIRSPEEDS FOR SAFE OPERATIONS

OPERATION KIAS CONFIGURATION

Emergency Descent" 187 - SL to 12, 500 Ft Gear Down, Flaps Up


175 - 16,000 Ft
160 - 20,000 Ft
145 - 24,000 Ft

Power Off Glide 82 - 3140 Lbs ** Gear Up, Flaps Up


C

(Best Glide Angle) 74 - 2600 Lbs Cowl Flaps Closed


op

65 - 2023 Lbs
y
rig
ht

Power Off Approach 71* - 86 Gear Down, Flaps 350


C
om

Extreme Turbulence 116 - 3140 Lbs ** Gear Up, Flaps Up


m

Encounter 107 - 2658 Lbs


an

93 - 2023 Lbs
de *
r O *un

" Smooth Air Only


**
w off

Straight Line Variation between points


ne ic
rs ial

Figure 3-1. Airspeeds for Safe Operations


G co
ro p
up y*
20 *

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES CHECKLIST


13
Al
lR

ENGINE FAILURE
ig
ht

DURING TAKEOFF ROLL


s
R

1. Throttle - RETARD.
es

2. Brakes - APPLY.
er
ve

3. Flaps - RETRACT.
d

4. Mixture - IDLE CUTOFF.


5. Fuel Selector - OFF.
6. Master Switch - OFF.

IN FLIGHT

1. Airspeed - 82 KlAS.
2. Auxiliary Fuel Pump - ON.
3. Alternate Induction Air - HOT.
4. Mixture - FULL RICH.
5. Fuel Selector - FULLEST TANK (check other two positions).
6. Fuel Selector Drain Valve - CHECK CLOSED (handle fully down).
7. Ignition Switch - BOTH (check right and left).

3-2 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS FAA. APPROVED Issued: 21 February 1976


ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION III
114 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

AIRSTART

1. Airspeed 82 KIAS, minimum for windmilling propeller.

NOIE
If propeller stops windmilling, use normal starting procedures
as outlined in Section IV.

2. Fuel Selector FULLER TANK.

NOIE
To minimize restart time, select the fuller tame
Do not use the BOTH position.

3. Mixture - RICH.
4. Throttle I'T LEAST 1/2 OPEN.
C
op

5. Ignition S",ltch - BOTH.


y

6. Am-dliary Fuel Pump - ON.


rig
ht

After engine has started:


C
om

7. Throttle ADJUST.
m

8. Mixture - LEAN as required.


an

9. Auxiliary Fuel Pump - OFF.


de *
r O *un

EMERGENCY LANDINGS
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *

The final approach speeds shown under Emergency Landings were


13

determined in a no wind condition. This approach speed should be


increased as required (typically 5 to 15 KIAS) if turbulence or wind
Al

shear conditions exist.


lR
ig

POWER OFF
ht
s
R

Approach
es
er

1. Airspeed - 82 KIAS.
ve

2. Mixture IDLE CUTOFF.


d

3. Ignition Switch - OFF.


4. Fuel Selector - 0 FF .
5. Flaps - UP.
6. Landing Gear - RETRACTED.
7. Cowl Flaps - CLOSED.
8. Emergency Locator Transmitter (if installed) - ON.
9. Transponder (if installed) - CODE 7700.
10. Seats, Seat Belts and Shoulder Straps - SECURE (front seats in upright position).
11. Loose Objects - SECURE.
12. Ground Controller Briefing - ACCOMPLISH, if circumstances permit.

On Final Approach

13. Landing Gear - DOWN .


NOIE
If the landing site has an extremely soft surface or if a ditching is to
be accomplished, it is recommended that the landing gear remain re-
tracted.
Issued: 21 February 1976
Revised: 6 April 1977 DATA ON THIS PAG IS FAA, APPROVED 3-3
PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION III OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 114

14. Flaps - 35 DEGREES.


15. Airspeed - 71 KlAS MI:N1MUM.

PRECAlJTIONARY OFF-AIRPORT LANDING W1TH POWER

Approach

1.
2.
3.
Seats, Seat Belts and Shoulder Straps - SECURE (front seats in upright position).
Loose Objects - SECURE.
Emergency Locator Transmitter (if installed) ON.
4. Ground Controller Briefing - ACCOMPLISH, if circumstances permit.
5. Mixture - FULL RICH.
6. Landing Gear - DOWN.
7. Flaps - AS REQUIRED.
8. Power - AS REQUIRED.

On Final Approach

9. Flaps - 35 DEGREES.
C

10. Airspeed - 71 KlAS lvIINIMUM.


op

11. Propeller - HIGH RPM.


y
rig

After Touchdown
ht
C
om

12. Mixture - IDLE CUTOFF.


13. Fuel Selector - OFF.
m
an

LANDING WITH A FLAT MAIN GEAR TIRE


de *
r O *un

Approach
w off
ne ic

1. Seats, Seat Belts and Shoulder Straps - SECURE (front seats in upright position).
rs ial

2. Loose Objects - SECURE.


G co

3. Mixture - FULL RICH.


ro p

4. Landing Gear EXTEND.


up y*

NOTE
20 *
13

If it is known that a tire is defective, it is advisable to leave the


Al

gear extended.
lR
ig

5. Flaps - AS REQUIRED.
ht

6. Power - AS REQUIRED.
s
R
es

NOIE
er
ve

Select a runway with a crosswind from the same side as the good
d

main gear tire, if practical.

On Final Approach

7. Flaps - 35 DEGREES.
8. Airspeed - 71 KlAS MINIMUM.
9. Propeller - HIGH RPM.

Touchdown

10. Touchdown - ON GOOD TIRE.


11. Rollout - Utilize aileron to keep affected tire off runway as long as possible. Maintain direction using
nose gear steering and braking as required.

3-4 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED Issued: 21 February 1976


'f""\~~~; .... _..t. C! " __ :1 '1 n",,..,.
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION III
114 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

Ll\NDING WITH A FLAT NOSE GEAR TIRE

Approach

1.
2.
3.
4.
Seats, Seat Belts and Shoulder Straps - SECURE (front seats in upright position).
Loose Objects - SECURE.
!\Iixture - FULL RlCH.
Landing Gear - EXTEND.

NOTE
If it is known that a tire is defective, it is advisable to leave the
gear extended.

5. Flaps - AS REQmRED.
6. Power - AS REQmRED.

On Final Approach

7. Flaps - 35 DEGREES.
C
op

8. Airspeed - 71 KIAS MINIMUM.


y

9. Propeller - HIGH RPM.


rig
ht

Touchdown and Rollout


C
om

10. Touchdown - MAIN GEAR FIRST.


m

11. Mixture - IDLE CUTOFF.


an

12. Rollout - NOSE GEAR HIGH.


de *
r O *un

LANDING WITH ONE RETRACTED OR UNLOCKED MAIN GEAR


w off
ne ic

Approach
rs ial


G co

l. Seats, Seat Belts and Shoulder Straps - SECURE (front seats in upright position).
ro p

2. Loose Objects - SECURE.


up y*

3. Mixture - FULL RlCH.


20 *

4. Landing Gear - EXTEND.


13
Al

NOTE
lR

Select a runway with a crosswind from the same side as the good main
ig
ht

gear, if practical.
s
R

On Final Approach
es
er

5. Flaps - 35 DEGREES.
ve

6. Airspeed - 71 KIAS MINIMUM.


d

7. Propeller - HIGH RPM.

Touchdown and Rollout

8. Touchdown - ON EXTENDED GEAR FIRST.


9. Aileron - Bank away from affected gear.
10. Mixture - IDLE CUTOFF.
11. Fuel Selector - OFF.

LANDING WITH A DEFECTIVE NOSE GEAR

Approach

1.
2.
Seats, Seat Belts and Shoulder Straps - SECURE (front seats in upright position).
Loose Objects - SECURE.
Issued: 21 February 1976 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 3-5
Revised: 6 April 1977
PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION III OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
E:Y1ERGENCY PROCEDURES 114

3. Mixture - FULL RICH.


4. Landing Gear EXTEND.

On Final Approach

0. Flaps 35 DEGREES.
6. Airspeed 71 KIAS l\1INlMUM
7. Propeller HIGH RPM.

Touchdown and Rollout

8. Touchdown MAI~ GEAR FIRST.


9. Elevator Control AFT.

NOIE
During the rollout, the nose should be held off the runway as long
as possible.
C

10. Mixture IDLE CUTOFF.


op

11. Fuel Selector OFF.


y
rig
ht

LANDING \VITH POWER AND WITH LANDING GEAR RETRACTED


C
om

NOIE
m

a smooth sod runway.


an

If possible, choose
de *

Approach
r O *un
w off

1. Seats, Seat Belts and Shoulder Straps - SECURE (front seats in upright position).
ne ic

2. Loose Objects - SECURE.


rs ial

3. Mixture - FULL RICH.


G co

4. Landing Gear - RETRACTED.


ro p

5. Power - AS REQUIRED.
up y*
20 *

On Final Approach
13
Al

6. Flaps - 20 DEGREES.
lR

7. Airspeed 74 KIAS l\1Il','IMUM.


ig

8. Propeller HIGH RPM.


ht
s

Touchdo\\'n and Slide


R
es
er

9. Elevator Control - AFT.


ve

10. Mixture IDLE CUTOFF.


d

11. Fuel Selector - OFF.

LAKDING WITHOUT POWER AND WITH LANDING GEAR RETRACTED

Approach

1. Airspeed 82 KIAS.
2. Mixture IDLE CUTOFF.
3. Ignition Switch - OFF.
4. Fuel Selector - 0 FF .
5. Flaps UP.
6. Cowl Flaps - CLOSED.
7. Emergency Locator Transmitter (if installed) - ON.
8. Transponder (if installed) - CODE 7700.

3-6 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.AA. APPROVED Issued: 21 February 1976


J?I>V; ~ .. n II A nt'i 1 1 ~77
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION III
114 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

9.


Ground Controller Briefing - ACCOMPLISH, if circumstances permit.
10. Seats, Seat Belts and Shoulder Straps - SECURE (front seats in upright position).
11. Loose Objects - SECURE.

On FlI1al Approach

12. Flaps - 20 DEGREES.


13 . Airspeed - 74 KlAS ~nNIMUM.

Touchdown and Slide

14. Elevator Control FU LL AFT.

DITCHING

Approach

1. Airspeed 82 KlAS.
2. Transponder (if installed) - CODE 7700.
C

3, MA YDA Y Transmission - TRANSWT information which may expedite search and rescue AS REQUIRED.
op
yr
ig

NOTE
ht
C

See Airman's Information Manual for transmitted information which


om

may be valuable if time permits its transmission.


m
an


4. Emergency Locator Transmitter (if installed) - ON.
de

5. Seats, Seat Belts and Shoulder Straps - SECURE (front seats in upright position).
r O **un

6. Loose Objects SECURE.


7. Flotation Equipment (for occupants) - OON.
w off

Flaps - UP.
ne ic

8.
9. Landing Gear - RETRACTED.
rs ial

10. Cowl Flaps CLOSED.


G co
ro p
up y*

On Final Approach
20 *
13

NOTE
Al

See Airman's Information Manual for additional details regarding


lR

ditching procedures.
ig
ht

11. Flaps - 20 DEGREES.


s
R

12. Airspeed - 74 KlAS WmMUM.


es

13. Landing Gear - RETRACTED.


er

14. Propeller - HIGH RPM.


ve
d

Touchdown

15. Elevator Control - FULL AFT.


16. Fuel Selector - OFF.

SMOKE AND FIRE

ELECTRICAL FIRE ON THE GROUND

1. Master Switch OFF.


2. All Electrical Switches - OFF.

Issued: 21 February 1976 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 3-7


~"";",,,rl ~ lin,..;) 1Q77
PilOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION III OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 114

3. Mixture - IDLE CUTOFF.


4. Fuel Selector - OFF.
5. Fire Extinguisher (if installed) - DISCHARGE.

I WARNING I
Do not attempt to fly the airplane again until the source of the fire
has been located and corrective action has been taken.

ENGINE FIRE ON THE GROUND

Should a fire occur in the engine induction system during engine start, it is advisable to continue cranking the
for several seconds. If the fire persists, proceed as follows:

1. Mixture - IDLE CUTOFF.


2. Fuel Selector OFF.
3. Ignition Switch - OFF.
C

4. Master Switch - OFF.


op

5. Cowl Flaps - CLOSED.


yr
ig

I
ht
C

WARNING
om
m
an

Do not attempt to fly the airplane until the source of the fire has been
de

located and corrective action has been taken.


r O **un

6. Fire Extinguisher (if installed) - DISCHARGE as required.


w off
ne ic
rs ial

FIRE DURING TAKEOFF


G co
ro p

1. Throttle - IDLE.
up y*

2. Brakes - APPLY.
20 *

3. Mixture - IDLE CUTOFF.


4. Master Switch - OFF.
13

5. Fuel Selector - OFF.


Al

6. All Electrical Switches - OFF.


R l

7. Fire Extinguisher (if installed) - DISCHARGE as required.


ig
ht

ELECTRICAL FIRE IN FLIGHT


s
R
es

1. Master Switch - OFF.


er

20 All Electrical Switches - OFF.


ve

3. Cabin Heat and Defrost Controls - OFF.


d

4. Air Vents - OFF.


5. Fire Extinguisher (if installed) - DISCHARGE, if fire persists.

If smoke and fire persists, proceed as follows:

6. Oxygen Masks (if installed) - DON.


7. Oxygen System (if installed) - EMERG.
8. Emergency Descent Procedure - PERFORM.

If the fire has been extinguished and continued flight is essential, proceed as follows:

9. Master Switch - ON.


10. Essential Electrical Equipment - ON, one switch at a time.
11. Cabin Heat and Defrost Controls - AS DESIRED.
12. Air Vents - AS DESIRED.
13. Storm Window - OPEN (to clear cabin of smoke).

3-8 DATA ON THIS PAGe IS F.A.A. APPRoveD Issued: 21 February 1976


ROCI\.,,\VELL PilOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION III
114 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

ENGINE F1RE IN FLIGHT

1. ~lixture - IDLE CUTOFF.


2. Fuel Selector - OFF.
3. :\l:I,,[(>r SwItch - OFF.
4. C0bin Heat and Defrost Controls - OFF.
;). Airspeed - INCREASE 0S required without exceeding VNE.

If fire persists. execute a power-off landing as outlined under Landing Emergencies. Momentarily activate the
master switch to extend the landing gear and/or the flaps, if they are required.

CAm.:.: F1RE

1. Cabin Heat and Defrost Controls - OFF.


2. Air Vents - CLOSED.
Fire Extinguisher (if installed) - DISCHARGE.

If smoke and fire persist, proceed as follows:


C

4. Oxygen Mas;.':., (if installed) - DON.


op

5. Oxygen System (if installed) - EMERG.


yrig

6. Descent Procedure - PERFORM.


ht
C

If the fire has been extinguished and continued flight is essential, proceed as follows:
om

7. Cabin Heat and Defrost Controls - AS DESIRED.


m
an

f3. Air Vents AS DESIRED.


de *

9. Storm Window - OPE':': .


r O *un
w off

EMERGENCY DESCENT
ne ic
rs ial

1. Landing Gear - SELECT DOWN below 128 KIAS.


G co
ro p

2. Flaps - UP.
up y*

3. Throttle - IDLE.
4. Propeller Control - HIGH RPil,1.
20 *

5. Bank - APPROXE'vIATEL Y 45 DEGREES, if practical.


13

6. Airspeed 187 KIAS below 12,500 ft.


Al
lR

~J
ig
ht
s
R

Do not exceed V NO unless in smooth air. See Section II for reduced


es

speed limits above 12.500 feet.


er
ve

MAXIMUM GLIDING DISTANCE - Refer to Figure 3-2.


d

LANDING GEAR SYSTEM EMERGENCIES

FAILURE TO RETRACT

1.
2.
3.
Circuit Breaker - CHECK.
Emergency Gear Extension Valve Knob - CHECK for full up position.
Landing Gear Switch - CYCLE.

If unsafe indication persists, proceed as follows:


I
I
4. Landing Gear S\vitch - DOWN.
5. Gear Position Lights - VERIFY GEAR DOWN.
6. Landing - PERFORM as soon as practical.

Issued: 21 February 1976 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 3-9


PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION III OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 114

14000 '-~--~OO~N~O~I~T~IO~N7S:----------'---~--G-L-ID-E-S-P-EE-D---'--------------~-------------,
PROPELLER WINDMILLING WEIGHT
FLAPS - UP (LBSI KIAS
GEAR - UP
3140 82
COWL FLAPS - CLOSED
12000 ZERO WIND 2600 74

[-;
~
( 10000

~
~
0::
0:: 8000
[xl
[-;
[xl
:>
~ 6000 ~~--~~~--~--4~-+--~--+--~--~~-~.-~~----
~
[-;
:.r:
C

S2
op

[xl 4000 ..........-+---'--t--+--+----+


y

:.r:
rig
ht
C
om

2000 ..........-+-+--t--'---I:7"'-t-~+-+---'-
m
an
de *
r O *un

o 2 4 6 8 10 14 12 16 18 20
w off
ne ic

GROUND DISTANCE'" NAUTICAL MILES


rs ial
G co

Figure 3-2. Maximum Gliding Distance


ro p
up y*
20 *

FAILURE TO EXTEND
13

1
1. Circuit Breaker - CHECK.
Al

2. Landing Gear Switch - CYCLE.


lR

3. Gear Down Position Lights - PRESS-TO-TEST.


ig
ht
s

If an unsafe indication persists, proceed as follows:


R
es

I
4. Landing Gear Switch - DOWN.
er

5. Throttle - MINI~ZE POWER.


ve

6. Airspeed - 80 KIAS MAXIMUM.


d

7. Rudder Trim - NEUTRAL.


8. Emergency Extension Valve Knob - PULL OUT and DOVlN.

NOTE
If the gear fails to extend, it may be necessary to cycle the rudder
pedals, reduce power, and/or reduce airspeed

9. Gear Down Position Lights - VERIFY GEAR DOWN.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM EMERGENCIES

EXCESSIVE BATTERY CHARGING INDICATED ON AMMETER

1. Alternator Switch - OFF.


2. AU Non-essential Electrical Equipment - OFF.

3-10 Issued: 21 February 1976


n ... 'T .. ;<"'J'"\...l~ a A ...... ~l1 10'7'"
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION III
114 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

ALTER1\ATOR FAILVRE

1. Alternator Switch - CYCLE.

NOIE
Battery power may be required to excite alternator. Keep battery portion
of master switch ON.

2. Circuit Breakers - CHECK.

If the alternator fails to come on the line, proceed as follows:

3. Alternator Switch - OFF.


4. AU Non-essential Electrical Equipment OFF.

CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPING

1. Affected Circuit Breaker - RESET.


C
op

If the circuit breaker continues to trip, proceed as follows:


yrig
ht

2. Leave Circuit Breaker in TRIP position.


C

3. Affected Electrical Equipment OFF.


om

A VIO.N1CS ;\1ASTER S\VITCH. CIRCmT BREAKER TRIPPING


m
an
de *

NOIE
r O *un

In the event that a radio should have a short circuit, the individual
w off

circuit breaker for that radio will open as evidenced by it's button
ne ic

popping out. The individual circuit breakers are located in the


rs ial

lower right side of the instrument panel.


G co
ro p
up y*

1. Reset Avionics Master Switch ON.


20 *

If unable to it in the ON position:


13
Al

2. All Individual Avionics Switches - OFF.


lR

3. Avionics Master Switch-type Circuit Breaker - ON.


ig
ht

If unable to it reset. turn it off, otherwise proceed to step 4.


s
R
es

4. Individual Avionics Switches ON, one at a time (the most essential radios first).
er
ve

NOIE
d

When the radio at fault is turned on, the Avionics master switch may
open again.

5. Faulty Radio Switch - OFF (leave off) .

NOIE
Repeat Steps 3. and 4. until all avionics (except the faulty unit(s)) are on.

POWER PLANT EMERGENCIES

LOSS OF OIL PRESSURE INDICATION

1. Power - REDUCE.
2. Engine RPM - REDUCE.
3. Oil Temperature - CHECK.

Issued: 21 February 1976 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 3-11


PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION III OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 114

Loss of oil pressure is usually accompanied by a high oil temperature


indication. If this condition exists. plan a landing immediately. If a
normal oil temperature exists, proceed to the nearest practical airport.

EXCESSIVE OIL PRESSURE

1. Engine RPM - REDUCE.


2. Engine Oil Temperature - ALLOW TO STABILJZE.

If high oil pressure persists, proceed to the nearest practical airport.

EXCESSIVE OIL/CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE


C
op

1. Cowl Flaps - OPEN.


yrig

2. Airspeed INCREASE.
ht

3. Mixture - FULL RICH.


4. Power - REDUCE.
C
om
m
an
de *
r O *un

If excessive oHIcylinder head temperature persists, proceed to the


nearest practical airport.
w off
ne ic

ROUGH RUNNING ENGINE OR LOSS OF POWER


rs ial
G co
ro p

1. Mixture - RICH.
up y*

2. Alternate Induction Air - HOT, if no change is evident, PctSition to COLD.


3. Magnetos - BOTH (check right and left) .
20 *
13

NOIE
Al
lR

Should the engine smooth out on one magneto, continue operation on


ig

that magneto.
ht
s

4. Auxiliary Fuel Pump - ON, if no change is evident, turn to OFF.


R
es

5. Mixture - LEAN, if no change, ENRICHEN.


er
ve

PROPELLER OVERSPEED
d

1. Throttle - CLOSE IMMEDIATELY (to reduce rpm).


2. Airspeed - REDUCE.
3. RPM Limit - OBSERVE.

Proceed to the nearest practical airport at reduced power and


reduced airspeed.

3-12 DATA ON THIS PAO~ IS F.A.A. APPRove, Issued: 21 February 1976


ROCKWELL PilOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION III
114 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

MISCELLANEOUS EMERGENCIES

INADVERTENT ICING ENCOUNTER

1. Pitot Heat - ON.


2. \\'indshield Defrost - PULL ON.
3. RPM - INCREASE.

WARNING I
Evasive action should be initiated when icing conditions
are first encountered.

4. Altitude CHANGE to an altitude less conducive to icing.

NOTE
C

A climb is usually preferred, if practicaL


op
y
rig

5. Course - ALTER or REVERSE as required, to avoid icing.


ht
C

NOTE
om
m

The likelihood of the induction air system icing is very remote;


an

however, should icing occur, as evidenced by loss of manifold


de *

pressure, the alternate induction air control should be placed in


r O *un

the HOT position.


w off
ne ic

G. Mixture ADJUST. as required.


rs ial

7. Approach Airspeed - INCREASE 5 to 20 KJAS depending on ice accumulation.


G co
ro p

EXTRE:\1E TURBULENCE ENCOUNTER


up y*
20 *

1. Airspeed l\1ANEUVERlNG SPEED (observe airspeed for appropriate weight).


2. Flaps UP.
13

3. Landing Gear - RETRACTED.


Al

4. Seat Belts and Shoulder Straps SECURE FlRML Y .


lR

5. Loose Objects - SECURE.


ig
ht
s

NOTE
R
es

Avoid large excursions in pitch attitude.


er
ve
d

OBSTRUCTED STATIC SOURCE

1. Alternate Static Source - ON.


2. Heat and Defrost Controls - ON.
3. Overhead Air Vents - OFF.

NOTE
Refer to alternate static source correction card for corrections to
apply to altimeter and airspeed readings.

OBSTRUCTED PITOT

1. Pitot Heat ON.

Issued: 21 February 1976 DATA 0111 THIS PAGE IS f.A.k APPROVED 3-13
PilOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION III OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 114
NorE
Use familiar pitch attitude and power settings to achieve desired
airspeeds if airspeed indicator readings appear to be unreliable.

CABI~ DOOR OPEl'.'1NG IN FLIGHT


NOTE
If a door comes open in flight on airplanes S/N 14000 thru 14349,
I observe a maximum airspeed of 100 KIAS and return for a normal
approach and landing. If an immediate landing is impractical, to
close the cabin door in flight proc eed as outlined below.
1. Airspeed 80 KIAS.
2. Storm Window - OPEN.
3. Affected Door OPEN approximately 4-inches and THEN SLAM SHUT.
4. Main Door Latch - CHECK for free play (no more than 1/8 to 1/4-inch).
5. Upper Door Latch - SECURE.

SIN 14350 and Subs.

I
C
op

1. Airspeed - 130 KIAS or below.


yrig

2. Cabin Door - PULL CLOSE, then RELATCH.


ht
C

AIR PIRACY
om

1. Transponder (if installed) - CODE 7500, OR ANY CODE 7500 TO 7577.


m
an

2. Ground Controller Briefing - PERFORM as circumstances permit.


de *
r O *un

NorE
w off

See Airman's Information Manual for additional details for special


ne ic

emergencies, such as air piracy, and for current codes.


rs ial
G co

INADVERTENT SPINS
ro p
up y*

1. Throttle - IDLE.
20 *

2. Rudder - FULL OPPOSITE DIRECTION OF ROTATION.


13

3. Control Wheel - FULL FORWARD BRISKLY and HOLD against the forward stop UNTIL A DEFINITE
Al

NOSE DOWN PITCHING MOTION IS OBSERVED Al'.'D ROTATION STOPS.


lR
ig

NOTE
ht
s

As sufficient nose down pitching motion is developed for a spin recovery,


R
es

the pilot will become noticeably light in his seat or thrown against the
er

seat belt.
ve
d

As rotation stops,

4. Rudder NEUTRAL.
5. Flaps - RE TRA C T, if extended.

Recover smoothly from the resulting dive.

AMPLIFIED EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

LANDING GEAR MALFUNCTIONS

There are several general checks that should be made before attempting further corrective action in the event
of a landing gear malfunction. Check landing gear circuit breakers IN, reset if necessary. Check gear posi-
tion indicator lights for a possible burned out bulb by pressing-to-test. A burned out bulb can be replaced in
flight by using the bulb from the magnetic compass. The magnetic compass bulb is accessible by sliding the
socket cover, at the top of the bezel, up and removing the bulb.

3-14 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. API'ROVEO Issued: 21 February 1976


PCI'tM C("1.4. 1 '1 ~C)h""'H<"\ _..-.. 10'7Q
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
CO:Vl:vrANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION lIT
114 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

Retraction l\lalfunction: If the landing gear fails to retract normally as indicated by continuous gear motor
l

operation or failure of the gear warning light to go out, attempt to recycle the gear. If recycling attempt fails
to produce a positive indication of proper retraction (all gear indicator lights out, landing gear motor off), the
landing gear should be extended until maintenance can be obtained to correct the problem.

Extl'llsion l\lalfunction: If a positive "gear down and locked" indication cannot be obtained with normal extension
procedures. operate press- to-test feature of indicator lights, and if still no indication, recycle the landing gear.
If a recycling attempt does not provide positive indication (gear down lights on, absence of the gear warning
lights and warning bell or horn \vith flaps extended or power reduced), proceed with emergency gear extension .

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Excessive Charge: After periods of heavy electrical usage, such as prolonged cold weather starts or extended
periods of taxiing, the battery charge level will have dropped low enough to accept higher than normal charge
rates during the initial part of the flight. However, after a reasonable length of time (apprOximately thirty
minutes), the ammeter indication should decrease steadly toward zero indication on the ammeter, and the volt-
meter should indicate between 12 and 15 volts. If the charging rate remains above this value for an extended
period of time, there is a possibility that the battery may overheat and evaporate electrolyte at an excessive
C
op

rate. To preclude the possibility of an overcharging condition affecting the battery, the ALT half of the master
switch should be turned OFF and the flight terminated, and electrical load reduced to an essential minimum if
yr
ig

an immediate landing is impractical.


ht
C

Insufficient Charge: A continuous discharge rate, noted on the ammeter during flight, generally indicates:
om

a. Alternator and/or voltage regulator malfunction, or


m

b. Excessive load on the electrical system.


an

First the electrical load must be reduced. If ammeter continues to show discharge, the AL T half of the master
de

switch should be turned OFF to isolate the alternator from the electrical system. With the ALT half of the mas-
r O **un

ter switch OFF, the entire accessory electrical load is placed on the battery, and all non-essential electrical
equipment should be turned off to reduce the discharge rate of the battery.
w off
ne ic
rs ial

Operation With Master Switch OFF: When the master switch is OFF, it should be remembered that certain
G co

electrical equipment ,vill be inoperative, such as:


ro p
up y*

1. \Ving Flaps.
20 *

2. Landing Gear Retraction System (except emergency extension system).


13

3. Fuel Gages.
4. Engine Temperature Gages.
Al

5. Stall Warner
l R

(3 Turn Coordinator
ig

7. All Lights (interior and e:>..ierior).


ht
s

8. All Radios (except optional ELT).


R
es
er
ve
d

Issued: 21 February 1976 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A,A. APPROVED 3-15/3-16


17 Fehruarv 1978
Rp,";"prl
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IV
114 NORMAL PROCEDURES

SECTION IV

NORMAL PROCEDURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Page
NORMAL PROCEDURES CHECKLIST. . . . . . . .. 4-2 Soft Field Takeoff - Obstacles Ahead. . .. 4-9
Pre-Flight Inspection .................... 4-2 Normal Climb ..................... 4-9
C
op

Before Starting Engine .................... 4-4 Maximum Performance Climb ............ 4-9.
yr

Starting Engine ............. 4- 4 Cruise ................................ 4-10


ig

Starting Engine-Flooded Start Procedure .. 4-5 Descent ............................... 4-10


ht

Before Taxiing ........................... 4-5 Before Landing ........................ 4-11


C

Taxiing ............................... 4- 5 Balk ed Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4-11


om

Before Takeoff ........................... 4-6 Normal Landing ...................... 4-11


m

Takeoffs ............................... 4-7 Short Field Landing ..................... 4-11


an

Normal Takeoff ....................... 4-7 Soft Field Landing ....................... 4-12


de

Crosswind Takeoff ..................... 4-8 After Landing ........................... 4-12


r O **un

Short Field Takeoff ................. 4-8 Shutdown ............................ 4-12


w off

Soft Field Takeoff - No Obstacles ..... 4-8 Noise Characteristics ................... 4-12
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
l R
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

X121

Figure 4-1. Pre-Flight Inspection Stations

Issued: 21 February 1976 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 4-1


Revised: 11 Aoril 1980
PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IV OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
NORMAL PROCEDURES 114

NORMAL PROCEDURES CHECKLIST

PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTION

WARNING I
Remove any accumulation of ice, snow or frost from aircraft
prior to flight.

NOTE
If a night flight is planned check the operation of all lights and
ensure a flashlight is available.

CD INTERIOR
C
op

1. Controls Lock - REMOVE.


2. Ignition Switch - OFF.
yrig

3. All Circuit Breakers SET.


ht

4. Landing Gear Position Switch - DOWN.


C

5. All Switches - OFF or NORMAL.


om

6. Master Switch ON.


m

7. Landing Gear Position Lights - CHECK/SAFE.


an

8. Fuel Selector BOTH.


de *

9. Elevator Trim Tab NEUTRAL .


r O *un

10. Fuel Quantity - CHECK.


w off

NOTE
ne ic
rs ial

Useable fuel quantities above approximately 27 U. S. gallons are


G co

not gageable.
ro p
up y*

11. Fuel Selector Drain - PULL for four seconds, then OFF. (SiN 14000 thru 14149 only.)
20 *

I I
13

WARNING
Al
lR

Do not lift fuel selector disk when draining fuel or selecting tanks. Use only the
ig

center handle marked "PULL TO DRAIN". Failure to do so can result in unde-


ht
s

tectable fuel draining.


R
es

12. Oxygen (if installed) - CHECK QUANTITY and AVAILABILITY OF MASKS.


er

CD
ve

LEFT SIDE OF FUSELAGE AND EMPENNAGE


d

13. Baggage Door - CLOSED and LOCKED.


14. Side of Fuselage INSPECT.
15. Static Port - UNOBSTRUCTED.
16. Horizontal Stabilizer and Elevator - INSPECT.
17. Elevator - CHECK for freedom of movement.
18. Elevator Trim Tab - CHECK for excessive free play, security, condition, and neutral position.
19. Rudder Gust Lock (if installed) - REMOVE.
20. Vertical Stabilizer and Rudder - INSPECT.
21. Rudder CHECK for freedom of movement.
22. Navigation Light - CHECK.
23. Flashing Beacon - CHECK condition.

eD RIGHT SIDE OF FUSELAGE AND RIGHT WING TRAILING EDGE

24. Side of Fuselage - INSPECT.


25. Static Port UNOBSTRUCTED.
26. Wing Flap - INSPECT.
27 . Aileron - CHECK for security and freedom of movement.
28. Wing Tip - INSPECT.
29. Navigation Light - CHECK.
4-2 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED Issued: 21 February 1976
n .......... ~ ........ ~. 11 A, "" .... :1 1QQ()
ROCKWELL PilOT'S
COM:\1ANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION rv
114 NORMAL PROCEDURES

(0 RJGHT \\1KG LEADING EDGE

30. Wio9, Leactin[,: - CHECK condition.


31. Fuel Yent - UNOBSTRUCTED.
32. Fuel Quantitv - CHECK.

NOTE
A reduced fuel quantity indicator is located in the fuel filler
neck. ThIS indicator is used to indicate a useable fuel quantity
of 24 gallons.

33. Fuel Filler Cap SECUHE.


34. Win~ Tie- down - REMOVE.
35. Fuel Tank Sump - DRAIN SAMPLE. Check valve closed.
36. Hig;ht Main Gear and Wheel Weel - INSPECT.
37. ~lain Gear Tire - CHECK inflation and wear.
38. Squat Switch - INSPECT.
39. Landing Gear Limit Switches (2) - CHECK condition.
C

40. Wheel Well Fuel Drain - DRAIN SAMPLE. Check valve closed. (SiN 14150 and Subs.)
op

41. Fuel Selector Drain Valve - VERIFY CLOSED (SiN 14000 thru 14149 only).
yr

o
ig

EKGINE SECTION
ht
C
om

42. Fuel Gascolator - DRAIN SAMPLE. Check valve closed.


43. Engine Accessory Section - INSPECT.
m

44. Cowl Fasteners - SECURED.


an

45. Oil Cooler Inlet - UNOBSTRUCTED.


de

46. Lower Cowl and Cowl Flap - INSPECT and SECURE.


r O **un

47. Nose Gear Assembly and Strut - CHECK condition and proper inflation.
w off

48. Nose Gear Tire - CHECK proper inflation and wear.


ne ic

49. Landing Gear Limit Switches (2) - CHECK condition.


rs ial

50. Engine Inlets - UNOBSTRUCTED.


G co

51. Propeller and Spinner - INSPECT.


ro p

52. Oil Quantity - CHECK, minimum 6 quarts.


up y*

CD
20 *

LEFT \VING LEADING EDGE


13

53.

I
Al

Left Main Gear and Wheel Well - INSPECT.


l

54. Wheel Well Fuel Drain - DRAIN SAMPLE. Check valve closed. (SiN 14150 and Subs.)
R

55. Landing Gear Limit Switches (2) - CHECK condition.


ig
ht

56. Fuel Tank Sump - DRAIN SAMPLE. Check valve closed.


s

57. Fuel Quantity - CHECK.


R
es
er

NOTE
ve

A reduced fuel quantity indicator is located in the fuel filler


d

neck. This indicator is used to indicate a useable fuel quantity


of 24 gallons.

I
58. Fuel Filler Cap - SECURE.
59. Wing Leading Edge - CHECK condition.
60. Stall Warning Vane - CHECK freedom of movement and horn actuation.

NOTE
The master switch must be ON to check stall warner circuit.
The spring-loaded test s\\1.tch, located in the left main gear
wheel well and labeled STALL CKT, must be moved from the
NORM position to the TEST position while the stall warner is
checked. Use a gentle upward motion of the vane to actuate
the stall warner horn.

Issued: 21 February 1976 4-3


Pt"\"1';C'O~ '1 ('"),.d.. ,... ...... "" ..... 1 <V7a,
PilOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IV OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
NOID.1AL PROCEDURES 114

61. Wing Tie-down - REMOVE.


62. Pitot Mast - UNOBSTRUCTED.

NOTE
If flight into rain or conctitions conducive to possible icing is anticipated,
pitot heat should be checked. The pitot heat can be checked by lightly
touching the pitot probe after the heating element has been turned on.
The pitot should become warm to the touch after the heater has been on
for 35 seconds.

63. Fuel Vent - UNOBSTRUCTED.


64. Wing Tip INSPECT.

CD LEFT WING TRAILING EDGE

65. Navigation Light - CHECK.


66. Aileron - CHECK security and freedom of movement.
67. Wing Flap - INSPECT.
C
op
yrig

BEFORE STARTING r:NGINE


ht
C

1. Exterior Inspection - COMPLETE.


om

2. Seats, Seat Belts and Shoulder Straps - ADJUST and SECURE (front seats in upright position for
m

takeoff).
an

3. Fuel Selector Valve - BOTH.


de *

4. Avionics Master Switch - OFF.


r O *un

5. All Electrical Equipment OFF.


6. Circuit Breakers - CHECK.
w off
ne ic

7. Cowl Flaps - FULL OPEN.

8. Landing Gear Position Switch - DOWN.


rs ial

9. Landing Gear Emergency Extension Valve Knob - UP.


G co
ro p

10. Parking Brake - SET.


up y*

NOTE
20 *

If a start is to be made at night, turn ON the navigation lights prior to


13

starting.
Al
lR

STARTING ENGINE
ig
ht

1. Mixture - IDLE CUTOFF.


s

2. Propeller - HIGH RPM.


R
es

3. Throttle - CRACKED 1/4 INCH.


er

4. Alternate Induction Air - COLD.


ve

5. Master Switch - ON.


d

NOTE
ALT side of master switch should be OFF, if external power is used.

6. Voltmeter - CHECK.
7. Fuel Pump Switch - ON.

NOTE
Verify that auxiliary fuel pump operates by observing a rise in the fuel
pressure indication.

8. Mixture - ADVANCE MOMENTARILY, then back to IDLE CUTOFF.


9. Fuel Pump Switch - OFF.
10. Propeller Area - CLEAR.
11. Ignition Switch - START then to BaTH when engine starts.
NOTE
Cranking should be limited to 30 seconds, and several minutes allowed
between cranking periods to permit the starter to cool.
4-4 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED Issued: 21 February 1976
Revised: 16 December 1977
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IV
114 NORMAL PROCEDURES

12. Mixture FULL RICH after engine starts.


13. Throttle - 800 to 1000 RPM.
14. Oil Pressure - CHECK for indication within 30 seconds.
15. Alternator Switch - ON.

NOTI
The BATT switch should be left ON for alternator turn-on
and stabilization.

16. Ammeter - CHECK for charging indication.


17. Voltmeter - CHECK for 13-16 Volts.

ST ARTING ENGINE (flOODED START PROCEDURE)



1. Mixture - IDLE CliT-OFF.
2. Propeller Control - HIGH RPM.
3. Throttle - FULL OPEN.
4. Alternate Induction Air Control - COLD.
C

5. Master Switch ON.


op
yr
ig

NOTE
ht
C

The ALT side of the master switch should be OFF if external


om

power is used.
m
an

6. Propeller Area - CLEAR.


de

7. Ignition Switch - START then to BOTH.


r O **un

NOTE
w off
ne ic

Cranking should be limited to 30 seconds. Allow at least five (5)


rs ial

minutes between cranking periods to permit the starter to cool.


G co
ro p
up y*

As engine fires:
20 *

8. Throttle RETARD.
13

9. Mixture FULL RICH.


Al

10. Throttle - 800 to 1000 RPM.


l

11 . Oil Pressure - CHECK for indication within 30 seconds.


R
ig

12. Alternator - ON and CHARGING.


ht
s
R

NOTE
es
er

The BATT switch should be left ON for alternator turn-on


ve

and stabilization.
d


13. Ammeter - CHECK for charging indication.
14. Voltmeter - CHECK for 13-16 Volts.

BEFORE TAXIING
1. Flashing Beacon - ON.

If the engine is started with the flashing beacon ON, it may


be necessary to cycle the beacon switch to reestablish the
flashing mode.

2. Strobe Lights (if installed) - OFF.


3. Instruments and Radios - SET.
4. Parking Brake - RELEASE.

Issued: 21 February 1976 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 4-5


Rpvised: 16 Decemher 1977
PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IV OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
NORMAL PROCEDURES 114

TAXIING

1. Brakes - CHECK during initial taxi.


2. Nose Wheel Steering - CHECK.
3. Comp:lss - CHECK ag::tinst known taxiway heading.

BEFORE TAKEOFF

1. Parking Brake - SET.


2. Controls CHE CK for freedom of movement and proper direction.
3. Flaps - CYCLE. Check operation and symmetry.
4. Rudder Trim NEUTRAL.
5. Elevator Trim Tab - TAKEOFF RANGE.
6. Throttle - 2000 RPM.
7. )'lagnetos - CHECK. Right then both. Left then both.
C

NOTE
op

The RPM drop should not exceed 175 RPM on either magneto
yr
ig

or greater than a 50 RPM differential between the two magnetos.


ht

An absence of an RPM drop may be an indication of faulty magneto


C

grounding or improper timing. Magneto checks at a high power


om

setting will usually confirm that a deficiency exists. Full throttle


m

checks on the ground are not recommended unless the pilot has good
an

reason to suspect that the engine is not operating properly or deSires


de

to adjust the mixture for high density altitude operation. No leaning


r O **un

is allowed below 5000 ft. density altitude. Above 5000 ft. density
altitude, lean only as required for smooth engine operation. If a full
w off
ne ic

throttle runup is necessary, monitor oil temperature and cylinder


rs ial

head temperature to assure that their limits are not exceeded.


G co
ro p
up y*

8. Propeller Control CYCLE and RETURN TO HIGH RPM.


9. Alternate Induction Air Control - FULL HOT and RETURN TO FULL COLD.
20 *
13
Al
R l

NOTE
ig
ht

A slight reduction in engine RPM should be noted when the alternate


s
R

induction air control is placed in the FULL HOT position.


es
er
ve

10. Gyro Suction Gage (if installed) - 4.5 to 5.2 IN. HG .


d

11. Alternate static Source Valve - NORMAL.


12. Throttle CHECK for proper IDLE RPM, should be 600 to 700 RPM.
13. Instruments and Radios - CHECK and SET.

14. Fuel Selector Valve - BOTH .


15. Cabin Doors (S/N 14000 thru 14349) - LATCHED.

NOTE
If freeplay in lower inside cabin door latches exceeds approx-
imately 1/4-inch, then the lower and/or aft cabin door hooks
are not properly engaged.

16. Cabin Doors (S/N 14350 and Subs) - CLOSED and LATCHED.
17. Parking Brake - RELEASE.

4-6 O ... T ... ON THIS PAGE IS F ..... A. APPROVED Issued: 21 February 1976
Revised: 17 Februarv 1978
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IV
114 NORMAL PROCEDURES

OPERATIO.N KIAS CONFIGURA TION


Initial Climb
Short Field 69* MINIMUM Gear DOWN, Flaps - 20 0
Maximum
Performance
Takeoffs: Initial Climb
Soft Field 69* MINIMUM Gear DOWN, Flaps - 20 0

Approach
Short Field 71* MINIMUM Gear OOWN, flaps - 35 0
Maximum
Performance
Landings: Approach
Soft Field Gear OOWN, flaps - 35 0
71* MINIMUM

Best Rate-of-Climb 91-S.L.**


89 - 5000 Ft. Gear UP, Flaps UP
C

Vy 85 - 10 ,000 Ft.
op
y rig

Best Angle of Climb 79 - S.L. **


80 - 5000 Ft.
ht

Gear UP, Flaps UP


81 10,000 Ft.
C

Vx
om

* Smooth Air Only, increase as required for turbulence.


m

** Straight Line Variation Between Altitudes.


an
de *
r O *un

Figure 4-2. Airspeeds For Normal Operations


w off
ne ic

TAKEOFFS
rs ial

IIOIE
G co
ro p

Proper full throttle engine operation should be checked


up y*

early in the takeoff roll. Any significant indication of


20 *

rough or sluggish engine response is reason to discontinue


13

the takeoff.
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es

When takeoff must be made over a gravel surface, it is


er

important that the throttle be applied slowly. This will


ve

allow the aircraft to start rolling before a high RPM is


d

developed, and gravel or loose material will be blown


back from the propeller area instead of being pulled into it.

I I
NORMAL TAKEOFF
WARNING

Takeoffs with less than 11 gallons of usable fuel are not recommended. I
1. Fuel Pump Switch - ON.
2. Mixture - FULL RICH.
3. Wing Flaps - 10 DEGREES.

Issued: 21 February 1976 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 4-7


Revised: 11 April 1980
PilOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IV OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
NORMAL PROCEDURES 114

NOTI
Takeoff flap setting in excess of 20 degrees is not recommended.

4. Power - FULL THROTTLE AND 2700 RPM.

NOTI
Takeoffs at density altitudes greater than 5000 feet may require
leaning in order to obtain smooth engine operation.

5. Elevator Control - SLIGHTLY AFT OF NEUTRAL.


6. Rotate - 69 KIAS.
7. Climb Speed - 72 KIAS.
8. Landing Gear RETRACT, when safely airborne.
9. Wing Flaps - RETRACT after obstacle clearance is assured.
C
op

CROSSWIND TAKEOFF
yrig

NOTE
ht
C

Maximum demonstrated crosswind is 19 knots.


om
m

L Fuel Pump Sv.1tch - ON.


an

2. ivUxture - FULL RICH.


de *

3. Wing Flaps - 10 DEGREES.


r O *un

4. Power - FULL THROTTLE and 2700 RPM.


w off

5. Aileron Control - FULL AILERON, into the wind. Reduce aileron deflection
ne ic

as speed is increased.
rs ial

6. Elevator Control SLIGHTLY FORWARD OF NEUTRAL.


G co

7. Rotate - 75 KIAS.
ro p
up y*

NOTI
20 *

The aircraft should be positively rotated to preclude the


13

possibility of skidding the main gear tires as might be


encountered during a gradual rotation. Make a coordinated
Al
lR

turn to maintain track.


ig
ht

8. Climb Speed - 80 KlAS .


s

9. Landing Gear - RETRACT, when safely airborne.


R

10. Wing Flaps - RETRACT.


es
er
ve

SHORT FIELD TAKEOFF


d

1. Fuel Pump Switch - ON.


2. Mixture - FULL RICH.
3. Wing Flaps - 20 DEGREES.
4. Brakes - HOLD.
5. Power - FULL THROTTLE and 2700 RPM.
6. Brakes - RELEASE.
7. Elevator Control - SLIGHTLY AFT OF NEUTRAL.
8. Rotate - 66 KIAS.
9. Climb Speed - 69 KIAS.
10. Landing Gear - RETRACT, when safely airborne.
11. Wing Flaps - RETRACT when obstacles are safely cleared and airspeed has increased to 80 KlAS .
12. Climb Speed - Best Rate of Climb Speed or As Required.
SOFT FIELD TAKEOFF - NO OBSTACLES

1. Fuel Pump Switch - ON.


2. Mixture - FULL RICH.
3. Wing Flaps - 20 DEGREES.
4. Power - FULL THROTTLE and 2700 RPM.
5. Elevator Control - FULL AFT.
4-8 Issued: 21 February 1976
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTlONIV
114 NORMAL PROCEDURES

As the nose gear lifts off the runway, the elevator control will
have to be readjusted to maintain a constant nose high attitude
during the takeoff roll without dragging the tail skid.

6. Takeoff Roll/Liftoff NOSE mGH.

NOTE
Nose gear should be just clear of the runway during the takeoff
roll and subsequent liftoff.

7. Climb - 69 KlAS.
8. Landing Gear - RETRACT, when safely airborne.
9. Wing Flaps - RETRACT after increasing airspeed to 80 KlAS .
C
op

SOFT FIELD TAKEOFF - OBSTACLES AHEAD


y rig
ht

1. Fuel Pump Switch - ON.


C

2. Mixture - FULL RICH.


om

3. Wing Flaps - 20 DEGREES.


4. Power - FULL THROTTLE and 2700 RPM.
m
an

5. Elevator Control - FULL AFT .


de *

NOTE
r O *un

As the nose gear lifts off the runway, the elevator control will
w off

have to be adjusted to maintain a constant nose high attitude


ne ic

during the takeoff roll.


rs ial
G co

6. Takeoff Roll/Liftoff NOSE mGH.


ro p
up y*
20 *

NOTE
13

Nose wheel should be just clear of the runway.


Al
lR

7. Climb - 69 KlAS.
ig

8. Landing Gear - RETRACT, when safely airborne.


ht

9. Wing Flaps - RETRACT when obstacles are safely cleared and airspeed has increased to SO KlAS.
s
R
es
er

NORMAL CLIMB
ve
d

1. Airspeed - 100 to 120 KlAS.


2. Manifold Pressure - FULL THROTTLE or 25 IN.HG., whichever is less.
3. Engine Speed - 2500 RPM.
4. Mixture - FULL RICH below 5000 feet density altitude and LEAN as required for smooth engine
operation above 5000 feet density altitude.
5. Cowl Flaps - AS REQUIRED.
6. Strobe Lights (if installed) - ON, unless flying through fog, clouds, or haze.

NOTE
Using strobe lights during flight through fog, clouds, or
dense haze conditions can be unnecessarily distracting to
the pilot, possibly resulting in disorientation.
MAXIMUM PERFORMANCE CLIMB
1. Airspeed - 91 KIAS at SEA LEVEL and 85 KlAS at 10,000 feet.
2. Manifold Pressure - MAXIMUM (Full throttle).
3. Engine Speed - 2700 RPM.
4. Mixture - FULL RICH below 5000 feet density altitude and LEAN as required for smooth engine
operation above 5000 feet density altitude.
5. Cowl Flaps - AS REQUIRED.
Issued: 21 February 1976 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS FAA. APPROVED 4-9
Revised: 11 Aoril 19S0
PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IV OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
NORMAL PROCEDURES 114

CRUISE

I 1.
2.
Sudden or abrupt throttle movement may result in an engine over-
speed condition. Should an overspeed condition be observed, contact
Lycoming Service Representative for instructions.

Cowl Flaps - AS RFQUIRFD, to maintain proper operating temperatures.


Manifold Pressure - 15 to 24 IN. HG.
3. Engine Speed - 2200 to 2700 RPM.
4. Power - 75% MCP OR LESS.

NOTE
For more detailed information concerning cruise power settings,
refer to Section V of this handbook.

5. Fuel Pump S";i.tch - OFF.


C
op

6. Mixture - B' ,ST POWER or BEST ECONOMY.


y
rig

NOTE
ht
C

Leaning should be accomplished using the Exhaust Gas Temperature


om

(EGT) indicating system when practical. If it should be impractical


m

to do so, leaning can be accomplished by utilizing the cruise perfor-


an

mance fuel flow data presented in Section V of this handbook. For a


de *

best power mixture, lean to peak EGT and enrichen until the EGT
r O *un

decreases by 100 o F. For best economy mixture, lean to peak EGT.


w off

Enrichen mixture prior to increasing engine power.


ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*

Do not lean to peak EGT when operating above approximately


75% MCP.
20 *
13

7. Fuel Selector Valve - AS REQUIRED to maintain lateral trim.


Al
lR

DESCENT
ig
ht
s

I
R
es
er

Sudden or abrupt throttle movement may result in an engine over-


ve

speed condition. Should an overspeed condition be observed, contact


d

LYCOming Service Representative for instructions.

l. Mixture - FULL RICH.

NOTE
If engine is rough with full rich mixture lean for smoothness
as required.

2. Throttle - AS REQUIRED.
3. Engine Speed - AS REQUIRED.

NOTE
Adjust manifold pressure and RPM to maintain cylinder head
and oil temperature in their normal operating range.

4. Cowl Flaps - CLOSED.

4-10 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED Issued: 21 February 1976


T""O _ _ _ ~ _ _ _' 11 A _ _ !1 1nO(\
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IV
114 NORMAL PROCEDURES

BEFORE LANDING

1.
2.
Seats, Seat Belts and Shoulder Straps
Fuel Selector - BOTH,
ADJUST and SECURE (front seats in upright position), I
3. Fuel Pump S\\itch - ON,
4. Landing Gear EXTEND.
5. Flaps - 20 DEGREES.
6. Mixture FULL RICH.
NO'IE
Maximum demonstrated crosswind is 19 knots.

BALKED LANDING

1. Power - FULL THROTTLE and 2700 RPM.


2. Landing Gear - RETRACT.
3. Flaps - 20 DEGREES.
4. Airspeed - 69 KIAS l\flNlMUM.
C

5. Cowl Flaps - OPEN.


op
yr

Vihen a positive rate-of-climb has been established:


ig
ht

6. Airspeed - 80 KIAS.
C

7. Flaps RETRACT.
om
m
an

NORMAL LANDING
de
r O **un

1. Propeller Control - FULL FORWARD.


w off

2. Power - AS REQUIRED.
ne ic

3. Flaps - 35 DEGREES.
rs ial

4. Airspeed - 80 KIAS.
G co

5. Touchdown - MAIN WHEELS FIRST.


ro p

6. Braking - l\flNlMUM required.


up y*
20 *
13

SHORT FIELD LANDING


Al
l

1. Propeller Control - FULL FORWARD.


R

2. Flaps 35 DEGREES.
ig
ht

3. Po,ver - IDLE.
s

4. Airspeed - 71 KIAS l\flNlMUM.


R
es
er
ve
d

This final approach speed is a minimum speed for a smooth air condition.
This approach speed should be increased as required (typically 5 to 15 KIAS),
if turbulence or ;vind shear conditions exist.

5. Touchdown - MAIN WHEELS FIRST.


6. Flaps - RETRACT.
7. Braking - MAXIMUM.
8. Elevator Control - FULL AFT during braked roll-out.

Issued: 21 February 1976


Revised: 6 April 1977 4-11
PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IV OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
NORMAL PROCEDURES 114

SOFT FIELD LANDING

FINAL APPROACH

1. Propeller Control - FULL FORWARD.


2. Flaps - 35 DEGREES.

3. Manifold Pressure - 12 to 14 IN.HG.


4. Airspeed - 71 KIAS. MINTh1UM.

[~]

I 5.
6.
This final approach speed is a minimum speed for a smooth air
condition. This approach speed should be increased as required
(typically 5 to 15 KIAS) if turbulence or wind shear conditions exist.

Touchdown - MAlN WHEELS FIRST.


Rollout - NOSE llGH with nose wheel just clear of the runway.
C

NOTE
op
yr

A slight amount of power should be maintained during touchdown.


ig

Close the throttle during the roll-out.


ht
C
om

AFTER LANDING
m
an

1. Flaps - RETRACT.
de

2. Cowl Flaps OPEN.


r O **un

3. Fuel Pump Switch - OFF.


w off

4. Strobe Lights (if installed) - OFF.


ne ic
rs ial
G co

SHUTDOWN
ro p
up y*

1. Parking Brake - SET.


20 *

2. Radio Master Switch 0 FF .


13

3. Electrical Equipment - OFF.


Al

4. Mixture - IDLE CUTOFF.


l

5. Ignition Sv.1.tch - OFF.


R
ig

6. MasterSwitch OFF.
ht

7. Controls Lock INSTALL.


s

8. Fuel Selector - OFF.


R
es

9. Tie- Downs - SECURE


er
ve
d

NOISE CHARACTERISTICS

Certified maximum noise level for the Rockwell Commander 114 per Federal Aviation Regulation
Procedures is 7B. 47 DB(A).

"No determination has been made by the Federal Aviation Administration that the noise levels of this
airplane are or should be acceptable or unacceptable for operation at, into, or out of, any airport."

Despite the fact that the Rockwell Commander 114 noise level is below established noise level limits,
all pilots can demonstrate a concern for environmental improvement by application of the following
flight procedures:

1. Even though flights below 2000 feet may be consistent with Federal Aviation Regulations under
VFR conditions, pilots should make an effort to avoid such flights over recreational areas or
outdoor assemblies of people in order to minimize the effect of airplane noise on the public.

2. During departu re or approach over public areas, every effort should be made to avoid pro-
longed flight at low altitude.

Issued: 21 February 1976


4-12 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED Revised: 11 April 1980
Utii'
D rn SECTION V :::0:::0
~ C "",00
., ro ~O
n 0-
..
~~
~
'1:>:)

" ....
PERFORMANCE
Or-'
"~~ TABLE OF CONTENTS trlr-'
, 0' :::0
1 "1
::;~
Figure No. Page No.
-"1
0,<
-.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................... . 5- 2
-.1 .....

C
CD VARIABLE FACTORS AFFECTING PERFORMANCE ................................... . 5- 2

op
--.1
0> FLIGHT PLANNING ................................................................ . 5- 3

yr
5-1 THROTTLE CLOSED STALL SPEEDS ............................................... . 5- 7

ig
5-2 AIRSPEED CALIBRATION (PRIMARY STATIC SOURCE) ............................... . 5- 9

ht
5-3 AIRSPEED CALIBRATION (ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE) WINOOW OPEN .............. . 5-11

C
om
5-4 AIRSPEED CALIBRATION (ALTERNATE STATIC SOUHCE) WINOOW CLOSED ........... . 5-13
5-5 ALTIMETER CORRECTION (PRlMARY STATIC SOURCE) .............................. . 5-15

m
5-6 ALTIMETER CORRECTION (ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE) WINDOW OPEN ............. . 5-17

an
5-7 ALTIMETER CORRECTION (ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE) WINDOW CLOSED .......... . 5-19 o

de *
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION ................................................. , .... . 5- 21
-c
5-8 m

r O *un
5-9 WIND COMPONENTS ........................................................... , .. . 5-23 :;0

w off
5-10 NORMAL TAKEOFF GROUND ROLL DISTANCE, 10 DEG FLAPS ....................... . 5-25 l>

ne ic
-t
5-11 NORMAL TAKEOFF DISTANCE TO 50-FT HEIGHT, 10 DEG FLAPS .................... . 5-27

rs ial
5-12 SHORT FIELD TAKEOFF GROUND ROLL DISTANCE, 20 DEG FLAPS ................... . 5-29 Z-c
Q-

G co
5-13 SHORT FIELD TAKEOFF DISTANCE TO 50-FT HEIGHT, 20 DEG FLAPS ................ . 5-31 r-

ro p
5-14 5-33 IO

up y*
RATE OF CLIMB, CLEAN CONFIGURATION - SiN 14000 THRU 14149 .................. .
5-15 RATE OF CLIMB, CLEAN CONFIGURATION - SiN 14150 & SUBS ....................... . 5-35 l>~

20 *
5-16 TIME, DISTANCE & FUEL IN CLIMB - SiN 14000 THRU 14149 ......................... . 5-37 ZVI

13
5-17 TIME, DISTANCE & FUEL IN CLIMB - SiN 14150 & SUBS ............................. . 5-39 o
c::J

Al
5-18 CRUISE POWER SETTING TABLE (SEA LE'VEL PRESSURE ALTITUDB) ................. . 5-41
o

lR
5-19 CRUISE POWER SETTING TABLE (2000 FEET PRESSURE ALTITUDE) .................. . 5-42
o

ig
5-20 CRUISE POWER SETTING TABLE (4000 FEET PRESSURE ALTITUDE) .................. . 5-43

ht
5-21 CRUISE POWER SETTING TABLE (6000 FEET PRESSURE ALTITUDE) .................. . 5-44 A

s
5-22 CHUISE POWER SETTING TABLE (8000 FEET PRESSURE ALTITUDE) .................. . 5-45

R
es
5-23 CRUISE POWER SETTING TABLE (10,000 FEET PRESSURE ALTITUDE) ................ . 5-46

er
5-24 CRUISE POWER SETTING TABLE (12,000 FEET PRESSURE ALTITUDE) ................ . 5-47

ve
5-25 CRUISE POWER SETTING TABLE (14,000 FEET and 15,000 FEET PRESSURE ALTITUDE) 5-48

d
5-26 CRUISE TRUE AIRSPEED - SiN 14000 THRU 14149 ................................... . 5-51
5-27 CRUISE TRUE AIRSPEED - SiN 14150 & SUBS ....................................... . 5-53
5-28 RANGE - SiN 14000 THRU 14149 .................................................... . 5-55
5-29 RANGE - s/N 14150 & SUBS ........................................................ . 5-57
5-30 ENDURANCE PROFILES - SiN 14000 THRU 14149 ..................................... . 5-59
5-31 ENDURANCE PROFILES - SiN 14150 & SUBS ......................................... . 5-61
'i:i
5-32 HOLDING TIME ................................................................... . 5-63 M
5-33 TIME, DISTANCE & FUEL IN DESCENT - SiN 14000 THRU 14149 ...................... . 5-65 :::0
5-67 'TlUl
5-34 TIME, DISTANCE & FUEL IN DESCENT - SiN 14150 & SUBS .............. , ............ . OM
5-35 LANDING GROUND ROLL DISTANCE ......................... , ...................... . 5-69 :::00
5-36 LANDING DISTANCE FROM 50 FT HEIGHT ... ' .......................... , ............ . ~>-3
5-71 ~ .....
MILES PER HOUH TO KNOTS CONVERSION .............. , ............................ . 5-72 zO
<:.J1
I
5-37 oz
..... 5-37 NAUTICAL MILES TO STATUTE MILES CONVERSION .......................... , ..... . 5-72 M<:
<:..n
I INTRODUCTION '1jC/l
ttl ttl
'" ::D<l

The graphs and tables in this section present performance information for flight
Examples of the use of each graph is shown on the graphs,
at valiolls , powers, altitudes and temperatures 'I >rJ::l
00
::D
;s:Z
><
R
ttl
VARIABLE FACTORS AFFECTING PERFORMANCE
The effects of temperature, gross weight, pressure altitude, airspeed and airplane configuration have been accounted for in this data, Variable
factors that have not been accolll1ted for include the following: Humidity, Runway Slopes or Wet Runways.

C
op
yr
ig
ht
o

C
om
."
m

m
;;ttl

an
~

de *
Z."

r O *un
G'>i=

w off
:r:2

ne ic
rs ial
Vi
z

G co
o

ro p
up y*
D:I
o

20 *
o

13
"

Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
....

er
(fj

ve
ul?J

d
~ (1)
~. ?-
Jl
1> N
l. ....
,,"1 <l
,,(1)
0'
0::0
1>;:1 ~R

~~
~~. I
>1

--....
:0
..J-:.
eo .... Mt-<
~::Dt-<
..JO)
::or; FLIGHT PLANNING .... 0::0
ro til
:;:;:00
~.
r::
<: ro
2;::0
0.
~~
til
ro .
?-N The fli ght planning data presented on the following pages provides accurate and complete information from brake release to final stup. Desc ripti ve
N ..... ZM
N'Tj text explains the use of each chart. The data presented is for normal operation and when combined with the "FAA APPROVED" informatiun will tjr-'
>ro provide the necessary background for flight planning. Most flight planning infurmation is based on fli~t tests and is consistent with the operating Mr-'
-00- ::0
~ 2 procedures and limitations set forth in the "FAA APPROVED" information.
...... p'
'i The flight planning example presented here uses the figures for airplane SiN 14150 & Subs. For flight planning information on airplane SiN 140001
0'< thru 14149, the procedure is the same except use the charts applicable to those serial numbers.
-.l .....
-.l<D

C
-.l .
The flight planning example presents procedures which utilize takeoff, climb, cruise, descent and landing performance charts. The sample

op
O"l
flight log on page 5-6 will aid in following each step of the procedure. It should be noted that this example does not necessarily currespond to

yr
the example shown on each individual chart.

ig
ht
FLIGHT PLANNING EXAM PLE

C
om
A flight from Oklahoma City (OKC) to Houston (HOU) is presented in this example.

m
Runway Data at (OKC)

an
Outside Air Temperature 20 0 C (68 0 F) * o

de *
A vailable Runway Length 9500 FT -c

r O *un
m
Field Pressure Altitude 1100 IT ~

w off
Reported Wind 120 DEG (MAG)/14 KT l>

ne ic
Runway Direction 170 DEG (MAG) -i

rs ial
Airplane Ramp Weight 3140 LB Z-c

G co
Cruise Data G);:::

ro p
Outside Air Temperature 0
5 C
Ig

up y*
Cruise Pressure Altitude to (HOU) 5000 IT

20 *
l>V;
Reported Wind Aloft: (OKC to HOU) 230 DEG (TRUE)/15 KT
I Z

13
Course to (HOU) . 160 DEG (TRUE) (151 DEG MAG)
Distance (OKC) to (HOU) o

Al
351 NM (DIRECT) OJ

lR
Runway Data at (HOU)
Outside Air Temperature 25 0 C (77 0 F) *
o
o

ig
ht
A vailable Runway Length 7600 FT A

s
Field Pressure Altitude 200 FT

R
Reported Wind 320 DEG (MAG)/6 KT

es
Runway Direction 210 DEG (MAG)

er
ve
Assume fuel required for start and taxi at 9 LB. Therefore; Airplane Takeoff Wei~t 3131 LB

d
TAKEOFF
Takeoff performance can be obtained for flap deflections of 10 and 20 DEG.
From Figure 5-11 for 10 DEG Flaps: NORMAL TAKEOFF,
Lift-Off Speed 69 KIAS
50- FT Height Speed 72 KIAS
From Figure 5- 9, using 15 KT wind at 50 D EG from left of runway
'C
Headwind Component 10 KT
~
I
From Figure 5-10
U)
Ground Roll Distance 1460 FT OM
From Figure 5-11 ::00
Takeoff Distance to 50 IT 2480 FT ~j
zO
CJl
oZ
I
W * The airport tower and weather bureau normally give surface temperatures in DEG F. M<:
Ul
I FLIGHT PLANNING (eONTD) "elm
trltrl
"'" ;;;
CLIMB
A climb at Maximum Continuous Power is assumed; Enter Figure 5-17 at 1100 FT field pressure altitude and 20 DEG C and determine Time,
Distance and Fuel; then using the cruise altitude of 5000 FT and 5 DEG C again determine Time, Distance and Fuel. The differencp between
I 5;<
00
~Z
these two sets of data is the Time, Distance and Fuel required to climb from field pressure altitude to cruise pressure altitude. (')
trl
Sea Level To Sea Level To Field Field Presbure Altitude


Cruise Altitude Pressure Altitude To Cruise Altitude
Time 5.5 MIN minus 1.2 MIN equals 4.3 MIN
Zero Wind Distance 9.0 NM minus 2.0 NM equals 7.0 NM
Fuel 1.8U.S.Gal minus 0.4 U.S.Gal equals 1.4 U.S.Gal (8.4 LB)

C
From Figure 5-9, using a wind velocity of 15 KT from 230 DEG, 70 DEG to of true course, read:
I

op
Headwind Component 5 KT

yr
ig
The distance in climb with wind is computed as follows:

ht
J o

C
C NM 4.3 MIN
I

om
Distance 7.0NM _~5 HR )X( 60MIN/HR j 6.6NM
"m

m
;lO

an
Weight at level off (including 9 LB start and taxi. allowance) is 3123 LB.
....
:z:8
de *
CRUISE

r O *un
Select the cruise type desired: 55 percent of MCP at 2300 RPM. At a pressure altitude of 5000 FT and an average cruise weight of 3000 LB,
Z"
(i);::

w off
determine the Cruise True Airspeed from Figure 5-27.

ne ic
rs ial
Cruise True Airspeed '" 131 KTAS * vi
z

G co
ro p
To determine Level Flight Cruise performance use the Cruise Power Setting Charts, Figures 5-20 and 5-21, a of which is reproduced o

up y*
below. c:J
o

20 *
o
----

13
PRESSURE ENGINE %BHP IOAT MANIFOLD FUEL
A

Al
ALTITUDE SPEED PRESSURE FLOW

lR
FT RPM PERCENT DEG C IN HG U . S . GAL/HI{

ig
4000 2300 55 0 19.9 11.2

ht
6000 2300 55 0 19.6 11.2

s
R
4000 2300 55 10 20.4 11.2

es
6000 2300 55 10 20.1 11.2

er
......
l)'l

ve
~gJ From the table interpolate for 5000 IT and 5 DEG C to find:

d
ro ro
<$:l. Fuel Flow. 11.2 U.S. GAL/HR
m'~ Manifold Pressure 21.8 IN. HG.
tt . . .
~ "j . The distance to Houston from level off is 351 NM less the climb distance of 7 NM or 344 NM. Enter Figure 5-9 using a wind velocity of 15 KT (')
N~ from 230 DEG, 70 DEG to right of true course and read: O~
>>1 Headwind Component 5 KT ~g
'O~
::1.>1 ~~
I-'~trl
.... * Figure5-27 is presented for 3140 LBS. Therefore, the actual cruise speed will be slightly higher. This will result in a small increase
.... I-'
COCO
-:J-:J
in range. I-'trlt"
-:J 0> "'"~t"
:;0'""'
ro tfl FLIGHT PLANNING (CONTD) :::n~
",,00
<' tfl
,..:. C
ro
;<.::(')
~~
[fl
ro 0. CRUISE (Continued)

I ~~
0. ..
. N
N .... the ground speed as true ai minus the \Iind or n:n KTAS - 5 KT 126 KTAS. Tillle: and fuel ean be computed or'
N'TI Time :)44/126 2.73 HR .t Mt-
;J>ro
00- Fuel .~ 11.2 x 2.7:1 30.513 U .S.GAL 118:305 T n\ .. ::0
..,
_. C'"1
-11.1
...... '"1
",'<
.. These are intermediate calculations which do not illelude the descent distance allowance The final caleulation is presf'ntecl later .
...:.1 .......

C
...Jeo DESCENT
...J

op
m
To compute the descent performance, enter Figure 5- 34 and read:

yr
ig
C rui se AUi tu de Field Pressure

ht
Cruise AllHude To
To Sea Level Altitude To Sea Level Field Pressure Altitude

C
om
Time 5.0 MIN minus 0.2 MIN equals 4.8 MIN

m
I
Zero Wind Distance 13.9 NM minus 1.2 NM equals 12.7NM

an
Fuel 0.55 U .S.Gal Illinus 0.03 U.S.Gal equals 0.52 U.S.Gal (3.1
o

de *
"'tJ

r O *un
The distance in descent with the wind is: m
~

w off
l>

ne ic
Distance = 12.7 NM - l(5 NM )X( 4.8 MIN ~ -'- 12.3 NM
I
-4

rs ial
lIR 60 MIN/HRj Z"'tJ

G co
G);:::

ro p
The distance from Houston to begin letdown point is 12 NM.
I9

up y*
The total cruise time and fuel consumption can now be calculated:

20 *
l>V;

I
z

13
Time (344 - 12}/126 2.635 HR 2 HR 38 MIN
o

Al
Fuel 11.2 x 2.635 29.51 U.S. GAL .1 ttl
o

lR
oA

ig
LANDING

ht
The weight at touchdown is:

s
R
Weight:; 3140 LB - 9.0 LB - B.4 LB - 177.1 LB - 3.1 LB = 2942.4 LB.

es
er
The landing performance can be obtained from Figure 5-36. It should be noted that the data in this fi{,'Ure is presented for 3140 LB

ve
therefore the data will be conservative for 2942 LB.

d
To get the landing distance, first enter Figure 5-9 with a wind of 6 KT at 110 DEG relative to the runway direction, and read:
Tailwind Component 2 KT
Then with a Pressure Altitude of 200 FT, a Wind of 2 KT and Indicated Outside Air of 25 DEG C'
From 5-35
Final Approach 71 KIAS "0
M
Landing Ground Roll 7[)O FT ::0
and From Figure 5-36 'TIw
Landing Distance From 50 FT 1322 IT OM
~~
~5
()Z
CJ1
I
CJ1 M<
C]1 'dUl
I
0>
MM
::0(')
"'l>-3
0 .....
~~
~<
(')
M

SAMPLE FLIGHT LOG I

C
WIND


GROUND

op
LEG DISTANCE TRUE TIME AVERAGE FUEL INITIAL
AIRSPEED COMP* SPEED LEG/TOTAL FUEL FLOW LEG/TOTAL WEIGHT

yr
-

ig
SEE BELOW KTAS KT KT HR:MIN LB/HR LD LB

ht
RAMP -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3140

C
o

om
TAKEOFF (OKC) 2480 FT -- +10 -- 0:10/0:10 54.0 9.0/9.0 3131 -c
CLIMB 7 NM 84 79 100.8 3123 m

m
+ 5 0:05/0:15 8.4/17.4
,.;l

an
CRUISE 332 NM 131 + 5 126 2:38/2:53 67.2 177 . 1/194 . 5 2946
2942

de *
DESCENT 12 NM 144 + 5 139 0:05/2:58 37.2 3.1/197.6 -;
LANDING (HOU) 1322 FT -- -- -- 2942

r O *un
- 2 0:00/2:58 0.0/197.6 I
Z-c

w off
G);::

ne ic
* (+) Indicates a Headwind Ig

rs ial
(-) Indicates a Tailwind vi

G co
Z

ro p
o

up y*
c::J

20 *
o

13
o

Al
"

lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
OJ'
;ogJ

d
ro ro
~. Po-
~ N
c. ....
"'l (')
Nro 0::0
NO"
>2 ~?5
~~
~.~
-'<
........ .... ~~
..... Mt"'
"''''
""'"'"
"'" 0>
..,.::ot"'
.....
[Jl
THROTTLE CLOSED STALL SPEEDS :::()!:l.i
~
(!l
"'~X
?- The variation of Throttle Closed Stall Speeds with Bank Angle, Flight Configuration, and Airplane Weight is shown in Figure 5-1 for Cruise, I ~ ~
N Takeoff, and Landing Configurations. >~
..... ZM
"l'j tJt""
(!l Mt""
[ ASSOCIA TED CONDITIONS ::0

e;
'< Power THROTTLE CLOSED
.....

C
to
...;)

op
CT.> Configuration CRUISE TAKEOFF TAKEOFF TAKEOFF LANDING
o DEG o DEG

yr
Wing Flaps 10 DEG 20 DEG 35 DEG

ig
Landing Gear RETRACTED EXTENDED EXTENDED EXTENDED EXTENDED
I

ht
Cowl Flaps CLOSED OPEN OPEN OPEN CLOSED

C
om
Trim Speed 150 PERCENT OF STALL SPEED

m
an
Stall Entry Rate UrnFORMLY DECREASING AT 1 KT/SEC.
o-0

de *
r O *un
EXAMPLE m
:::IC

w off
l>

ne ic
GIVEN: Gross Weight 3140 LB -I

rs ial
Configuration CRUISE (Gear: Retracted, Flaps: 0 Deg.)

I
Z-o

G co
Bank Angle o DEG G'l;::

ro p
up y*
FIND: Stall Speed Fig. 5-1 60 KCAS :I: 9

20 *
l>v;

13
Z
C

Al
o:J

lR
THROTTLE CLOSED STALL SPEEDS - CALIBRATED AIRSPEED, KNOTS o

ig
oA

ht
GROSS WEIGHT - 3140 LBS GROSS WEIGHT - 2500 LBS

s
R

GEAR GEAR GEAR GEAR GEAR GEAR GEAR GEAR GEAR GEAR

es
RET. EXT. EXT. EXT. EXT. RET. EXT. EXT. EXT. EXT.

er
FLAPS FLAPS FLAPS FLAPS FLAPS FLAPS FLAPS FLAPS FLAPS FLAPS

ve
l 0 0 10 20 35 0 0 10 20 35

d
~o:l -150 60
61
63
64
60
61
58
59
55
56
54
55
56
57
54

55
52
52
49
50
iJ:.rn
O[il
-30 64 67 64 61 59 57 59 57 55 52
[il[il '---
...:lJJ:: 45 72 75 72 69 66 64 66 64 61 58 't1
C1C1 r--- M
Z[il
85 89 82 79 76 73 !:l.i
<:0 60 85 78 76
---- - - ..... ~
70 "l'jrn
OM

~B
t.l'1
I
Z@
...;) Figure 5-1_ Q<
U'I
I
O:l
AIRSPEED CALIBRATION (PRIMARY STATIC SOURCE) 'ijUl
tritri
::on
The variation of Calibrated Airspeed with Indicated Airspeed is shown in Figure 5-2 for Takeoff, Cruise and Landing Configurations. It applies d:j
only when the Primary Static Pressure Source has been selected. ::00
<,Z
:;<
Z
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS n
tri
Power SUFFICIENT FOR LEVEL FLIGHT (Nominal)

C
Confi guration TAKEOFF CRUISE LANDING

op
Wing Flaps 10 or 20 DEG o DEG 35 DEG

yr
Landing Gear EXTENDED RETRACTED EXTENDED

ig
Cowl Flaps OPEN CLOSED CLOSED

ht
C
om
TECHNIQUE

m
an
Select the Primary Static Pressure Source. Read the airspeed indicator and determine the Calibrated Airspeed from the chart. Note that this
technique assumes zero instrument error for the airspeed indicator. o

de *
."

r O *un
m
EXAMPLE ;:IC

w off
ne ic
-t
GIVEN: Configuration CRUISE

rs ial
Indicated Airspeed 121 KIAS Z."

G co
G'>i=

zJ:2
ro p
up y*
FIND: Calibrated Airspeed Fig. 5-2 123 KCAS
V;

20 *
13
o

Al
O:J
o

lR
o

ig
ht
A

s
R
es
er
ve
d
.....
O'l

::<:!~
CD m
<Po-
.....
~I>.)
0. ....
. "l
()
1>.)(1)
NO'
NOTE: If the particular airspeed indicator instrument mechanical errors are known, apply these to the Indicated Airspeed before
0::tJ
>2 entering the chart.
~R
~~
'Op.l

~.:1
........
W I'D .... t::ltri
.-:1.-:1 ..... Mt"'
.-:10)
*"::tJt"'
::u~ PRIMARY AIRSPEED SYSTEM CALIBRATION ..... (1 ::u
rll (fl ;:00
<:
.....
~
(I) S::(1
~P.-
~~
N
N ......
N"'l
>(1)
"Co-
NOTE: INDICATED AIRSPEED ASSUMES ZERO INSTRUMENT ERROR
Or<
Mr<
::0
::!.
-p.>
a
...... '1
"''<
-1 ......

C
-1",

op
....:j
0)

yr
ig
ht
C
om
m
CRUISE TAKEOFF AND LANDING

an
o-0

de *
200 200

r O *un
m
~

w off

ne ic
I IS
Cf.l
E-< 180 ~ 180 -I

rs ial
o o Z-o

G co
~ Z
G'>i=

ro p
~

up y*
~ 1 60 1-..-"-.-., .... ; . . . . . ~ 160 1-.. '''.''+

20 *
Q Vi
l:il

13
l:il
l:il
l:il
Z
f;j 140 f;j 140 1-... ; ..,.;..--..-,.. o

Al
f ..

p:: c:J

lR
p::
~ ~
o

ig
o

ht
~ 120 I-- .... :l~--t--:A~........L-......._t-,.. ~___ ,,_;.... ,I Q 120
'"

s
l:il

R
E-< E-<
~

es
~

er
III 100 ...... -t ... L._.....t-_,.. .. +:.. ; .....
~;.+-
e3 100

ve
~ ...:l

d
u u
80 ~.:..:.L0 .. ;.. i ,if::;;,; ,.,..;...... ,,1 80

60 ~I _ _~-L____~______L-~__~~__~
60 " " r
60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 60 80 100 120 140 160 '0
M

~Cf.l
INDICATED AIRSPEED -..... KNOTS INDICATED AIRSPEED -..... KNOTS
OM
::U(1
S::>-l
>0
Zz,
<;)l (1
I
Figure 52. M<
'"
t.n >Or:./)
I
.......
AIRSPEED CAlIoRATION (ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE) PilOT'S SIDE WINDOW ONLY-OPEN trltrl
o ::tIO
The variation of Calibrated Airspeed with Indicated is shown in Figure 5-3 for Takeoff, Cruise, and ion,;. It "'1:j
only when the Alternate Static Pressure Source has been selected. Only the Pilot's side window may be open. 00
::tIz
S':
><:
z
o
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS
trl

Power SUFFICIENT FOR LEVEL FLIGHT (Nominal)

Configuration TAKEOFF CRUISE LANDING


Wing Flaps 10 or 20 DEG o DEG 35 DEG
Landing Gear EXTENDED RETRACTED EXTENDED

C
Cowl Flaps OPEN CLOSED CLOSED

op
Cabin Vent Control OFF OFF OFF

I
yr
Overhead Air Outlets OFF OFF OFF

ig
ht
Heater ON ON ON
Defroster ON ON ON

C
o

om
"m

m
TECHNIQUE

an
:;IItI
-I

de *
Select the Alternate Static Pressure Source. Read the airspeed indicator and determine the Calibrated Airspeed from the chart. Note that this

r O *un
technique assumes zero instrument error for the airspeed indicator, Only the Pilot's side window may be open.
Z"

w off
G>i=

ne ic
EXAMPLE
:rg

rs ial
V;

G co
GIVEN: Configuration CRUISE

ro p
Indicated Airspeed 121 KlAS Z
o

up y*
c:J

20 *
FIND: Calibrated Airspeed Fig. 5-3 114 KCAS
o

13
o

Al
"

lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
.....

er
rn

ve
::tI2!

d
(!)~
:S. "
tnt.)
~ ....
, >%j
1(1) NOTES: 1. If the particular airspeed indicator instrument mechanical errors are known, apply these to the Indicated Airspeed before entering o
IC' the chart. O::tl
>2
'tl III 2, If optional right side window is installed, it must be closed. ~R
~~
........
coco
3. A conveniently located plasticized card is provided in the cockpit, which tabulates the Airspeed Calibration information presented in
Figure 5-3.
I >~
. . 8M
-J-'I .... Mt"'
-'10) ~::tIt"'
..... ALTEHNATE AIHSPEED SYSTEM CALIBHATION
Ul
Ul
. .....
-(')~
00
~ ~<'(')
ro
0.
~~
N
,' ..... ~tTl
NOTE: 1. INDICATED AIRSPEED ASSUMES ZERO INSTRUMENT FHROR tJ r-'
"rj tTlr-'
ro 2. PILOT'S SIDE WINDOW ONLY-OPEN ~
cr'
.~
'"1 3. HEATER AND DEFROSTER ON
S
'"1
'
J
J .....

C
CD
--l

op
0'>

yr
ig
ht
C
om
m
TAKEOFF, CRUISE, AND LANDING

an
0

de *
200 "'tJ

r O *un
m
;:it!

w off

ne ic
~ 180

I ~

rs ial
0
Z~
~

G co
G')r-

ro p
l 0

up y*
160
I~
Cl

20 *
w Vi
w z

13
~ 140 0

Al
0::: CXJ

lR
~ 0

ig
~ 120 0

ht
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SPEED, ....

"

s
E-< PILOT'S SIDE WINDOW OPEN

R
<t: : t

MAj<'lMUMFLAPEXTENSi6NsPEED,VF~

es
0:::
~ 100 : (20-!5..~~~.~.~'.':~.s.) ........ __ ._

er
, .'

ve
~
<t:

d
U
80 ~ .. ; ..... ,.

60 J

60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 '0


tTl

~
INDICATED AIRSPEED""- KNOTS
OM
CIl
~(')
~>-j
;"0
(J1
J Zz
..... Q<
..... Figure 53.
G~
I
...... AIRSPEED CALIBRATION (ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE) ALL SIDE WINDOWS CLOSED 'tjUl
ttl ttl
tv ::o()
The variation of Calibrated rurspeed with Indicated Airspeed is shown in Figure 5-4 for Takeoff. Cruise, and Landl ng . It applicos ITJ'"'l
only when the Alternate Static Pressure Source has been selected, and all side windows are CLOSED. 0-
::;:J0
:;.-Z
:;<
7.
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS ()
ttl
Power SUFFICIENT FOR LEVEL FLIGHT (Nominal)

Configuration TAKEOFF CRUISE LANDING


Wing Flaps 10 or 20 DEG o DEG 35 DEG
Landing Gear EXTENDED RETRACTED EXTENDED

C
Cowl Flaps OPEN CLOSED CLOSED

op
Cabin Vent Control OFF OFF OFF

I
yr
Overhead Air Outlets OFF OFF OFF

ig
Heater

ht
ON ON ON
Defroster ON ON ON

C
o

om
Vent Window s CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED
"

m
m

an
TECHNIQUE ~
l>

de *
-;

r O *un
Select the Alternate Static Pressure Source. Read the Airspeed Indicator and determine the Calibrated rurspeed from the chart. Note that this
technique assumes Zero Instrument Error for the rurspeed Indicator. All side windows mu st be CLOSED. z"

w off
Glr:

ne ic
EXAMPLE :z:8

rs ial
l>.;;

G co
ro p
GIVEN: Configuration CRUISE Z

up y*
Indicated rurspeed 121 KIAS o

"
07

20 *
FIND: Calibrated Airspeed Fig.5-4 123 KCAS o

13
o

Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
.....

ve
{Jl

::o[!J

d
<ll~
< .
~. N
0. ....
~>oj NOTES: 1. If the particular airspeed indicator instrument mechanical errors are known, apply these to the Indicated rurspeed before entering ()
Ng. the chart. 0::0
>2
~l'l 2. If optional side window is installed, it mu st be closed. ~g
~~
........
tOtO
...::r...::r
...::reT>
3. A conveniently located plasticized card is provided in the
Figure 5-4.
, which tabulates the rurspeed Calibration information presented in
I . . ~
.... ttlt"'
",,::Ot"'
::O(ji' ALTER"J'ATE AIHSPEED SYSTEM CALIBRATION ..... (') ::0
'D Ul ""00
<: J:
;;' ~
""'s::()
~"
'N
~~
Ztrl
N .... t:1 t"'
N NOTE: INDICATED AIRSPEED ASSUMES ZERO INSTRUMENT ERROR trlt"'
>~
00-
::0
:1'2
-l>:>
.... "1
<0
-l
-l ....

C
to

op
-l
0'>

yr
ig
ht
C
om
m
CRUISE TAKEOFF AND LANDING

an
o

de *
200r-:-!:-:-:----;---;-----------~ 200 "'0
m

r O *un
;lO

w off
l>

ne ic
en 180 1- .. l ._,...';,."l..+ en 180 1-.. ....... . . ...... .."......, -I

I ::r:2
rs ial
E-<
o EXCEED b
z
Z""C

G co
Z VNE G'>;:::

ro p
~ ~
160 . "" ....'" ., ... ;...,r.,."+",, .... 1

up y*
I---;~-f~"+'"-;
( 160 I- :-",,;+,,,,+::..,:..;1
l l>v:;

20 *
Q Q
w Z

13
W
~ 140 ....-',,,~f,,;~;,,; ,.,.. ..... ~,- ..\; .... ;........ !,.I g: 140 1-;r"1"1"+"" ........ +..~ o

Al
en OJ
en
o

lR
0:: 0::
!;i! < 120 I-.. o

ig
.."'-.. -+.. ;.~

ht
Q 120 1--+'-""'...:;:':""-:-'-._.rI-".".".".".+.."._'.". ""." "-"~~"''='''"I Q ~-;-
w "

s
W

R
E-< E-<
~

es
<
~ 1 00 1--,,-,,--t""-':"""~""";";r ... ;."".~,. , "

er
III 100

ve
~
~ -<

d
U U
80 F;+:....:.;IF,,;,,'~!, ., ",iI;,,; .. " \ + .............,.. 1 80 1-. ;.-:-"

60 I
60LI----~----~~--~~--L-~--~--~
60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 '"d
trl
::0
INDICATED AIRSPEED """V KNOTS INDICATED AIRSPEED - KNOTS >rj (Jl
Otrl
::0(')
S::..,
> .....
U1 zO
I ('}Z
.....
W Figure 54, trl<!
tJ1
ALTIMETER CORKECTION (PRIMARY STATIC SOURCE) 'l:JW
.....I trltrl
H:o ::0 (')
The variation of Altimeter Correction with Indicated Airspeed and Indicated Press11re Altitude is shown in Figure 5-5 for Cruise and "'1.-1
Landing configurations. They apply only when the Primary Static Pressure Source has been selected. 0-
::00
:?Z
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS ;t:<
~
Power SUFFICIENT FOR LEVEL FLIGHT (Nominal) trI

Configuration TAKEOFF CRUISE LANDING


Wing Flaps 10 or 20 DEG o DEG 35 DEG
Landing Gear EXTENDED RETRACTED EXTENDED
Cowl Flaps OPEN CLOSED CLOSED

C
op
TECHNIQUE

yr
ig
DETERMINATION OF PRESSURE ALTITUDE (For use on performance charts)

ht
Select the Primary Static Pressure Source and set the barometric scale (Kollsman Window) of the altimeter to 29.92 inches of mercury.

C
Read the airspeed indicator and altimeter and determine the Altimeter Correction from the chart. To the Indicated Pressure Altitude read-
o

om
I
ing add the Altimeter Correction as noted on the chart. Note that tillS technique assumes zero instrument error. After pressure altitude "tl

m
has been deternlined, the altimeter should be re-adjusted to local barometric pressure. m

an
:;IC

de *
EXAMPLE A -4

r O *un
Z"tl

w off
GIVEN: Configuration TAKEOFF (10 DEG FLAPS)
G'>;::

ne ic
Indicated Pressure Altitude S.L. 0 FT
J:g

rs ial
Indicated Airspeed 70 KIAS

G co
v\
o
ro p
FIND: Altimeter Correction Fig. 5-5 10 FT Z

up y*
Calibrated Pressure Altitude 0+10 = 10 FT o

20 *
0::1

13
I '"
DETERMINATION OF FLIGlIT ALTITUDE
With the altimeter set to the local barometric pressure, flight altitude can be determined o

Al
adding the altimeter correction found on the

lR
chart to the indicated altitude. This technique assumes zero instrument error.

ig
ht
EXAMPLE B

s
R

GIVEN: Configuration CRUISE

es
Indicated Pressure Altitude 5000 FT

er
....til

ve
Indicated Airspeed 121 KIAS

d
::ogJ
FIND: Altimeter Correction Fig. 5-5 25 FT

I
Ol Ol
:::. :7 Flight Altitude 5000 +25 = 5025 Ff
[llN
0. ....
~~ ()
0::0
NO"' NOTE: If the particular airspeed indicator and altimeter instrument mechanical errors are known, apply them to the Indicated Airspeed
>a
'0 III
and Indicated Pressure Altitude before entering the chart. ~g
~~
........ ~~
.... tHrJ
<D <J:> .... trJt"'
...;J...;J
...;J Ol H:o::Ot"'
:o-
n en PRIMARY SYSTEM ALTIMETEH CORHECTION :::0::0
A en ,/>.00
:. s:: ~O
fl l1)

~~
t> Po
::>.

",,""
.... NOTE: INDICATED AIRSPEED AND PRESSURE ALTITUDE tn"'
j>"l'J
::l l1)
1 0-
::;2
ASSUMES ZERO INSTRUMENT ERROR I Mt"
::0

.... 1
.0'"1
..:J'<
f-< f-<

C
..:J ,... Ii<
Ii<

op
<0
-.l
0> l (

yr
Z~ TAKEOFF - 10 DEG FLAPS Z~ TAKEOFF - 20 DEG FLAPS

ig
Of-< Of-<

ht
-..:l ..... ...:l
f- 40 f- 40
u.

C
u

om
CJ:lUJ CJ:lUJ
p::UJ p::UJ

m
p::~ 20 f[tl 20

an
0- ...
00..
U. uP; o

de *
p::Q p::Q "'0

r O *un
CJ:l~ CJ:l~ m
~O 0 ~O 0 ;ltI

w off
-I

ne ic
~f-< ~f-<
-Q

rs ial
F=:Q f-<Q
Q Z"'O
< ~ 5 -20

G co
...:l -20
<~ G'>;::

ro p
6080 100 120 140 160 60 80 100 120 140 160
J:8

up y*
INDICATED AIRSPEED"""'" KNOTS INDICATED AIRSPEED"""" KNOTS

20 *
V;
z

13
c

Al
OJ

lR
f-< CRUISE - 0 DEG FLAPS f-< LANDING - 35 DEG FLAPS o

ig
Ii<
Ii<
o

ht
( 40 .f:" ( 40
"

s
z~

R
z~
Of-< Of-<

es
I .
-...:l -...:l

er
f- f-
u 20 u 20

ve
CJ:lUJ CJ:lUJ
p::UJ p::UJ

d
f~ p::[tl
00..
uP; 0 u. 0
p::Q
~~ CJ:l~
f-<O
f-<O
CJ:l f-< - 20 ~ f-< -20
~Q 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 F=: 60 80 100 120 140 "d
M
..:lQ INDICATED AIRSPEED"""'" KNOTS ...:l INDICATED AIRSPEED""'--- KNOTS ::0
<5 <
d~
::00
~I-j
01
>-
zO
,...I Oz
01 Figure 5-5. M<
{)1
ALTIMETER CORRECTION (ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE) PILOT'S SIDE WINDOW -OPEN "::J C/l

I
I
..... -M
''I
n
~j
m
The variation of Altimeter Correction with Indi cated and Indicated Pressure Altit\lde is shown in Fig!1 re 5- G for Takeu!f, C rui sp 1 anei
Landing configurations. They apply when the Alternate Static Pressure Source has been only the Pil"t's siei(' \\incilll'. bE' open. @~
~;
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS ;J;>'
z
n
Power SUFFICIENT FOR LEVEL FLIGHT M

Configuration TAKEOFF CRUISE LANDING


Wing Flaps 10 or 20 DEG o DEG 35 DEG
Landing Gear EXTENDED RETRACTED EXTENDED
Cowl Flaps OPEN CLOSED CLOSED
ON ON ON
I

C
Heater

op
Defroster ON ON ON

yr
ig
TECHNIQUE

ht
C
DETERMINATION OF PRESSURE ALTITUDE (For use on performance charts) o

om
Select the Alternate Static Pressure Source and set the barometric scale (Kollsman Window) of the altimeter to 29.92 inches of mercury.
"m

m
Read the airspeed indicator and altimeter and determine the Altimeter Correction from the chart. To t11e Indicated Pressure Altitude read-

an
AI
ing add the Altimeter Correction as noted on the chart. Note that this technique assumes zero instrument error. Only the Pilot's side l>

de *
I ::c9
window may be open. After pressure altitude has been determined 1 the altimeter should be re-adjusted to local barometlic pressure. -t

r O *un
Z"

w off
EXAMPLE A Q;::

ne ic
rs ial
GIVEN: Configuration CRUISE
l>V;

G co
Indicated Pressure Altitude 1100 IT

ro p
90 KIAS
Z
Indicated Airspeed o

up y*
tD

20 *
FIND: Altimeter Correction Fig. 5-6 -42 FT o

13
Calibrated Pressure Altitude 1100 -42 = 1058 FT oA

Al
I
lR
DETERMINATION OF FLIGHT ALTITUDE
With the altimeter set to the local barometric pressure, flight altitude can be determined by adding the altim2ter correction found on the

ig
ht
chart to the indicated altitude. This technique assumes zero instrument error.

s
R
EXAMPLE B

es
er
.....

ve
CRUISE


Ul GIVEN: Configuration

d
::o~ Indicated Pressure Altitude 5000 FT
<D ro
<0. Indicated Airspeed 121 KIAS
.........
~I'-'
0. ....
>::tj
Nro
Ncr
FIND: Altimeter Correction Fig. 5-6
Flight Altitude
-84 FT
5000 -84 = 4916 FT I
0::0
n
"1
"Or:: NOTES: 1. If the particular airspeed indicator and altimeter instrument mechanical errors are known, apply them to the Indicated Airspeed E::o
E::n
::.l.r; and Indicated Pressure Altitude before entering the chart.
......
.......... 2. If optional right side window is installed, it must be closed. ~~
<D <0
-.l -.l
3. A conveniently located plasticized card is provided in the cockpit which tabulates the Altimeter Correction presented in Figure 5-6 . .... t:lt:r:l
..... t:r:lr'
-:1m ..,.::Or'
CJl
ALTIMETER CORRECTION (ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE) PilOT'S SIDE WINDOW -OPEN 'tl CIl

I
I
...... t'rJtr1
0':> ~n
The variation of Altimeter Correction with Indicated Airspeed and Indicated Pressure Altitude is showll ill Figure 5-6 for Tak(',)ff C1'U]:;(" ;llld "'1 :::l
Landing configurations. They apply only \\hel1 the Alternate Static Pres:;urc Soul'ce ha:; been . only the PUll!' s sicjp \\ )\\ I1l.lY be open. ~~
s:~<
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS
z
n
Power SUFFICIENT FOR LEVEL FLIGHT (Nominal) tr1

Configuration TAKEOFF CRUISE LANDING


Flaps 10 or 20 DEG 0 DEG 35 DEG
Landing Gear EXTENDED RETRACTED EXTENDED
Cowl Flaps OPEN CLOSED CLOSED
Heater ON ON ON
I

C
op
Defroster ON ON ON

yr
ig
TECHNIQUE

ht
C
DETERMINATION OF PRESSURE ALTITUDE (For use on performance charts) o-0

om
Select the Alternate Static Pressure Source and set the barometric scale (Kollsman Window) of the altimeter to 29.92 inches of mercury.

m
Read the airspeed indicator and altimeter and determine the Altimeter Correction from the chart. To the Indicated Pressure Altitude read- m

an
;0
add the Altimeter Correction as noted on the chart. Note that this technique assumes 7.ero instrument error. Only the Pilot's side :I>

de *
window may be open. After pressure altitude has been determined, the altimeter should be re-adjusted to local barometlic pres:;ure.

I
-4

r O *un
Z-o

w off
EXAMPLE A G)i=

ne ic
J:9

rs ial
GIVEN: Configuration CRUISE
:I> V;

G co
Indicated Pressure Altitude 1100 FT

ro p
Indicated Airspeed 90 KIAS Z
o

up y*
" OJ

20 *
FIND: Altimeter Correction Fig. 5-6 -42 FT o

13
Calibrated Pressure Altitude 1100 -42 = 1058 FT o

Al
I
lR
DETERMINATION OF FLIGHT ALTITUDE
With the altimeter set to the local barometric pressure, flight altitude can be determined by adding the altimeter correction found on the

ig
ht
chart to the indicated altitude. This technique assumes zero instrument error.

s
R
EXAMPLE B

es
er
....

ve
GIVEN: Configuration CRUISE


(/J

::o~

d
Indicated Pressure Altitude 5000 FT
(l) ('l)
<0. Indicated Airspeed 121 KIAS
.......
&iN
0. ....
"1
N('l)
Ncr
FIND: Altimeter Correction Fig. 5-6
Flight Altitude
-84 FT
5000 -84 ~ 4916 FT I n
o~
~'1 NOTES: 1. If the particular airspeed indicator and altimeter instrument mechanical errors are known, apply them to the Indicated Airspeed S:O
'OJ;::
~.e; and Indicated Pressure Altitude before the chart.
s:n
...... '<
........ 2. If optional right side window is installed, it must be closed. ~~
.... t:ltrl
COCO
~-1
3. A conveniently located plasticized card is provided in the cockpit which tabulates the Altimeter Correction in Figure 5-6. .... trlt""'
~m ~~r
~ ...... ALTEHl'iATE SYSTFl\l ALTIMETEn connECTION ......n~
'" Ul :;::00
~. iQ ;:'::0
Ul '"
",0.. :;.>';;x;
n. ..
. tv
:;:;,;
~ ..... ZM
IV TAKEOFF, cnUISE, AND LANDING Or-'
;J>~ Mr-'
~
ocr

I
'"i '1
-..,
-, s::
.... '1
NOTE: 1. INDICATED AInSPEED AND PHESSUHE ALTITUDE
ASSUMES ZEno INST RUMENT ERROR
<0'< 2. PILOT'S SIDE WINDOW ONLY-OPEN
-l
- l .....
3. HEATER AND DEFROSTEH ON

C
<0
-l

op
01

yr
ig
ht
C
om
m
an
o

de *
100
"m

r O *un
~

w off
-t

ne ic
0

rs ial
Z"

G co
E-<
G'>i=

ro p
~
IND :
::r:g

up y*
( -100 S" PREss'"
5~do LEVEL A.t.,- .

20 *
z~
: Vi
OE-< 10 000 z
' ,

13
......
~
E-<~ 115.000 o
u. -200

Al
ww.
Pk
, ' ;
OJ

lR
~w.
~~
T
i ' ~
....
. ~
":.-': o

ig
, i 'MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SPEED. o

ht
00.. -300
u. PILOT'S SIDE WINDOW OPEN A

s
~o

R
wt'Ei

es
er
!;30 -400
::EE-<

ve
-0

d
E-<o
~~
~~
-500

-600
60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 'i::!
M

~
INDICATED AIRSPEED .......... KNOTS
OM
Ul
~n
~>-l
<:Jl
>5
Zz
I
...... o
-l Figure 56. M<
U1
!
......
ALTIMETER CORRECTION (ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE) All SIDE WINDOWS CLOSED '1:JCfl
trltrl
00 ::0 ()
The variation of Altimeter Correction with Inclicated Airspeed and Indicated Pressure Altitude is shown in Figure 5-7 for Take()ff, Cruise, and >-r:1j
Landing configurations. They apply only \\!Jl'll the Alternate Static Pressure Souret' has bec'll selected, and all :side \\inclows arc CLOSED. 00
::Oz
~
;:..<
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS
R
trl
Power SUFFICIENT FOR LEVEL FLIGHT (Nominal)

Configuration TAKEOFF CRUISE LANDING


Flaps 10 or 20 DEG o DEG 35 DEG
Landing Gear EXTENDED RETRACTED EXTENDED
Cowl Flaps OPEN CLOSED CLOSED

C
op
Heater ON ON ON
I

yr
Defroster ON ON ON

ig
ht
TECHNIQUE

C
om
DETERMINATION OF PRESSURE ALTITUDE (For use on performance charts) 0
-c

m
Select the Alternate Static Pressure Source and set the barometric scale (Kollsman Window) of the altimeter to 29.92 inches of mercury. m

an
Read the airspeed indicator and altimeter and determine the Altimeter Correction from the chart. To the indicated Pressure Altitude read- ;:c

de *
add the Altimeter Correction as noted on the chart. Note that this technique assumes zero instrument error. All side windows must be l>
.....

r O *un
I
CLOSED. After pressure altitude has been determined, the altimeter should be re-adjusted to local barometric pressure.
Z-c

w off
EXAMPLE A EXAMPLE B G)i=

ne ic
9

rs ial
GIVEN: Configuration CRUISE GIVEN: Configuration TAKEOFF
:x:

G co
l>v;

ro p
Indicated Pressure Altitude 1100 FT Indicated Pressure Altitude SEA LEVEL Z

up y*
Indicated Airspeed 90 KIAS Indicated Airspeed 130 KIAS 0
o:J

20 *
FIND: Altimeter Correction Fig. 5-7 13 FT FIND: Altimeter Correction Fig. 5-7 -33 FT 0

13
Calibrated Pressure Altitude 1100 +13 1113 FT Calibrated Pressure Altitude S.L. -33 FT 0

Al
-33 FT
"

lR
ig
DETERMINATION OF FLIGIIT ALTITUDE

ht
With the altimeter set to the local barometric pressure, flight altitude can be determined adding the altimeter correction found on the

s
R
chart to the indicated altitude. This technique assumes zero instrument error.

es
EXAMPLE C

er
ve
GIVEN; Configuration CRUISE

d
:.0 Indicated Pressure Altitude 5000 FT
1)
<:
_. ......
00 Indicated Airspeed 121 KIAS
~ gj
::l.(1) FIND: Altimeter Correction Fig. 5-7 26 FT
'0-
r-.:> ,. Flight Altitude 5000 + 26 '" 5026 FT ()
r-.:> .... 0::0
00 NOTES: 1. If the particular airspeed indicator and altimeter instrument mechanical errors are known, apply them to the Indicated Airspeed S::o
::l ~ and Indicated Pressure Altitude before entering the chart. ~()
~~
-:0<0....
-.l.-.J
2. If optional right Side window is installed, it must be closed.
3. A conveniently located plasticized card is provided in the cockpit, which tabulates the Altimeter Correction presented in 5-7 . ......~
..... trlt'"
-'1m ~::Ot'"
:;:0 ...... ALTERNATE SYSTEM ALTIMETEH CmmECTION ..... 0:;:0
ro rn ;00
....<: rn(1)
rtl
~ s:o
~~
(1)Q..
..
Q..

t-.?CO
......
Or-'
t-.?==
>""
'g'<l
..........
NOTES: 1. INDICATED AIRSPElm AND PRESSURE ALTITUDE
ASSUMES ZERO INSTRUMENT ERROR
2. SIDE WINDOW OR WINDOWS-CLOSED
I t':1r-'
:;:0

....... <D 3. HEATER AND DEFROSTER ON


...... -:1
<Den
-J

C
-J

op
yr
ig
ht
C
om
m
an
o

de *
CRUISE TAKEOFF AND LANDING '"tJ

r O *un
m
;:lC

w off
l>

ne ic
110 ,.~--~--------------~------------------~ 200 .-----:---:----:----;--:--:-TI .....

rs ial
Z'"tJ

G co
Qi=

ro p
E-< E-<
J:g

up y*
~ 100 1-".'."" ~ 100 I- ...... ......
? ~ l>c.n
' -=.

20 *
z~
z~ ~ Z

13
OE-<
......
~ 80 1- .. gE-< . ..
,~~:' 11\t( o
E-< ~ 0 ..,. ,I

Al
E-<- aI
u U~
o

lR
t:iJCfl t:iJCfl
o

ig
o::Cfl o::Cfl
0:: ~ a~

ht
60 1--. ., ......; ...................;.........;.................. .......,. .. : .... ; J. . : .. L . :
-100
MAXIM'UM FLAP
Op.., EXTENSION SPEED, VFe
"

s
U. u~ (2~ 25,DEG)

R
0:: 0

es
0::0
~~ I-.~..j ... + ..;..""'<-~ ~;

er
40 -200
,

ve
~E-<
t:iJE-<
~ ;' .,,

d
;
E=:O ...... 0
E-<o
~~ 20 ~;.. ;...-..;....... ~j .... . ~ 5 -300 "';"'MAXIMUM FLAP
" EXTENSION SPEED, VFe
(O 20 DEG)

-400 I I U

80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 60 80 100 120 140 160 "'d
t':1
INDICATED AIRSPEED '"'-' KNOTS INDICATED AIRSPEED .......... KNOTS
~ Cfl
0t':1

C'I
~
Zz
I
......
CD Figure 57. ~<
::0 .....
Ul
ALTERNATE SYSTEM ALTIMETFI{ CORRECTION :::(");::1
~OO
(1)
<: Ul
..... .: s;:(")
Ul (1)
(1)0-
......
P. ~~
f>.)CX>
z~
tit"'
f>.)~
>r.>
;:;'<
..........
NOTES: 1. INDICATED AIRSPEED AND PRESSURE ALTITUDE
ASSUMES ZERO INSTRUMENT ERROR
2. SIDE WINDOW OR WINDOWS-CLOSED
I Mt"'
;::1

...... co 3. HEATER AND DEFROSTER ON


..... -J
coO'>
-J
-J

C
op
yr
ig
ht
C
om
m
an
o-0

de *
CRUISE TAKEOFF AND LANDING m

r O *un
:;JO

w off
l>

ne ic
-4
110 ~I----~--------------------~------------~ 200

rs ial
Z-o

G co
G'>i=

ro p
~ ~
100 I'<-t 100 1- .... :J:g

up y*
I'<-t
? ? l>v;

20 *
a z
t::~==
Z

13
~ 80 0 o

Al
CP
CJ CJ
o

lR
j:i)1Zl j:i)1Zl
0::1Zl 0::1Zl o

ig
~~ ~~ p.. -100 I-~'.':'!.'-""~'"

ht
60 CJ --.-
"

s
CJ~

R
0:: 0 0:: 0

es
~~ ~ ;; -200

er
40
j:i)O

ve
~~ ~~

d
~ -0
~o
~ 20 ~ ::;. -300 ..-MAXIMUM 'FLAP
EXTENSION SPEED. VFe 1
(020 DEG)

-400 I I U

80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 60 80 100 120 140 160 'tj
M
INDICATED AIRSPEED""" KNOTS INDICATED AIRSPEED .......... KNOTS
~ IZl
OM
~(")
c:Jl
I
>g
Zz
.....
co
(")
M<
Figure 5-7.
<:J1

N
I TEMPERATURE CONVERSION 'tI!JJ
ttl ttl
o ::on
"'1>-1
0 .....
Temperature in Degrees Celsius is in Figure 5- 8 for varying temperature in Degrees Fahrenheit.
~~
EXAMPLE ?E<:
n
GIVEN: Temperature C 20 DEG C ttl

F1ND: Temperature Deg F, . 5-8 68 DEG F


C
op
yr
ig
ht
C
o

om
-0
m

m
;iIC

an

de *
-4

r O *un
Z-o
G')-

w off
r-

ne ic
:r:: O

rs ial
-j

G co
zV\

ro p
o

up y*
OJ
o

20 *
o

13
"

Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
::0

d
tt> .....
<: t:Il
~, t:Il
1 C
0.(1)P.-
N
N .....
n
>00 0::0
O~ ~R
~~
..........
<J:)<J:)
-:J -:J
-:J 0)
..... ~~
..... ttll:"'
"",::01:"'
ROCKWELL PilOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION V
114 PERFORMANCE

r---------------------------------~------------------------__;
C g
op
y
rig
ht

0
C

N
om

U
0
m

~
Z c:
an

0
(
de *

ti'i
p:::
r O *un

~ ~
p:;
~
w off

0 ;::J
ne ic

O E-
<t
,.,.,
rs ial

U o:i
~ Gl .n.,
G co

p:; 0..
ro p

;::l :;;: !:iCl


up y*

E- ~ u::
~ E-
20 *

ex:< 0
~ N
13

0..
:;;:
Al

~
lR

E-
ig
ht
s
R

o
es

~
er
ve
d

L-~~__~_L~L__L~~~~~~~__L_~~__~~__~~~~~__~g
o o o o o o o o o
N o co <0 <0 0::>
..... ..... N

~
I I

Issued: 18 May 1976 5-21


Revised: 22 Anril 1977
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION V
114 PERFORMANCE

r-----------------------~----------------------------------------_. g

;-
i
C
op
y

j
....
rig
ht

~--;-""-.-r--~~~
0
C

. N
om

i U
. .i
i
. ..... ~
C)
m

i
W
an

c::
de *

?
r O *un

w
~
w off

0 ;::J
ne ic

E--<
<r:
rs ial

~ ro
.n
G co

W
p.
ro p

:::s '~"
up y*

W u:'"
20 *

E--<
0
13

N
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

L-~__L_~~~~_ _~~L_~~~~~~_L_ _~_L_ _~~_ _~~_ _~~~~~ g


o o o o o o o o o 0'
....
N o
.... co CD N
,
N
,
'<t' ,
CD
,
co

Issued: 18 May 1976 5-21


Revised: 22 Anril 1977
<)1
WIND COMPONENTS 'tltll

.0
I
N ttl ttl
N ::tl(J
>-xj>-cl
Wind Components are presented in Fib'lln! 5- 9 for reported wind velocities ~Uld bet ween the heading :llld the l'eport!d wind. 0
~Z
EXAMPLE ?i<
(J
GIVEN: Reported Wind 14 KT ttl
Angle between Heading and Wind 45 DEG

FIND: Headwind Component, Fig. 5-9


Crosswind Component, Fig. 5- 9
10 KT
'0 KT I

C
op
yr
ig
ht
o

C
om
""0
m

m
;0

an
......

de *
r O *un
Z""O
G);::

w off
J:2

ne ic
rs ial
V;

G co
Z

ro p
o

up y*
OJ
o

20 *
o

13
""

Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
::tl

d
<t>
<: .....
..... en
~ ~
Q.<t>
Q.
N" (J
N ....
>0:> ~::tl
'O~
::!. p.l ~R
.... ?i~
........
........
<0<.0 .... o~
.... trJt:"'
.... 0> "",::tlt:"'
ROCKWELL PilOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION V
114 PERFORMANCE

'Of-
rna: .0'
8<tb 0
ZIOl
<l:U,,-
0
6:;;:0 If')
z~~
~~t
;;:Dxo
t-~wz
"';;;:Z-
"'0-;;;:
(Jj<1:~....J
~w~;;:
C

eIel-
op

Z<l:Z<l:
<l:o<l:o ~
y

a:<l:a:<{
rig

0
owow
LL!l:u..a:
"<!'
ht

N
C

(/)
w
om

I-
0 t-<
Z ~
m
an

l
de *
r O *un

'J:; 0 E-
E- ; C"') Z
w off

.! ~
Z _l .. __ .c_ z
ne ic

w 0
z
rs ial

Po. oi
0 ~ .n
G co

p.. .. -~-"t
0 e:;,
ro p

~ U
up y*

0
U
. ,.. . -- .. ~-~ ....
-
Q '"
ii:
20 *

Q Z
......
z 0
~
13

N
U)
3 U)
Al

@
lR

u
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

~o
"0--
,00

.L)I -.... .LN3.NOdWO':) GNIMGV3.H HO GNIM'lIY.L

Issued: 18 May 1976 5-23


nr".~' C"nrt. ')f) A .......... :1 10".,
c.n
TAKEOFF GROUND ROll DISTANCE, NORMAL (WING flAPS 10 DEG) 't1 Ul

I
I
~ trJtrJ
;I>.
::0 0
""1>-1
0 .....
The Takeoff Ground Roll Distance with 10 Deg Flaps is shown in
wind speed at a gross weight of 3140 Ibs.
5-10 for varying outside air temperature, pressure altitude :md
~g
~~
o
trJ
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS

Power TAKEOFF (FULL THROTTLE, 2700 RPM)


Wing flaps
Landing Gear
Cowl Flaps
10 DEG
EXTENDED
OPEN

C
Runway Conditions PAVED*,DRY,LEVEL
I

op
Mixture See NOTE 3 below

yr
ig
ht
TECHNIQUE
o

om
Obtain Takeoff Power prior to brake release. Release the brakes and accelerate to liftoff at 69 KIAS, '"'tJ
m

m
;:It!

an
EXAMPLE

de *
......
GIVEN: Gross Weight 3140 LB

r O *un
Outside Air Temperature 20 DEG C Z'"'tJ

w off
Pressure Altitude 1100 FT G'>;::

ne ic
:J:8
I
Wind Component 10 KTS (HEADWIND)

rs ial
l>V;

G co
FIND: Distance to Liftoff, Fig. 5-10 1460 FT Z

ro p
C

up y*
D'

20 *
o

13
o
'"

Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d
::0
(I) ....
<: til
NOTES: 1. IAS assumes zero instrument error.
(i;' ~
(!)
?-o.
N
N
>0:>
(1)

....
2. * For short I dry grass runways, increase the ground roll distance by at Sea Level linearly increasing to 61% at 8000 feet.
3. Mixture setting should be set according to the existing pressure altitude and ou tside air temperature: Below 5000 feet, FULL
RICH. 5000 feet to 8000 feet; LEAN for smooth engine operation, as required. Above 8000 feet; LEAN for best power mixture
o
0::0
,,::; (peak EGT, then enrich 100 Deg. F.). These altitudes should be reduced approximately 2000 feet for outside air temperatures
of ISA +20 o C.
~~
~~
........ ~~
<0 <0
.... t1trJ
...:!-:l .... trJt"'
...:! 0> oI>-::ot"'
J;iti;' NORMAL TAKFOFF GROUND ROLL DISTANCE :::0::0
o Ul
~
-. <!>
s:: (10 DEG FLAPS) ~~g
Il 0-
1) DRY, LEVEL, PAVED* RUNWAYS TAKEOFF GROSS WEIGHT 3140 LB ~::,:;

~~
:l..
......
"'0>
tJt"'
"'~ Mt"'
l>1lJ
::0
~'<
:;~
6000 t ISCHEDULED II FTOFF SPEED: 69 KIAS I 6000
--1 NOTES: 1. KIAS ASSUMES ZERO INSTRUMENT ERROR.
.om 2. FOR TAKEOFF ON DRY, GRASS RUNWAYS,
-l
INCREASE THE TAKEOFF GROUND ROLL I.U I

C
-l Z
DISTANCE BY 28% AT SEA LEVEL LINEARLY
~/

op
-'
INCREASING TO 61% AT 8000 FT.

",I

yr
ig
,fL/

ht
5000 1-._;..... , ........... ,.. ...... .... 5000

C
I /

om
I /

m
an
o

de *
E-<
E-<
"

r O *un
IJ:..
i:L. m
l 4000 4000 :;lID

w off
( l>

ne ic
-t

rs ial
>il
U w
Z"

G co
Z u
<: z G>i=

ro p
E-<

up y*
<t::
U)
..... I:-<
U) ::r:8

20 *
~ 3000 3000 .....
Ci l>V;

13
...:l ...:l Z
@ o

Al
...:l
@ c:J

lR
~ o

ig
~ o

ht
::>
0 ::>

s
~ 0
'"

R
2000 2000 ~

es
0

er
ve
d
1000 I-:~ ........;... ;~.;.j... .., 1000

'"d
M
::0
"1U)
OM
o ! I 0
~o
Ul
I
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPEHATURE """ DEG C
0 10 20 30 40 50 0 10 20
WIND COMPONENT '"'"" KTS
30
~8
oZ
I\:>
Ul Figure 510. M~
c.n
N
I

0>
TOTAL TAKEOFF DISTANCE, NORMAL (WING flAPS 10 DEG)

The Takeoff Distances to 50- Ft Height with 10 Degree Flaps are shown in Figure 5-11 for varying Outside Air Temperature, Prl'SSllrC
rm tx:ltx:l
::0(")
'Tj~
0 ....
~@
Altitude and Wind Speed at a Gross Weight of 3140 Ib8.
~<
(")
tx:l
ASSOClA TED CONDITIONS

TAKEOFF (FULL THROTTLE, 2700 RPM)


Power
Wing Flaps 10 DEG
Landing Gear EXTENDED
Cowl Flaps OPEN

C
PAVED*, DRY, LEVEL
Runway Condition
I

op
Mixture See NOTE 3 below

yr
ig
ht
TECHNIQUE
o

C
om
Obtain takeoff power prior to brake release. Release the brakes and accelerate. Liftoff at 69 KlAS and accelerate to 72 KIAS at 50- Ft Height.
"
m

m
:;Ie

an
EXAMPLE

de *
-4

r O *un
GIVEN: Gross Weight 3140 LBS
OutSide Air Temperature 20 DEG C
Z"
0;=

w off
9

ne ic
Pressure Altitude 1100 FT
Wind Component 10 KTS {HEADWIND} :I:

rs ial
~

G co
Z

ro p
Distance To 50-Ft Height

oo
FIND: o

up y*
Fig. 5-11 2480 FT O::J

20 *
13
~

Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
::0

d
(1) ....
<1 IJl


00' ~ NOTES: 1. lAS assumes zero instrument error.
(1) (1)
2. * For short, dry grass runways, increase the takeoff distance by
P.-P.- 3. Mixture setting should be set according to the existing pressure altitude and outside air temperature: Below 5000 feet, FULL (")
r;.,
r;., ....
>00
RICH. 5000 feet to 8000 feet; LEAN for smooth engine operation, as required. Above 8000 feet; LEAN for best power mixture ~::o
'O~
(peak EGT then enrich 100 DEG. F.). These altitudes should be reduced approximately 2000 feet for outside air temperature
o ~R
~~
::1, I
.....
of ISA +20 C.
........
<C><C>
....
-l-l
.... tx:lr'
-l0) "",::Or'
:0 .....
en NOR,\t1AL TOTAL TAKEOFF DISTANCE .. ():::o

I
l>
A m ""'00
::, c (10 DEG FLAPS) .;o.;S:C1
n ro
u Q.
~~
:l, DRY, LEVEL, PAVED* ImNWAYS TAKEOFF GHOSS WEIGHT 3140 LB
....
"0:>
:>j St"'
~;S: trlt"'
::l
i'< '"
:::0
~.- 12,000 SCHEDULED LIFTOFF SPEED: 69 KIAS
.12,000
--:I
<D
SCHEDULED OBSTACLE HEIGHT SPEED: 72 KIAS I
~O) ~:
~
~1,,11/
-..'I

C
11 ,000 . -j 11,000

op
yr
/'/'

ig
.. 1.

ht
10,000 -110,000

C
om
m
9000 9000

an
0

de *
t Eo<
j:.t.,
,.,m
."

r O *un
8000 8000
l (

w off
}:I-

ne ic
-I
w

rs ial
W
U
7000 7000 U Z."
z

G co
~ G)i=

ro p
-
Eo< Eo< 0

up y*
tf.l tf.l :I:
}:I--:!
Cl 6000 Q

20 *
6000 Z~
~

13
~
0 "'"'0"" 0

Al
W w c:J

lR
~Eo<
5000 5000 ~ 0

ig
Eo< 0

ht
...:l ...:l A

s
4000 <

R
4000
~
[-;

es
0

er
Eo< [-;

ve
3000 3000

d
2000 2000

1 00 a 1-.+.. +..... 1000 L ::t1

Ig
'TIm
o LI_'~ __L -____ ~ ____ ~ ____L -____ ~~ __ ~ ____ ~ ____ ~ ____ ~ ____ ~ ________________-L____- L____ ~ ____ ~

-~ -4u -30 -20 -10 o 10 20 30 40 50 0 to 20 30


0 ~>-l 15
U1
I OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE -..... DEG C WIND COMPONENT -..... KT ()Z
~O
~
-:I Figure 511, trl<
<)1
I TAKEOFF GROUND ROLL DISTANCE, SHORT FiElD (WING flAPS 20 DEG)
N
trJtrJ
"t1 IJl
CO
::on
":1>-1
0-

~~
The Short Field Takeoff Ground Roll Distanee with 20 Deg. Flaps is shown in 5-12 for yaryin~~ out.side air ,pn l't' aitilUrie,
and wind speed at a gross weight of 3140 Ills.

11M
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS

Power TAKEOFF (FULL THROTTLE, 2700 RPM)


Wing Flaps
Landing Gear
Cowl Flaps
20 DEG
EXTENDED
OPEN

C
Runway Conditions PAVED*, DRY ,LEVEL

op
Mixture See NOTE 3 below I

yr
ig
ht
C
TECHNIQUE
o

om
"'tJ

m
Obtain Takeoff Power prior to brake release. Release the brakes and accelerate to liftoff at 66 KIAS. m

an
~
l>

de *
EXAMPLE
-I

r O *un
GIVEN: Gross Weight 3140 LB Z"'tJ

w off
Qr=

ne ic
Outside Air Temperature 20 DEG C
:1:8

rs ial
Pressure Altitude 1100 FT
Wind Component 10 KTS HEADWIND

G co
l>v;

ro p
Z

up y*
FIND: Distance to Liftoff Fig. 5-12 1229 FT
0OJ

20 *
o

13
o

Al
"

lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d
::0
(1)
< .....
.... ' til NOTES: 1. lAS assumes zero instrument error.
~ fQ
0-(1)
" 0-
N"
N ....
2. * For short, dry grass runways, increase the ground roll distance by 27n:J at Sea Level linearly increasing to 65% increase at
8000 feet.
3. Mixture setting should be set according to the existing pressure altitude and outside air temperature: Below 5000 feet, FULL RICH,
I n
0::0
>00 5000 feet to 8000 feet; LEAN for smooth engine operation, as required. Above 8000 feet; LEAN for best power mixture (peak EGT, ;S:8
'O;s:
~~
then enrich 100 DEG F.). These altitudes should be reduced approximately 2000 feet for outside air temperatures of ISA! 200C.
2:~
........
(0<0 .... ClM
-.3-.3 .... Mt"'
-.30> ~::Ot"'
::0 .....
(!) Cf>
SIIORT FIELD TAKEOFF GROUND HOLL DISTANCE ::;0::0
::. ~
Cf> (!)
(20 DEG ,..00
E;:O
~~
0.
!l>
0.
......
wOO
DRY,LEVEL,PAVED* RUNWAYS TAKEOFF GROSS WEIGHT ~ 3140 LE
ZM
w:? t:Jt"'
Mt"'
~iii'
'1;'< ::0
~ .....
.... co
..... - l
<DO>
-'l
-'l

C
op
5000 I 1 5000

yr
I SCHEDULED LIFTOFF SPEED 66 KIAS

ig
NOTES 1. KIAS ASSUMES ZERO INSTRUMENT ER ROR.

ht
ill
2. FOR TAKEOFF ON DRY, GRASS SURFACES, z

C
INCREASE THE GROUND ROLL DISTANCE ::; .. -.Q/

om
BY 27% AT SEA LEVEL LINEARLY INCREASING w <2"
~ ~I

m
TO 65% AT 8000 FT
w ::::'
,,"Ij

an
' ,
c:
4000 ~.+. --4 4000
W
""., ,.'!"'''''- '" ..'~~.--'!'.' .~._ ... _'~'''''N''''~'''

de *
LL
W
-0

r O *un
0:
m
t: ~

w off
E-<

ne ic
Ii<
( -!

rs ial
( Z-o

G co
~
Qi=

ro p
u 3000 3000 ~
z

up y*
u J:O
< Z ~

20 *
E-< <
r:t:J ZVI

13
f:-!
S [f)
..... C

Al
..:.l Q
til

lR
..:.l ..:.l
g ..:.l 0

ig
2000 2000 @ 0

ht
Cl A

s
5 Cl

R
Z
g

es
... ~;- :::J
_.-....-... ,---. ......... """"""- 0

er
c.:; 0::

ve
C)

d
1000 ~~t~-+--S.L~: 1000

"0
M
o I' \., ' I 10 ::0
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 0 10 20 30 "'ir:t:J
o
::O(j
tTl
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE ""-' DEG C WIND COMPONENT ""-' KT
~j
01 zO
I
W
(jZ
CO Figure 512. M<
<J1
I
W
TOTAL TAKEOFF DISTANCE, SHORT FIELD (WING FLAPS 20 DEG) ITJITJ
"j CIl
<::> ::0 0
>Tj>-l
The Takeoff Distances to 50- Ft Height with 20 Degree are shown in Figure 5-13 for varying Outbide Air Temperature, Pressure
Altitude, and Wind Speed at a Gross Weight of 3140 Ibs.
~;,
00

z
0
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS ITJ

Power TAKEOFF (FULL THROTTLE, 2700 RPM)


Wing Flaps
Landing Gear
Cowl Flaps
20 DEG
EXTENDED
OPEN

C
Hunway Condition PAVED*, DHY,LEVEL
I

op
Mixture See NOTE 3 below

yr
ig
ht
TECHNIQUF

C
"o

om
Obtain takeoff power prior to brake release. Helease the brakes and accelerate. Liftoff at 66 KIAS and accelerate to 69 KIAS at 50- Ft
m

m
:::IC

an
EXAMPLE

de *
-!
Gross Weight 3140 LBS

r O *un
GIVEN:
Outside Air Temperature 20 DEG C z"

w off
Pressure Altitude 1100 FT G>;::

ne ic
Wind Component 10 KTS (HEADWIND) 9

rs ial
:I:
v;

G co
Z

ro p
FIND: Distance to 50- Ft Height

o o

up y*
Fig. 5-13 2200 IT
D:J

20 *
13
o

Al
"

lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
::t1

d
ro
<
_. 00-
NOTES: 1. lAS assumes zero instrument error.
g; l!!
Q.11)
Q.
N
N .....
>0:>
2. * For short, dry grass runways, increase the takeoff distance by 16%.
3. Mixture setting should be set according to the existing pressure altitude and outside air temperature: Below 5000 feet, FULL ruCH .
5000 feet to 8000 feet: LEAN for smooth engine operation, as required. Above 8000 feet: LEAN for best power mixture (peak
()
0::0
O~
EGT, then enrich 100 Deg. F.). These altitudes should be reduced approximately :WOO feet for outside air temperatures of ~R
;;~ ISA +200C. ~~
......... z::E
<.D<.D ..... tJITJ
-l...:J ..... ITJt:""'
-l m ,p.::ot:""'
::0 ..... SHORT FIELD TOTAL TAKEOFF DISTANCE
ro (fJ :::::0::0
::. ro~
(fJ
DEG ~~g
~~
roO-
DRY, LEVEL, PA VED* RUN\VA YS
.. ....
0-

~ro
TAKEOFF GROSS WEIGHT - 3140 LB
ZttJ
N~ ooo~~-.~~~~~~~~~~--------.-:------------------------------.----,---------~ 12,000 t,lt"'
>ro> ttJt"'

-.........
~'<
-<0
-:] I-.. ~l
SCHEDULED 50FT HEIGHT SPEED: 69 KIAS
NOTES: 1. KIAS ASSUMES ZERO INSTRUMENT ERROR.
2. FOR TAKEOFF ON DRY, GRASS RUNWAYS,
UJ
z
.~I I
11 ,000
::0

<om
-:] INCREASE THE TAKEOFF DISTANCE BY 16%.
-.J

C
op
10 ,000 j.:-;.. ; ....... ; ........ " ..,,i .. .. " ..",,,,i..... 10,000

yr
ig
ht
C
9000 1-....... ;..,; ..;...-l;~ ....-+--;,' . , . . . .., . 9000

om
E-< f:-<

m
~ ~

an
1 8000 I--:~ ...."""+"."-":'-"'-+:"'..."";'....--+-.. "",;" ..,..;, ... ,.... ,.. ;. . . / 8000
? o

de *
."

r O *un
Iil Iil m
U :;IC
U

w off
Z 7000 1--+._-+._,.. ". ,+....., ... + . . ; . Z >

ne ic
7000
~
-0:: -f

rs ial
f:-<
u:l Z."

G co
i5 i5 G)-

ro p
f>,. 6000 1--+-.... ; .....+......;.......... +..... ,.. "Hi'; f3000
r-
~
O

up y*
~ ~ ::t:
o 0 >~

20 *
Iil Iil ZV'l

13
~ 5000 ~-,~.,-'''' ...,.'''';........,+-....., v-;.+,.,.r.;.;.; ... ; ~
~
5000 -0:: o

Al
f:-< CD
o

lR
...:l ...:l
g -0::
o

ig
4000 F--F+.;.....~- .. ".:..--+-"'.,~ .......;... ~.. . 4000 f:-<

ht
0 A

s
E-< f:-<

R
es
3000 3000

er
ve
d
2000 I-:...t.. -:~~" .. ,,:,-..:.t;" 2UUV~ 2000

1000., 1000
"tI
ttJ
o '" )'" a ::0
o "x:1cn
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 10 20 30 40 50 a 10 20 30 OM

<.1l
I
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE '"'-' DEC C WIND COMPONENT -- KT
~B
zO
(')Z
....
c..>
Figure 5,13, ttJ<!
en en
RATE OF CLIMB, CLEAN CONFIGURATION (SjN 14000 THRU 14149) "d

I
I
W MM
t.:> ::dO
l-rj>-j

The Rate of Climb for the Clean Configuration is shown in Figure 5-14 for varying outside all' temperature, pressure altitude, and ai rpiane @O
~z
weight. A table of Scheduled Climb Speeds versus Pressure Altitude is presented on the chart. :;,.<
z
o
M
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS

Power MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS


Wing Flaps o DEG
Landing Gear RETRACTED


Cowl Flaps FULL OPEN

C
op
Mixture See NOTE 3 below

yr
ig
TECHNIQUE

ht
C
Establish the airplane in a steady climb at the scheduled climb speed and obtain maximum continuous power. Follow the climb speed versus
o

om
.
pressure altitude table as the climb progresses.
"0

m
m

an
EXAMPLE A :;'IC

de *
l>
~

r O *un
GIVEN: Airplane Weight 3140 LB
Outside Air Temperature 20 DEG C Z"O

w off
G);::

ne ic
Pressure Altitude 1100 FT
J:2

rs ial
Rate of Climb, 5-14 950 IT/MIN

G co
FIND: l>V;

ro p
Scheduled Climb Speed, Fig. 5-14 90 KIAS z

up y*
EXAMPLE B
o

20 *
o:J
o

13
GIVEN: Airplane Weight 2900 LB o

Al
Rate of Climb 100 FT/MIN
'"

lR
Outside Air Temperature ISA (-15 DEG C)

ig
ht
FIND: Service Ceiling, Fig. 5-14 15,800 FT

s
R
es
er
ve
d
::d
m ....
<
...... '"
m NOTES: 1. lAS assumes zero instrument error .
rJl J::
m m 2. The rate of climb is a true tapeline rate obtained in smooth air and aJlowance must be made for actual conditions which may
?-c. differ.
~
o
t.:> .... 3. Mixture setting should be set according to the existing pressure altitude and outside air temperature: Below 5000 feet, FULL O::d
> (X)
RICH. 5000 feet to 8000 feet; LEAN for smooth engine operation, as required. Above 8000 feet; LEAN for best power mixture ~O
'O~ ~o
~~ (peak EGT, then enrich 100 . F.). These altitudes should be reduced approximately 2000 feet for outside air temperatures 1Z~
.... ....
(0(0
of ISA +20 o C .
... t:1~
.... t'1t"'
-J -.l
-.l 0> ~::dt"'
::c- RATE OF CLIMB, CLEAN CONFIGURATION (SiN 14000 THRU 14149) >-'0::0
(1)
<!
(Jl
~ >-'0?5
..,.~
0;'
~~
(1)
(1)0- 1900 KIAS ASSUMES ZERO INSTRUMENT ERROR 1900
0.
SCHEDULED CLIMB SPEEDS
>- '
Ztx1
""""CO.... 1800 PRESSURE: CLIMB 1800 tit"'
ALTITUDE SPEEDS tx1t"'
>-~ "'"' FT ""-'KIAS ::0
"0 I>l
;.;'<
::;t-ot
>-'-:t
<0

::50':>
1600
Sea Level
2000
4000
6000
91
90
89
88
,. ~1 "'1" '1";'~"T"""'" ;::/'-t 1600

C
-:t 8000 86

op
85
84

yr
1400 14,000 82 t'5 ~t,:~ "'1' '.....~.:' ';"',- ... ,.... ,-.~ 1400

ig
81

ht
C
om
1-"""'+-""" t--- . ,,-11200


1200 ~";-.,..--t.,.,

m
an
0

de *
'"'tl
~
Z m

r O *un
1000 1000 s;1 ;:10

w off
"'- "'- l>
t t

ne ic
-I

rs ial
Z'"'tl
l ?

G co
800 800 G'>r=

ro p
IO

up y*
(:Q >Xl
;:g ~ l>-:!
.....

20 *
...:I
600 600 :3 ZVI

13
U U
r... Ii; 0

Al
0 0 OJ

lR
I:l "-l 0

ig
E-< 400 400 E-<
-< 0

ht
~ 0:: A

s
R
es
er
200 200

ve
d
fl

0 0

- 200 I--_"'_"_'_+_'_"'_'.:I+"""'+"'~OO .''''-.''.~,,''. -200 'ti


tx1
::c
"1w
OM
-400 I ' I J.....r:: I -400 ::Co
~>-j
-40 -30 -20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 3100 3000 2900 2800 2700 21;00 >-5
tJ'1
I
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE .-..." DEG C AIRPLANE WEIGHT ,-.."., LB ;SZ
t..)
t..) Figure 5-14, M<!
U1
I RATE OF CLIMB, CLEAN CONFIGURATION (SIN 14150 AND SUBS) '1jUl
tTl tTl
W
::o()
""" "rj....:.l
0 ......
The Rate of Climb for the Clean Configuration is shown in Figure 5-15 for varying outside air temperature, pressure altitude, and airplane ::00
~z
weight. A table of Scheduled Best Rate of Climb Speeds versus Pressure Altitude is presented on the chart.
~<
(')

ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS tr1

Power MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS


Wing Flaps o DEG
Landing Gear RETRACTED
Cowl Flaps FULL OPEN

C
op
Mixture See NOTE 3 below

yr
ig
TECHNIQUE

ht
C
Establish the airplane in a steady climb at the scheduled climb speed and obtain maximum continuous power. Follow the climb versus
o

om
pressure altitude table as the climb progresses. '"tJ

m
m

an
EXAMPLE A :;a
>

de *
-t

r O *un
GIVEN: Airplane Weight 3140 LB
Outside Air Temperature 20 DEG C Z'"tJ

w off
(i)i=

ne ic
Pressure Altitude 1100 FT
:z:8

rs ial
G co
FIND: Rate of Climb, Fig. 5-15 980 FT/MIN >v;

ro p
Scheduled Climb Speed, Fig. 5-15 90 KIAS Z

up y*
o

20 *
EXAMPLE B tJ:J
o

13
GIVEN: Airplane Weight 2900 LB o

Al
~
Rate of Climb 100 FT/MIN

lR
Outside Air Temperature ISA (-19.5 DEG C)

ig
ht
s
FIND: Service Ceiling, Fig. 5-15 17,200 FT

R
es
er
ve
d
tI
.o .....
~. til
NOTES: 1. IAS assumes zero instrument error.
g~ 2. The rate of climb is a true tapeline rate obtained in smooth air and allowance must be made for actual conditions which may differ.
:l.1t>
'"' 0... 3. Mixture setting should be: Below 5000 feet; FULL RICH. 5000 feet to 8000 feet; LEAN for smooth engine operation, as required. ()
"' ..... Above 8000 feet; LEAN for best power mixture (peak EGT, then enrich 100 F .). 0::0
, ::::
1>0:>
::::R
~~
~

:0<:0
..... ~~
~tr1
..:1-'3 ...... tr11:"'
..:10> :::::01:"'
;:0 ...... RATE OF CLIMB, CLEAN CONFIGUHATION (SiN 14150 AND SUBSEQUENT) ..... n;:o
ro tfJ .... 00
:::. lQ "'~n
tfJ ro
ro
0. .0.
......
1900 . tN()T!=' KlllC;"'<;<:IIM!=<:7I'R()iN<:TRliM!=NT!=I'HI()R

1800 I-- ..~.. - ...;.............. ..... ,.................+.


I i.j.l 1900
~~
r-;,CO
r-;, PRESSURE I
SCHEDULED CLIMB SPEEDS
CLIMB 1800
ZM
vI:"'
>~ MI:"'
Al TITUDE SPEEDS
-...., FT -....,KIAS ::0
'0 '"
"1'< SEA LEVEL 91
..........
.... <0 2000 90
.... -J
16 00 I-....;.-~i---.---++--+----;..-~j~ 4000 89 1600
wO:> 6000 88
-J
-J 8000 86
10.000 85

C
12.000 84

op
1400 14,000 82 1400

yr
16,000 81

ig
18.000 80

ht
C
1200 I:-~---+-----t-~-,-~--+~---+---t--,",-+-~--,,----t---., ...._..+-_. . -t--H.."'";+-~--+ " .--.;.~.-.; ...~;-... +. .., -..I 1200

om
m
0

an
2:i -c
~

de *
,
~ 1000 1000 m

r O *un
'.~
;:0
E-<
~
t

w off
-1

ne ic
l Z-c

rs ial
~
800 800 l G'>r=

G co
~

ro p
iIl J:O
::E

up y*
...:l
u ...... -:!
600 600 ....::I ZVl

20 *
~ u
0

13
0 ~
>il 0 to

Al
E-< >il 0

lR
~ 400 400 E-<
< 0

ig
p::; A

ht
s
R
es
200 200

er
ve
d
or- $:::J . j. V-'-" , =r--r ~ :.::J '. i :=:::::t= ~ T:::::::tt::::1 --< i. :::;:;::>".........-; I0

-200~~=~~=:~~~:~~4~~1.-~-f==+~~~d~L~.....+~: ..+.. ;f--... l~-~t--t-J-~: .. --t. :: . l:::T~~~-r -200 "d


M
;:0
"1(fl
OM
-400 I I I 400
~j
. I ''''''''''-- I
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 3100 3000 2900 2800 2700 2600
<:.n OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE ........... DEG C AIRPLANE WEIGHT -...., LB zO
I
<..>
nZ
<:.n Figure 515. M<!
c.;l
W
I TIME, DISTANCE AND FUEl REQUIRED IN CLIMB (SIN 14000 THRU 14149)
'1:l UJ
trltrl
0> ::on
..,,>-3
The Time, Distance and Fuel Required in Climb for the clean configuration is shown in Figure 5-16 for varying outside air temperature and @o
pressure altitude at 3140 Lb takeoff gross weight. A table of Scheduled Best Rate of Climb Speeds versus Pressure Altitude is presented on
the chart.
I ><
z
~z

n
trl

ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS

Power MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS


Wing Flaps o DEG
Landing Gear RETRACTED

C
Cowl Flaps FULL OPEN

op
Mixture See NOTE 2 below

yr
ig
ht
TECHNIQUE

C
o

om
Establish the airplane in a steady climb at the scheduled climb speed and obtain maximum continuous power. Follow the climb speed schedule
";;cm

m
versus pressure altitude table as the climb progresses.

an
>

de *
EXAMPLE -t

r O *un
GIVEN: Takeoff Gross Weight 3140 LB
J:g Z"

w off
Q r

ne ic
Outside Air Temperature 20 DEG C At Takeoff Altitude

rs ial
5 DEG C At Final Altitude
Takeoff Altitude 1100 FT >tn

G co
ro p
Final Altitude 5000 IT Z

up y*
C
FIND: The total time, distance and fuel to climb from 1100 FT to 5000 FT from Fig. 5-16.
oo o:J

20 *
13
FINAL ALTITUDE

'"
INITIAL ALTITUDE NET

Al
Time 6.0 MIN minus 1.0 MIN equals 5.0 MIN

lR
Distance 9.0 NAM minus 2.0 NAM equals 7.0 NAM

ig
Fuel 1.8 U .S.Gal minus 0.4 U .S.Gal equals 1.4 U.S.Gal (8.4 LB)

ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d
::0
ro .....
< en NOTES: 1. lAS assumes zero instrument error.
00' ~
ro (1) 2. Mixture setting should be set according to the existing pressure altitude and outside air temperature: Below 5000 feet, FULL
Po-o. RICH. 5000 feet to 8000 feet; LEAN for smooth engine operation, as required. Above 8000 feet; LEAN for best power mixture
t-=> n
""' .....
>00
(peak EGT, then enrich 100 Deg. F.). These altitudes should be reduced approximately 2000 feet for outside air temperatures
of ISA +20 o C.
0::0
~R
~

~~
o
~~
.......... .....
CO CO ..... trlt"'
--l --l
--l C]) ~::ot"'
TIl\1E, DISTANCE, AND FUEL HEQUIRED IN CLIMB (S/N 14000 TIIHU 14H9) ~('}::O

TAKEOFF GROSS WEIGHT" 3140 LB


~~?S
~~
Ztrl
t;)t"'
NSTRUMENT ERROR trlt"'
::0

"Sea Levol
2000
4000

C
op
6000
8000

yr
10,000

ig
12,000

ht
14,000
16,000

C
om
m
an
o

de *
"'tJ

r O *un
m
;:IIC

w off
>

ne ic
~

rs ial
Z"'tJ

G co
G)i=

ro p
J:O

up y*
>-:!

20 *
ZVl

13
o

Al
'"oo

lR
ig
ht
"

s
R
es
er
ve
d
I oI
I I 1
t I

,I
10

I I
20 -<"':\..

I
30
TIML :?j CLIMB "-' MIN
b- S>s. I .1
40

; I, ,.
50

J I
60

1""1 'luc ~
u.;:1'1: I
o
II
t 10
J, I
20
1
30 DIsri~CE I:-C:LIMB ~ NM 70
I
I I I I:
80
I . ill
90 100 "0
trl
::0
'"'1rn
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Otrl
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE "-' DEG C FUEL USED IN CLIMB '"'-' US GAL. ~Q
>-
C)1 zO
I ('}Z
~
-l Figure 5-16. trl<
U1
I
W
TIME, DISTANCE AND FUEl REQUIRED IN CLIMB (SIN 14150 AND SUBS) "ClUJ
co MM
~(')
d~
~@
The Time, Distance and Fuel Hequired in Climb for the clean configuration is shown in Fif'.ure 5-17 for varying outside air temperature ,md
pressure altitude at 3140 Lb. takeoff gross weight. A table of Scheduled Best Rate of Climb Speeds versus Pressure Altitude is presented on
the chart. ><
Z
(')
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS M

Power MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS


Wing Flaps o DEG
Landing Gear RETRACTED
Cowl Flaps FULL OPEN

C
Mixture See NOTE 2 below

op
yr
TECHNIQUE

ig
ht
C
Establish the airplane in a steady climb at the scheduled climb speed and obtain maximum continuous power. Follow the climb speed
o"tJ

om
schedule versus pressure altitude table as the climb progresses.

m
m

an
EXAMPLE ;Ie

de *
.....

r O *un
GIVEN: Takeoff Gross Weight 3140 LB
Outside Air Temperature 20 DEG C At Takeoff Altitude z"

w off
Or::

ne ic
5 DEG C At Final Altitude
:t8

rs ial
Takeoff Altitude 1100 IT
Final Altitude 5000 FT

G co
V;
z

ro p
up y*
FIND: The total time, distance and fuel to climb from 1100 Ft to 5000 Ft from Figure 5-17. o

20 *
O:J
FINAL ALTITUDE o

13
INITIAL ALTITUDE NET
Time 5.5 MIN minus 1.2 MIN equals 4.3 MIN o

Al
Distance 9.0 NAM minus 2.0 NAM equals 7.0 NAM
"

lR
Fuel 1. 8 U .S.Gal minus 0.4 U .S.Gal equals 1 .4 U. S. Gal (8.4 LB)

ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d
!:1:1
(I)
< t-1
..... O'l NOTES: 1. IAS assumes zero instrument error.
1 l!!
Q.,('l) 2. Mixture setting should be: Below 5000 feet; FULL RICH. 5000 feet to 8000 feet; LEAN for smooth engine operation, as required.
.. Q.,
N"
Above 8000 feet; LEAN for best power mixture (peak EGT, then enrich 100 Deg. F.) . (')
N ......
O~
>0:>
'Oii:
~~
..........
~R
Z~
<:0<:0 t)M
-l -l ...... Mt""
-l m ~!:I:1t""
.....
(fJ TIME, DISTANCE AND FUEL REQUIRED IN CLIMB (SiN 14150 &.: ....()~

........ 00
(fJ
c TAKEOFF GROSS WEIGHT 3140LB ~(]
/l)

~~
0.

....
co at"
~ t>jt"
!>l ~

'<0
'<
..... SPEED
'-:) '"'-' KIAS
'en
I Sea Level 91
2000

C
I 90

op
4000 89
6000 88

yr
8000 86

ig
10,000 85

ht
12,000 84
82

C
14,000

om
16,000 81

m
an
o"tJ

de *
r O *un
m
'"l>

w off
ne ic
-t

rs ial
Z"tJ

G co
G'li=

ro p
:r:2

up y*
20 *
l>v;

13
Z
C

Al
'"oo

lR
ig
ht
"

s
R
es
er
ve
d
oI I 10 20 30 40 50 60
I It. .tl' , TIME, ~N CLIMB "'-' ,~IN ; I I 1
4 oI 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 'tj
trl
I t
- 60 -40
I I 1
-20 o
1; I
20 40 60
I"
o
i
,
I
2
I
3
I
4
I
5
DISTANCE IN CLIMB '"'-' NM
I
6 7
I
8
,
9
I I
10
I, I
11 12
d
13 14
,
15
~
'"rjCfJ
Otrl
~()
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE "'-' DEG C FUEL USED IN CLIMB "'-' U ,S.GAL ~j
01 zO
W
I
oz
to Figure 5-17. trl~
U1
CRUISE POWER SETTING TABLES "tlW

I
t
,!:>. tr!tr!
o ::r,ln
'"'1>-3
The following tables are based on Lycoming 10- 540-T4A5D or 10- 540-T4I35D engine charts. @O
S;Z
TECHNIQUE
:r--<
Z

To obtain the desired percent power, set manifold pressure and fuel flow for desired engine speed at tl1e appropriate pressure altitude
and outside air temperature.
IQ
EXAMPLE

GIVEN: Percent Power 55 PERCENT

C
Engine Speed 2300 RPM

op
Pressure Altitude 6000 FT

I
yr
ig
Outside Air Temperature 5.0 DEG C

ht
C
FIND; Manifold Pressure, Fig. 5-21 19.6 IN .HG.
o-a

om
Fuel Flow, Fig. 5-21 11.2 U.S. GAL/HR

m
m
;:III:J

an

de *
-f

r O *un
Z-a

w off
Cili=

ne ic
:1:2

rs ial
Vi

G co
Z

ro p
up y*
C
'"o

20 *
13
o

Al
"

lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d
....
CIl

I
~ NOTES: 1. Fuel flows are presented for BEST ECONOMY; if BEST POWER mixture is selected, the fuel flow will increase 14%. BEST
(!>
c- POWER mixture can be obtained by following the procedure described on Page 1-6, "Power Terminology", GENERAL Section.
, 2. Normal interpolation techniques can be used to determine fuel flow and manifold pressure data for non-tabulated values of n
, .... altitude, OAT, % BHP and RPM. O::r,l
co s=o
~ ~n
@~
.lIl
':
.....
, <0
I "'I ::::tr!t-'
1m ,!:>.::r,lt-'
0 ......
) U)
,....n;:o
; ~ ::;::00
n <D ~n

~~
) 0-
1.
. ..... ZM
"co SEA LEVEL PRESSUHE ALTITUDE tJL'
,,~
;;.- ML'
~~ ;:0
.......
j

-to OUTSIDE AIR TEMPEHATURE "'-' DEG C I


~-.l
:)0">
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 I
.J RPM 10 BHP MP FF MP FF MP FF NIP FF MP FF :VIP FF MP FF MP FF :vIP FF MP VI' I
.J

C
op
2500 75 21.2 14.3 21.9 14.3 22.5 14.3 23.2 14.3 23.9 14.3 24.5 14.3 25.1 14.3 25.8 14 3 .4 14.3 27.1 14.3 I

yr
ig
65 19.2 12.9 19.7 12.9 20.3 12.9 20.9 12.9 21.4 12.9 22.0 12.9 22.5 12.9 23.1 12.9 23.7 12.9 24.3 12.9

ht
C
55 17.1 11.6 17.6 11.6 18.0 11.6 18.5 11.6 19.0 11.6 19.5 11.6 20.0 11.6 20.5 11.6 20.9 1l.G 21.4 11.6

om
m
45 14.9 10.3 15.4 10.3 15.8 10.3 16.2 10.3 16.6 10.3 17.0 10.3 17.4 10.3 17.8 10.3 18.1 10.3 18.6 10.3

an
o

de *
-c
2400 75 21. 9 14.0 22.6 14.0 23.3 14.0 23.9 14.0 24.6 14.0 25.3 14.0 25.9 14.0 26.6 14.0 27.3 14.0 28.0 14.0 m

r O *un
:;:t:1

w off
65 19.8 12.6 20.4 12.6 21.0 12.6 21.6 12.6 22.2 12.6 22.7 12.6 23.3 12.6 23.9 12.6 24.5 12.6 25.0 12.6 l>

ne ic
-4

rs ial
55 17.6 11.4 18.1 11.4 18.6 11.4 19.2 11.4 19.7 11.4 20.2 11.4 20.7 11.4 21.1 11.4 21.6 11.4 22.1 11 .4 Z-c

G co
G)r=

ro p
45 15.5 10.1 15.9 10.1 16.3 10.1 16.7 10.1 17.1 10.1 17.5 10.1 17.9 10.1 18.3 10.1 18.8 10.1 19.2 10.1 Ig

up y*
l>V;

20 *
2300 65 20.6 12.4 21.2 12.4 21.8 12.4 22.5 12.4 23.1 12.4 23.7 12.4 24.3 12.4 24.8 12.4 25.4 12.4 2G.0 12.4 Z

13
o

Al
55 18.4 11.2 18.9 11.2 19.4 11.2 19.9 11.2 20.5 11.2 21.0 11. 2 21. 5 11.2 22.0 11.2 22.5 11.2 23.0 11.2 o:J
o

lR
o

ig
45 16.2 9.9 16.6 9.9 17.0 9.9 17.5 9.9 17.9 9.9 18.3 9.9 18.7 9.9 19.1 9.9 19.6 9.9 20.0 9.9

ht
"

s
2200 55 19.2 10.9 19.7 10.9 20.3 10.9 20.8 10.9 21.3 10.9 21.9 10.9 22.4 10.9 22.9 10.9 23.4 10.9 23.9 10.9

R
es
er
45 16.9 9.7 17.3 9.7 17.7 9.7 18.2 9.7 18.6 9.7 19.0 9.7 19.5 9.7 19.9 9.7 20.4 9.7 20.8 9.7

ve
d
NOTES: 1. Manifold Pressure (MP) "'-' IN.HG.
2. Fuel Flow (FF) ......... U.S.GAL/Hr.
"0
3. Fuel flows are presented for BEST ECONOMY. If BEST POWER mixture is selected the fuel flow will increase 14! M
BEST POWER mixture can be obtained by following the procedure described on page 6, "Power ;:0
"!jUl
GENERAL Section. OtTj
~~
CJ1
1
1Z6
nZ
....
.;>.
Figure 518 . M<
<.J1
I ;::n::u
.l:>. .l:>.OO
I\:)
~n
~::>'i
2000 r~EET PRESSURE ALTITUDE ~~
Cir
Mr
::0

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPEHATURE ......... DEC C


-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
RPM (Jb DrIP MP FF MP FF MP FF MP F1" MP FF MP FF MP 1"1" MP FF MP FF MP f'f'

2500 75 21.0 14.3 21.6 14.3 22.3 14.3 22.9 14.3 23.6 14.3 24.3 14.3 24.9 14. '25.6 14.3 - - - -

C
65 18.9 12.9 19.5 12.9 20.0 12.9 20.6 12.9 21.1 12.9 21.7 12.9 22.3 12.9 22.9 12.9 23.4 12.9 24.0 12.9

op
yr
16.8 11.6 17.3 11.6 17.7 11.6 18.2 11.6 18.7 11.6 19.2 11.6 19.7 11. 6 20.2 11.6 20.7 11.6 21.1 11.6

ig
55

ht
o

C
45 14.6 10.3 15.1 10.3 15.4 10.3 15.8 10.3 16.3 10.3 16.7 10.3 17.1 10.3 17.5 10.3 17.9 10.3 18.3 10.3

om
."
m
- - - -

m
2400 75 21.6 14.0 22.3 14.0 23.0 14.0 23.7 14.0 24.4 14.0 25.0 14.0 25.7 14.0 26.6 14.0 ~

an

de *
65 19.5 12.6 20.1 12.6 20.7 12.6 21.3 12.6 21.8 12.6 22.4 12.6 23.0 12.6 23.6 12.6 24.2 12.6 24.8 12.6 -I

r O *un
Z."
55 17.3 11.4 17.8 11.4 18.3 11.4 18.8 11.4 19.4 11.4 19.9 11.4 20.4 11.4 20.8 11.4 21.3 11.4 21.8 11.4 G)i=

w off
2

ne ic
:x:

rs ial
45 15.2 10.1 15.6 10.1 16.0 10.1 16.4 10.1 16.8 10.1 17.2 10.1 17.6 10.1 18.0 10.1 18.5 10.1 18.9 10.1
>v;

G co
z

ro p
2300 65 20.3 12.4 20.9 12.4 21.5 12.4 22.1 12.4 22.8 12.4 23.4 12.4 24.0 12.4 24.6 12.4 25.1 12.4 25.7 12.4 o

up y*
O:J
o

20 *
55 18.1 11.2 18.6 11.2 19.1 11.2 19.6 11.2 20.2 11.2 20.7 11.2 21.2 11.2 21.7 11.2 22.2 11.2 22.7 11.2
o

13
45 15.8 9.9 16.3 9.9 16.7 9.9 17.1 9.9 17.5 9.9 18.0 9.9 18.4 9.9 18.8 9.9 19.2 9.9 19.7 9.9 ~

Al
lR
2200 55 18.9 10.9 19.4 10.9 19.9 10.9 20.5 10.9 21.0 10.9 21.5 10.9 22.1 10.9 22.6 10.9 23.1 10.9 23.6 10.9

ig
ht
s
45 16.5 9.7 16.9 9.7 17.4 9.7 17.8 9.7 18.3 9.7 18.7 9.7 19.2 9.7 19.6 9.7 20.1 9.7 20.5 9.7

R
"",c,_",',_'"

es
er
NOTES: 1. Manifold Pressure (MP) "'" IN .Hg.

ve
2. Fuel Flow (FF) ""'U.8. GAL/HR.
. .....

d
:, til 3. Fuel flows are presented for BEST ECONOMY. If BEST POWER mixture is selected, the fuel flow will increase 14% .
:f!! BE&'T POWER mixture can be obtained by following the procedure described on page 1-6, "Power Terminology",
"d
" m GENERAL Section.
'Q.
~

~
....... 4. Dashed lines indicate that manifold pressure at those outside air temperatures are either unobtainable, or not autholi zed
M
::u
'TjCIJ
,.co because of manifold pressure/RPM limitations. OM
!~
~~ ~~
~..... ~O
:>e:>
.J-J
n'2:
.J0'l Figure 5-19 M<
J ..... '"d"Cll
til
MM
.~
(1)
~()
0. '"':1::l
..... 00
,0::> 4000 FEET PRESSURE ALTITUDE ~Z
'~ H<:
'po
'<
5;
()
..... M
'<0
.-l OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE......., DEG C
0:.
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
% BHP

C
RPM MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF

op
-

yr
2500 75 20.7 14.3 21.4 14.3 22.0 14.3 22.7 14.3 23.4 14.3 24.0 14.3 - - - - - -

ig
ht
65 18.6 12.9 19.2 12.9 19.8 12.9 20.4 12.9 20.9 12.9 21.5 12.9 22.0 12.9 22.6 12.9 23.2 12.9 23.8 12.9

C
om
55 16.5 11.6 17.0 11.6 17.5 11.6 18.0 11.6 18.5 11.6 19.0 11.6 19.5 11.6 19.9 11.6 20.4 11.6 20.9 11.6

m
an
45 14.4 10.3 14.8 10.3 15.2 10.3 15.6 10.3 16.0 10.3 16.4 10.3 16.8 10.3 17.2 10.3 17.6 10.3 18.0 10.3 o-c

de *
m

r O *un
2400 75 21.4 14.1 22.0 14 .1 22.7 14.1 23.5 14.1 24.1 14.1 - - - - - - - - - ;;0

w off
ne ic
-I
65 19.2 12.6 19.9 12.6 20.4 12.6 21.0 12.6 21.6 12.6 22.2 12.6 22.8 12.6 23.4 12.6 24.0 12.G -

rs ial
Z-c

G co
55 17.1 11.4 17.5 11.4 18.1 11.4 18.6 11.4 19.1 11.4 19.6 11.4 20.1 11.4 20.6 11.4 21.1 11.4 21. 5 11.4 G)i=

ro p
:r:g

up y*
45 14.9 10.1 15.3 10.1 15.7 10.1 16.1 10.1 16.5 10.1 16.9 10.1 17.4 10.1 17.8 10.1 18.2 10.1 18.6 10.1 ~

20 *
Z

13
2300 65 20.0 12.4 20.6 12.4 21.2 12.4 21.8 12.4 22.5 12.4 23.1 12.4 23.8 12.4 24.3 12.4 - - - o

Al
ttl
o

lR
55 17.8 11.2 18.3 11.2 18.8 11.2 19.4 11.2 19.9 11.2 20.4 11.2 20.9 11.2 21.4 11.2 21.9 11.2 22.5 11.2
o,.:::

ig
ht
45 15.5 9.9 16.0 9.9 16.4 9.9 16.8 9.9 17.2 9.9 17.7 9.9 18.1 9.9 18.5 9.9 18.9 9.9 19.4 9.9

s
R
es
2200 55 18.6 10.9 19.1 10.9 19.7 10.9 20.2 10.9 20.7 10.9 21.2 10.9 21.8 10.9 22.3 10.9 22.8 10.9 23.4 10.9

er
ve
45 16.2 9.7 16.6 9.7 17.0 9.7 17 .5 9.7 18.0 9.7 18.4 9.7 18.9 9.7 19.3 9.7 19.8 9.7 20.2 9.7

d
- -

NOTES: 1. Manifold Pressure (MP) -.... IN.Hg.


2. Fuel Flow (FF) -.... U.S.GAL/Hr.
3. Fuel flows are presented for BES'T ECONOMY. If BEST POWER mixture is selected, the fuel flow will increase 14%.
BEST POWER mixture can be obtained by following the procedure described on page 1-6, "Power Terminology",
GENERAL Section.
()
4. Dashed lines indicate that manifold pressure at those outside air temperatures are either unobtainable, or not authorized
0::0
because of manifold pressure/RPM limitations.
~?S

<J1
~~
.... tH'l
..,.
I
.... f:!:ll:""
W Figure 5-20. ..".~I:""
VI
.... o::c
....
I

.... :;;:00
~Q
GOOO FEET PRESSURE ALTITUDE ~~
tJt'
trlt'
::c
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE "-' DEG C
-4( -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
RPM % BHP MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF tv1P FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF
2500 75 20.5 14.3 21.2 14.3 21.8 14.3 22.5 14.3 - - - - - - - - - - - -

C
op
65 18.4 12.9 19.0 12.9 19.6 12.9 20.1 12.9 20.7 12.9 21.3 12.9 21.8 12.9 22.4 12.9 - - - -

yr
ig
55 16.3 11.6 16.8 11.6 17.2 11. 6 17.7 11.6 18.2 11.6 18.7 11.6 19.2 11. 6 19.7 11.6 20.2 11.6 20.7 11.6

ht
C
45 14.1 10.3 14.5 10.3 14.9 10.3 15.3 10.3 15.7 10.3 16.1 10.3 16.5 10.3 16.7 10.3 17.4 10.3 17.8 10.3 o

om
"
m

m
2400 75 20.9 14.0 21.8 14.0 22.5 14.0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

an
;:Q
l>

de *
65 19.0 12.6 19.6 12.6 20.2 12.6 20.8 12.6 21.3 12.6 21.9 12.6 22.5 12.6 - - - - - - -t

r O *un
Z"

w off
55 16.8 11.4 17.3 11.4 17.8 11.4 18.3 11.4 18.9 11.4 19.4 11.4 19.9 11.4 20.3 11.4 20.8 11.4 21.3 11.4 G'>r=

ne ic
9

rs ial
45 14.7 10.1 15.1 10.1 15.5 10.1 15.9 10.1 16.3 10.1 16.7 10.1 17.1 10.1 17.5 10.1 17.9 10.1 18.4 10.1 :I:
l>Vi

G co
z

ro p
2300 65 19.8 12.4 20.4 12.4 21.0 12.4 21.6 12.4 22.2 12.4 - - - - - - - - - -

up y*
o
CJ:J

20 *
55 17.5 11.2 18.0 11.2 18.6 11.2 19.1 11.2 19.6 11.2 20.1 11.2 20.6 11.2 21.1 11.2 21.6 11.2 22.2 11.2 o

13
o

Al
45 15.2 9.9 15.7 9.9 16.1 9.9 16.5 9.9 16.9 9.9 17.4 9.9 17.8 9.9 18.2 9.9 18.7 9.9 19.1 9.9
"

lR
- -

ig
2200 55 18.3 10.9 18.8 10.9 19.4 10.9 20.0 10.9 20.5 10.9 21.0 10.9 21.5 10.9 22.0 10.9 22.6 10.9

ht
s
45 15.8 9.7 16.3 9.7 16.7 9.7 17.2 9.7 17.7 9.7 18.1 9.7 18.6 9.7 19.1 9.7 19.5 9.7 20.0 9.7

R
es
---

er
ve
NOTES: 1. Manifold Pressure (MP) "-' IN .Hg.

d
:1j
1)
2. Fuel Flow (FF) ......" U.S.GAL/Hr.
<:_. ....
til 3. Fuel flows are presented for BEST ECONOMY. If BEST POWER mixture is selected, the fuel flow will increase 14%.
~ ~ BEST POWER mixture can be obtained by following the procedure described on page 1-6, "Power Terminology",
;).('1)
,. 0- GENERAL Section. "d
tx:1
I>.)
I>.) ....
4. Dashed lines indicate that manifold pressure at those outside air temperatures are either unobtainable, or not authorized ::c
I'ljrn
>0:> because of manifold pressure/RPM limitations. Otx:1
o ~
2;~ ~B
........
<:0 <:0
-.'I -.'I
~~
-.'10> Figure 5-21. Q<
.....
{J) "dul
:~
.. (1)
trltrl
~(J
>rj>-1
~ 0 .....
,co
.... BOOO FEET PRESSURE ALTITUDE ~@
';s:: ,...,.<:
I"
'<
g;
(J

<0
.... trl
.-::1
)0'>
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE'""" DEG C
1 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
1
RPM % BHP MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF

C
op
2500 75 20.3 14.3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ... ...

yr
ig
-

ht
65 18.2 12.9 18.8 12.9 19.4 12.9 20.0 12.9 20.5 12.9 - ... - ... ... ... - ... ...

C
om
55 16.0 11.6 16.5 11.6 17.0 11.6 17.5 11.6 18.0 11.6 18.5 11.6 19.0 11.6 19.5 11.6 20.0 11.6 20.5 11.6

m
an
45 13.9 10.3 14.3 10.3 14.7 10.3 15.1 10.3 15.5 10.3 15.9 10.3 16.3 10.3 16.7 10.3 17.2 10.3 17.6 10.3 o

de *
- - - - - "m

r O *un
2400 75 20.9 14.0 - - - - ... - - - - - - - - ;:10

w off
- - -

ne ic
65 18.8 12.6 19.4 12.6 20.0 12.6 20.6 12.6 - - - - - - - ... - -t

rs ial
- z"

G co
55 16.6 11.4 17.1 11.4 17.6 11.4 18.1 11.4 18.6 11.4 19.2 11.4 19.7 11.4 20.2 11.4 20.6 11.4 ...
(j')i=

ro p
:x:g

up y*
45 14.4 10.1 14.8 10.1 15.2 10.1 15.7 10.1 16.1 10.1 16.5 10.1 16.9 10.1 17.3 10.1 17.7 10.1 1B.1 10.1
-

20 *
ZVl
- - - - - - - ... - - - ... ...

13
2300 65 19.6 12.4 20.2 12.4 20.8 12.4 ...
C

Al
D:I
55 17.2 11.2 17.B 11.2 18.3 11.2 18.9 11.2 19.4 11.2 19.9 11.2 20.4 11.2 20.9 11.2 ... ... ... ... o

lR
o

ig
45 15.0 9.9 15.4 9.9 15.9 9.9 16.3 9.9 16.7 9.9 17.1 9.9 17.6 9.9 18.0 9.9 18.4 9.9 18.9

ht
9.9
"

s
R
2200 55 18.0 10.9 18.6 10.9 19.2 10.9 19.7 10.9 20.3 10.9 20.8 10.9 - - - - - ...

es
er
45 15.5 9.7 16.0 9.7 16.5 9.7 17.0 9.7 17.4 9.7 17.9 9.7 18.4 9.7 18.8 9.7 19.3 9.7 11i.B 9.7

ve
d
NOTES: 1. Manifold Pressure (MP) '""" IN .Hg.
2. Fuel Flow (FF) '""" U.S.GAL/Hr.
3. Fuel flows are presented for BEST ECONOMY. If BEST POWER mixture is selected, the fuel flow will increase 14(i'(;.
BEST POWER mixture can be obtained by following the procedure described on page 1-6, "Power Terminology",
GENERAL Section.
(J
4. Dashed lines indicate that manifold pressure at those outside air are either unoblainable, or not authori zed
because of manifold pressure/RPM limitations. ~~
;s::X
U1
t .... ~~
.... t':!t:-
Figure 5-22. ",,~t-'
"'"'
U1
c.n >-oUl
I
trltrl
21; ~()
>:rj~
0-
10,000 FEET PRESSURE ALTITUDE
~~
R
trl
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE"""" DEG C
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 3J 40 "0
RPM fa BHP MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF

2500 65 18.0 12.9 18.6 12.9 19.2 12.9 - - - - - - - - - - - -

C
op
55 15.9 11.6 16.4 11.6 16.9 11.6 17.4 11.6 17.9 11.6 18.4 11.6 18.9 11.6 - - - - -

yr
ig
- -

ht
45 13.7 10.3 14.1 10.3 14.5 10.3 14.9 10.3 15.3 10.3 15.7 10.3 16.1 10.3 16.7 10.3 17.0 10.3

C
o"'C

om
2400 65 18.6 12.6 19.2 12.6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

m
m
- - - -

an
55 16.4 11.4 16.9 11.4 17.4 11.4 17.9 11.4 18.5 11.4 19.0 11.4 - - - - ;:0

de *
-I
- -

r O *un
45 14.2 10.1 14.6 10.1 15.0 10.1 15.5 10.1 15.9 10.1 16.3 10.1 16.7 10.1 17.1 10.1 17.5 10.1
Z"'C

w off
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - G');::

ne ic
2300 65 19.4 12.4
I9

rs ial
55 17.0 11.2 17.6 11.2 18.1 11.2 1$.7 11.2 19,2 11.2 - - - - - - - - - - r.n

G co
ro p
I
Z
- - -

up y*
45 14.7 9.9 15.2 9.9 15.6 9.9 16.1 9.9 16.5 9,9 16.9 9.9 17.3 9,9 17.8 9.9 - C

20 *
c:I
2200 55 17.8 10.9 18.4 10.9 19.0 10.9 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - o

13
o

Al
15.3 9.7 15.8 9.7 16.2 9.7 16.7 9.7 17.2 9.7 17.7 9.7 18.1 9.7 18.6 - - - -
45 9.7
"

lR
-- ~
'------------ '--------

ig
ht
NOTES: 1. Manifold Pressure (MP) ......., IN .Hg.

s
R
2. Fuel Flow (FF) "'"'- U.S. GAL/Hr.

es
3. Fuel flows are presented for BEST ECONOMY. If BEST POWER mixture is selected, the fuel flow will increase 14%.

er
BEST POWER mixture can be obtained by following the procedure described on page 1-6, "Power Terminology",

ve
GENERAL Section.

d
4. Dashed lines indicate that manifold pressure at those outside air temperatures are either unobtainable. or not authorized
, H
:. til because of manifold pressure/ RPM limitations.
:~
~(I)

..
"'0-
",.CO
.....
()
O~

J~
l~
~~
~

OtO
....
':]...:J ..... trlt"'
-l0> Figure 5-23. tI>o~t"'
.....
til :::n::o
.2:1
(I)
>I>-~g
~~
0.

,00
.... 12,000 FEET PRESSURE ALTITUDE Ztrl
tjl:""
'~ trll:""
'I
'< ::0
;~
.-:.1
)0'>
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE """ DEG C !
1 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 j
I

C
I
RPM % BHP MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF

op
yr
2500 55 15.7 11.6 16.2 11.6 16.7 11.6 17.2 11.6 17.7 11.6 - - - - - - - - -

ig
ht
45 13.6 10.3 14.0 10.3 14.4 10.3 14.8 10.3 15.2 10.3 15.6 10.3 16.0 10.3 - - - - -

C
- i

om
2400 55 16.2 11.4 16.7 11.4 17.3 11.4 17.8 11.4 - - - - - - - - - - -

m
an
45 14.0 10.1 14.4 10.1 14.9 10.1 15.3 10.1 15.7 10.1 16.1 10.1 16.5 10.1 - - - - - - o

de *
"'0
m

r O *un
2300 55 16.8 11.2 17.4 11.2 17.9 11.2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iIO

w off
ne ic
45 14.5 9.9 15.0 9.9 15.4 9.9 15.9 9.9 16.3 9.9 16.7 9.9 - - - - - - - - ~

rs ial
Z"'O

G co
2200 55 17.6 10.9 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Q;::

ro p
::t:8

up y*
45 15.1 9.7 15.6 9.7 16.0 9.7 16.5 9.7 17.0 9.7 - - - - - - - - - - V;

20 *
z

13
o

Al
NOTES: 1. Manifold Pressure (MP) """ IN. Hg. C:I
o

lR
2. Fuel Flow (FF) -- U.S. GAL/Hr.
o

ig
3. Fuel flows are presented for BEST ECONOMY. If BEST POWER mixture is selected, the fuel flow will increase 14%.

ht
BEST POWER mixture can be obtained by following the procedure described on page 1-6, "Power Terminology",
"

s
GENERAL Section.

R
es
4. Dashed lines indicate that manifold pressure at those outside air temperatures are either unobtainable, or not authorized

er
because of manifold pressure/RPM limitations.

ve
d
"d
trl
::0
6~
tTl
~B
zO
I
>I>- n Z
-J Figure 5-24. trl<!
<Ji
'dcJ:l
..,.
I
trltrl
00 :D(1
"'1>-3
0 .....
:DO
~~
14,000 FEET PRESSURE ALTITUDE
Z
(1
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE '""" DEG C tx1
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
RPM % BHP MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF

2500 55 15.6 11.6 16.1 11.6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -


- - - - -

C
45 13.4 10.3 13.8 10.3 14.2 10 3 14.6 10.3 15.0 10.3 - - - -

op
yr
2400 55 16.1 11.4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

ig
ht
45 13.8 10.1 14.2 10.1 14.7 10.1 15.1 10.1 - - - - - - - - - - - -

C
o

om
"'C
2300 45 14.4 9.9 14.8 9.9 15.3 9.9 15.7 9.9 - - - - - - - - - - - - ,.,m

m
an
2200 45 14.9 9.7 15.4 9.7 15.8 9.7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
.....

de *
r O *un
Z"'C
Qr=

w off
15,000 FEET PRESSURE ALTITUDE

ne ic
J:g

rs ial
V;

G co
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE ......, DEG C z

ro p
-4( -31 -2( a ,
o

up y*
-l( 1) 2) 30 40 50
RPM % BHP MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF MP FF OJ

20 *
o

13
2500 55 15.5 11.6 16.1 11.6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - o

Al
- "

lR
45 13.4 10.3 13.8 10.3 14.2 10.3 14.6 10.3 - - - - - - - - - - -

ig
I

ht
2400 45 13.7 10.1 14.2 10.1 14.6 10.1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - i

s
R
- - - - - - - - -

es
2300 45 14.3 9.9 14.7 9.9 15.2 9.9 - - - - -

er
- - - -

ve
2200 45 14.8 9.7 15.3 9.7 - - - - - - - - - - - -

d
o
......
D
:. rn
~ ~ NOTES: 1. Manifold Pressure (MP) ......, IN .Hg.
:l.ro
'Q. 2. Fuel Flow (FF) ......, U. S. GAL/Hr. (1
,," 3. Fuel flows are presented for BEST ECONOMY. If BEST POWER mixture is selected, the fuel flow will increase
" ....
1>00 BEST POWER mixture can be obtained by following the procedure described on page 1-6, "Power Terminology",
O:D
~g
:l ~
~~
GENERAL Section. ~~
.........
4. Dashed lines indicate that manifold pressure at those outside air temperatures are either unobtainable, or not authorized
because of manifold pressure/RPM limitations .
z.s
tJtrl
'.0(0 .... trlt'"
~:Dt:""
-.1-:1
-.10') Figure 525.
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION V
114 PERFORMANCE

C
op
y
rig
ht
C
om
m
an
de *

THIS PAGE
r O *un

INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

Issued: 18 May 1976 5-49


~_~_~ _ .. ...l. t)t) ,, ___ .!'1 1""''''
<:l1
I
<:l1
CRUISE TRUE AIRSPEED (SIN 14000 THRU 14149) '"
I ::0(1 Cfl
t<:1t<:1
o
"xj>-1
The Cruise True Airspeed is presented in Fih'Ure 5-26 for outside air tempprature. pressure altitude and puwer at maximum
@o
gross weight of 3140 Lbs. ~~
z
(1
t<:1
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS

Power AS REQUIRED
Wing Flaps o DEG
Landing Gear RETRACTED
Cowl Flaps CLOSED

C
op
yr
TECHNlQUE

ig
ht
After establiShing the desired percentage of power from the power tables presented in this section, trim the airplane in a stabilized condition
I

C
with zero rate of climb.
o

om
."

m
EXAMPLE m

an
:::'C

>

de *
GIVEN: Outside Air Temperature 5 DEG C .....

r O *un
Pressure Altitude 5000 FT
Z."

w off
Power Setting 55 PERCENT (2300 RPM)
G>i=

ne ic
z8
rs ial
FIND: True Airspeed, Fig. 5-26 128KTS (TAS) ::I:

G co
>Vi

ro p
up y*
o

20 *
0:1
o

13
o

Al
"

lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d
~
~ .....
:. m
g 21
I
NOTE: The cruise true airspeeds presented here are for BEST ECONOMY mixture. If BEST POWER mixture is selected, the true airspeed
:l.(!l
will increase 1%. BEST POWER can be obtained by following the procedure described under "Power Terminology", GENERAL
'" ..
'Po
Section, Page 1-6.
(1
"' .....
00
0::0
;j :s: ~8
-
~~
:0 .....
-.l-J
(0

-:J 00
. . . ~
..... tr1t"
>I>-::at"
::0- CRlJ1SE TRUE AIRSPEED (SIN 14000 THRU 14149) ..... 0::0
rt> til
AT BEST ECONOMY ..... 00
::. /!.! .;:..~()
f/l ('t)
AIRPLANE WEIGHT 3140 LB
~~
(t) C-
o."
.......
NCO
N~
St"'
;:p..., tr:1t"'
0'< ::0
'"l
~
.- to
......
..... -.J
COOl NOTES: 1, FULL THROTTLE DATA IS PRESENTED FOR ISA CONDITIONS ONLY
-.] 2. THE TRUE AIRSPEEDS PRESENTED HERE ARE FOR BEST ECONOMY
-.]
MIXTURE, IF A BEST POWER MIXTURE IS SELECTED, THE TRUE:

C
AIRSPEED WILL INCREASE 1%, BEST POWFR CAN BE OBTAINED

op
BY FOLLOWING THE PROCEDURE DESCRIBED UNDER POWER

yr
TERMINOLOGY. GENERAL SECTION, PAGE 16,

ig
ht
C
om
m
o

an
de *
"m

r O *un
;:lC

w off
-I

ne ic
rs ial
Z"
G'>r=

G co
9

ro p
:I:

up y*
v;

20 *
Z

13
o
O:J

Al
o

lR
o

ig
A

ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d
'tl
tr:1
::0
>'lj(f}
-40 -20 o 20 40 100 120 140 160 100 120 140 160 100 120 140 160 100 120 140 160 0tr:1
::00
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE TRUE AIRSPEED "'" KT TRUE AIRSPEED "'" KT
........, DEG C
TRUE AIRSPEED "'" KT THUE AIIt':::PErm "'" KT.
~j
C)1 zO
I
C)1
oz
..... Figure 5-26 . tr:1<:
<:Jl
I
c.n
CRUISE TRUE AIRSPEED (SIN 14150 AND SUBS) '"CUl
trItri
I',)
::00
The Cruise True is presented in 5-27 for varying outside air pressure altitude, and power setting at >-rj>-l
0-
maximum gross of 3140 Lbs. ::o@
~<
ASSOCIA TED CONDITIONS ~
ttl

Power AS REQUffiED
Wing Flaps ODEG
Landing Gear RETRACTED
Cowl Flaps CLOSED

C
op
TECHNIQUE

yr
ig
After establishing the desired percentage of power from the power tables presented in this section, trim the airplane in a stabilized condition

ht
with zero rate of climb.

C
o

om
EXAMPLE -c

m
m

an
GIVEN: Outside Air Temperature 5 DEG C
""-f

de *
Pressure Altitude 5000 FT

r O *un
Power Setting 55 PERCENT (2300 RPM)
Z-c

w off
G')i=

ne ic
FIND: True Airspeed, Fig. 5-27 131 KTS
:x: 0

rs ial
-:!

G co
Zen

ro p
up y*
C
t;g

20 *
o

13
o

Al
'"

lR
ig
ht
s
NOTE: The cruise true airspeeds are presented here for a BEST ECONOMY mixture. If BEST POWER mixture is selected, the true airspeed

R
will increase 1%. BEST POWER can be obtained by following the procedure described under "Power Terminology", GENERAL

es
Section, Page 1-6.

er
,

ve
d
......
)

:. 00
~~
l.. (!)
'0.
" .. ()
"I-'
~
0::0
~~ ~R
~~
~ .... 1Z~
Otrl
:)(0
-'I-.;J I-'trlt"'
-'1m ~::Ot"'
""'
,'til CRUISE THUE AIRSPEED (SiN 14150 & SUBS) .... (")::0
l!! AT BEST ECONOM Y ~08

~~
(1)
Q. AIHPLANE WEIGHT 3140 LD
....
)co
):? St.-<
tTlt.-<
,~ ::0
'<
....
<0
, -.J:
, 0'> NOTES: 1, FULL THROTTLE DATA IS PRESENTED FOR ISA CONDITIONS ONL y,
2, THE TRUE AIRSPEEDS PRESENTED HERE ARE FOR BEST ECONOMY

C
MIXTURE, IF A BEST POWER MIXTURE IS SELECTED, HIE TRUL

op
AIRSPEED WILL INCREASE 1%, BEST POWER CAN BE OBTAINED BY
FOLLOWING THE PROCEDURE DESCRIBED UNDER "POWER

yr
TERMINOLOGY", GENERAL SECTION, PAGE 16,

ig
ht
C
om
m
o'"tI

an
de *
m

r O *un
;;tI

w off
l>
.....

ne ic
rs ial
Z'"tI

G co
Q;:::

ro p
:J:g

up y*
l>V;

20 *
Z

13
o

Al
o:J
o

lR
o

ig
ht
"

s
R
es
er
ve
d
"d
tTl
::0
-40 -20 o 20 40 100 120 140 160 100 140 160 100 120 140 160 100 120 140 160 6~
::0(")
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE TRUE AIRSPEED ......., KT TRUE AIRSPEED ,....., KT TRUE AIRSPEED "" KT TIUJE AIRSPEFD "" KT ;S:>-3
......, DEC C > ....
c.n
I
Z@
(")
c.n
c..:> Figure 527. tTl <
<:J1
RANGE (SIN 14000 THRU 14149) '1:J1:Il

I
I
<:J1 t:rjt:rj
~(")
"'" ':rj1-1
0-
The Range is presented in Figure 5-28 for standard day conditions with varying pressure altitude and power settings at an average cruise ~O
gross weight. Cruise power tables of fuel flow and manifold pressure are presented in Figures 5-18 thru 5-23.
~~
Z
(")
t:rj
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS

Power AS DESIRED
Wing Flaps o DEG
Landing Gear RETRACTED

C
Cowl Flaps CLOSED

op
Wind o KTS

yr
Fuel Allowances

ig
ht
1. Start, Run-up and Taxi (1.5 Gal).
2. Climb from S.L. to Cruising Altitude at Maximum Continuous Power and Best Rate of Climb
o

C
om
3. Cruise at Best Economy Mixture.


4. 45 Minute Reserve based on a power setting of 45 percent MCP at 2200 RPM (7.3 Gal).

m
."
m

an
5. Descent from Cruise Altitude to Sea Level at 1000 FT/Min (2400 RPM and 16 IN.HG.).
~

de *
TECHNIQUE >

r O *un
-I

Z"tJ

w off
Selil.!ndividual Climb and Cruise Speed charts for discussion of techniques.

ne ic
(j);::

rs ial
EXAMPLE :r8

G co
>.;;

ro p
Z

up y*
GIVEN: Outside Air Temperature ISA
Pressure Altitude 5000 FT c

20 *
OJ
Power Setting 55 PERCENT MCP (2300 RPM)
o

13
U sable Fuel Capacity 68 U.S. GAL (408 LB at 6.0 LB/U .S.GAL)
o

Al
"
lR
F1ND: Range, Fig. 5-28 676 NM

ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d
til
....
;'
'<I)
~Q.
~

,, ....
NOTE: The range data is presented for BEST ECONOMY mixture. If a BEST POWER mixture is selected, the range will decrease 15%.
BEST POWER can be obtained by following the procedure described under "Power Terminology", GENERAL Section, Page 1-6. I (")
O~
~R
(1:)

I~
~~
.......
'to
~-:J
... ~~
.... t:rjt-<
~O) "'"~t-<
..... RANGE PROF1LES (SiN 14000 Tlmu 14149) . n::o

I..........00
Ul
lQ AT BEST ECONOMY MIXTUHE ~()

~~
<tl
0.
N
N INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ATMOSPHERE Sr'
>
'0
Mr'
::0
::!.......
......
<0
-.J
-.J

C
op
yr
18,000

ig
NOTE THE RANGE IS PRESENTED FOR BEST ECONOMY MIXTURE.

ht
I F A BEST POWER MIXTURE IS SELECTED. THE RANGE WI LL
DECREASE BY 15%. BEST POWER CAN BE OBTAINED BY

C
FOLLOWING THE PROCEDURE DESCRIBED UNDER "POWER

om
16,000 TERMINOLOGY" GENERAL SECTION, PAGE 16.

m
an
o

de *
14,000 , -c
m

r O *un
;:Ie
......
-4

w off
ne ic
t 12,000 .... j 68 U.S. GAL

rs ial
Z-c
~

G co
G')~

ro p
J:il
8

up y*
(:) 10,000 ::x:
::> v;

20 *
E-< ~ ...
g:: Z

13
o
~

Al
8000 O::J
o

lR
J:il
~ o

ig
::>

h
.j

~ 6000 .--~ ........... --"..


'"

ts
J:il

R
~ :---t-- -----

es
. i
Pi i
..... -........,........ ,. . ...,:

er
,;
."".. -.~.-.- ~
4000

ve
d
2000

0' I. 'II I' III

560 580 600 620 640 660 680 700 720 'i:l
M
RANGE '"'-' NM (NO WIND) ::0
'%j(/)
OM
::On
7'>-3
~ ....
zO
c.n
I n Z
c.n
c.n Figure 5-28. M<:
U'
I RANGE (SIN 14150 AND SUBS) "dU'l
txltxl
Ul
O'l ~()
"'1'"'
The Range is presented in 5-29 for standard day conditions with varyin[; pressure altitude and power sellings at an average cruis(' 00
gross weight. Cntise power tables of fuel flow and manifold pressure are presented in Figures 5-18 thru 5-25. ~~
R
txl
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS

Power AS DESIRED
Wing Flaps o DEG
Landing Gear RETRACTED
COWl Flaps CLOSED

C
Wind o KTS

op
Fuel Allowances

yr
Start, Run-up and Taxi. (1.5 Gal).

ig
1.

ht
2. Climb from S.L. to Cruising Altitude at Maximum Continuous Power and Best Rate of Climb Speed.

C
3. Cruise at Best Economy Mixture. o-a

om
4. 45 Minute Reserve based on a power setting of 45 percent MCP at 2200 RPM (7.3 Gal).

m
5. Descent from Cruise Altitude to Sea Level at 1000 FT /MIN (2200 RPM and 16 IN. HG.). m

an
;:0

de *
TECHNIQUE -t

r O *un
See Individual Climb and Cruise Speed charts for discussion of techniques. Z-a

w off
Qi=

ne ic
J:2

rs ial
EXAMPLE
Vi

G co
Z

ro p
GIVEN: Outside Air Temperature ISA
o

up y*
Pressure Altitude 5000 IT
o:t

20 *
Power Setting 55 PERCENT MCP (2300 RPM)
U sable Fuel Capacity 68 U.S. GAL (408 LB AT 6.0 LB/U .S.GAL) o
o

13
Al
FIND: Range, Fig. 5-29 708 NM
"

lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
-
d
!1l
NOTE: The range data is presented for BEST ECONOMY mixture. If a BEST POWER mixture is selected, the range will decrease 15%.
2!
(1) BEST POWER can be obtained by followingtbe procedure described under "Power Terminology", GENERAL Section, Page 1-6.
P.- ()
IS>
IS> O~
>-
~.....
....
~~
......
co
. . . S~
.... txlt'"
-'l
-'l .;..~t'"
.....
tJ) RANGE PROFILES (SiN 14150 & .....n!:O
g) AT nEST ECONOMY MIXTURE .... 00
~~()
III
INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ATMOSPHEHE
~~
Q..

N
N Ztr!
or-'
>
'0 txlr-'
.....
'1 ::0
.....
....
to
-.1
-.1

C
op
yr
ig
ht
C
om
16,000 NOTE: THE RANGE DATA IS PRESENTED FOR BEST ECONOMY MIXTURE.

m
I F A BEST POWER MI XTURE IS SELECTED THE RANGE WI LL

an
DECREASE BY 15%. BEST POWER CAN BE OBTAINED BY FOLLOW
ING THE PROCEDURE DESCRIBED UNDER "POWER TERMINOLOGY" o."

de *
14, 000 r~r-:'I GENERAL SECTION, PAGE 16.
m

r O *un
". < , ]

;;10

w off
l>

ne ic
......
t 12,000

rs ial
Z."

G co
G)i=
l

ro p
::t:8

up y*
~ 10,000
l>V;

20 *
Q
::> Z

13
~ o
f:-< 8000

Al
o::J
..:l
o

lR
<
o

ig
~

ht
~ 6000
"

s
!Zl

R
!Zl

es
~
~

er
p.., 4000

ve
d
2000

o
610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 '"0
txl
RANGE --..., NM ::0
'-rlr:n
Otr!
~Q
> ...
c.n zO
I
c.n n Z
-.J Figure 529. txl<!
<.n
ENDURANCE PROFILE (SIN 14000 THRU 14149)

I
I
CJ1
co

Figure 5-30 presents the maximum endurance for sL1.ndard conditions with varying pressure altitude and percent power.

ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS

Power
Wing Flaps
Landing Gear
AS REQUIRED
o DEG
RETRACTED

Cowl CLOSED
Mixture BEST ECONOMY

C
op
yr
Fuel Allowances

ig
ht
1. Start, warm up and taxi out, (1.5 Gal, 10 MIN, and 0 NM).

C
2. Climb from S.L. to cruise altitude at maximum continuous power and best rate of climb speed.
I

om
3. Cruise at maximum range power at cruise altitude, Best Economy mixture. 0
-c

m
4. Descent from cruise altitude to sea level at 1000 ft/min (2400 RPM and 16 IN. .). m

an
5. 45 minute reserve* based on a power setting of 45% MCP at 2200 RPM (7.3 U . . GAL). :::0
>

de *
r O *un
TECHNlQUE -4
Z-c

w off
See individual climb and cruise speed charts for discussion of techniques. G);::

ne ic
J:O

rs ial
EXAMPLE A
>~

G co
ZVl

ro p
GIVEN: Pressure Altitude 5000 FT

up y*
Power Setting 55% MCP (2300 RPM) 0
OJ

20 *
0

13
FIND: Endurance, Fig. 5-30 5.33 HRS 5 HR 20 MIN
0

Al
EXAMPLE B
"

lR
ig
GIVEN: Pressure Altitude 4000 FT

ht
s
Power Setting 75% MCP (2500 RPM)

R
es
FIND: Endurance, Fig. 5-30 4.24 HRS 4 HR 14 MIN

er
ve
d
......
til
21
(l)
Q.

N
N NOTES: 1. * Reserve time is not included in the total endurance time.
>
'Cl
2. The endurance data is presented for BEST ECONOMY mixture. If a BEST POWER mixture is selected, the endurance will
.....
'1 decrease 17%. BEST POWER can be obtained by following the procedure described under "Power Terminology", GENERAL
..... Section, Page 1- 6 .
....
c.o
-J
-J
..... ENDUR:\~CE PHOFILES 14000 TIIHU 14149)
til ~o::o
gJ nEST FCONOMY MIXTUHE "..00
<1) ~o
INTERNATIONAL STANDAHD ATMOSPHERE
?0-
N
N
~~
ztrl
;.. t::lt""
'0 trlt""
'1 ::0
....
.... '

....
<0
-J
-J

C
op
yr
18,000 NOTES: 1, RESERVE TIME IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE TOTAL ENDURANCE TIME.

ig
2. THE ENDURANCE DATA IS PRESENTED FOR BEST ECONOMY MIXTURE.

ht
IF A BEST POWER MIXTURE ISSELECTED, THE ENDURANCE WILL

C
DE:CREASE 17%. BEST POWER CAN BE OBTAINED BY FOLLOWING THE

om
16 PROCEDURE DESCRIBED UNDER "POWER TERMINOLOGY,"
GENERAL SECTION, PAGE 16.

m
o."

an
14,000 \-.,; .. " ..... ".,....; .....

de *
m

r O *un
E-t ~
~

w off
ne ic
12,000 1-.,' . , ' " "";...",.,, , -f
l z."

rs ial
G>-

G co
[il
r-
o

ro p
::> 10,000 1-.,,""';"""'+' IO

up y*
tE-t -:!
ZVl

20 *
....:l

13
<: C
8000 I---~"'"""''''''''-+''''I .,... ,.', .... , " , + . , ' + . , ; , , ... , . " j . , ,.,' f 0::1
[il

Al
~ o

lR
gs o

ig
6000 I-+,,~-~ .., - j ..... +..+... ,. , A

ht
[il
~

s
p.,

R
es
4000

er
ve
d
2000 I-F;;L,,jl: ,.

O'U-" ., II 11

4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8 5.0 5.2 5.4 5.6 5.8 6.0 6.2 6.4 't:l
trl
ENDURANCE ""'-" HRS ::0
"'len
O/:tj
::00
~..,

CJ'I ;"0
I
CJ'I oZz
<0 Figure 530. trl<:
U1
I ENDURANCE PROFILES (SIN 14150 AND SUBS) "cir:n
O"l trJtrJ
o ~()
"'rjl-j
0 .....
5- 31 presents the maximum endurance for standard day conclitions with pressure altitude and percent power. ~O
~Z
~<
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS ()
M
Power AS REQUIRED
Wing Flaps o DEG
Lancling Gear RETRACTED
Cowl Flaps CLOSED

C
Mixture BEST ECOMONY

op
yr
Fuel Allowances

ig
ht
1. Start, warm up and taxi out (1.5 U.S. Gal, 10 MIN and 0 NM).

C
om
2. Climb from S.L. to cruise altitude at maximum continuous power and best rate of climb speed.
3. Cruise at maximum range power at cruise altitude, Best Economy Mixture. o

m
-0

an
4. Descent from cruise altitude to sea level at 1000 FT /MIN (2200 RPM and 16 IN. Hg). m
5. 45 minute reserve* based on a power setting of 45% MCP at 2200 RPM IJ. 3 U.S.
'"

de *
>

r O *un
TECHNIQUE -t

w off
Z-o

ne ic
See Individual climb and cruise speed charts for discussion of techniques. G)i=

rs ial
EXAMPLE A J:O

G co
>~

ro p
ZIJ')

up y*
GIVEN: Pressure Altitude 5000 FT
Power Setting 55% MCP (2300 RPM) C

20 *
D:J
o

13
FIND: Endurance, Fig. 5-31 5.47 HRS '" 5 HR 28 MIN
o

Al
lR
EXAMPLE B
"

ig
ht
GIVEN: Pressure Altitude 4000 FT

s
Power Setting 75% MCP (2500 RPM)

R
es
er
FIND: Endurance, 5-31 4.35 HRS 4 HR 22 MIN

ve
d
....
m
21
(!)
Q.

!\:) ()
!\:) NOTES: 1. * Reserve time is not included in the total endurance time. O~
>
'0
2. The endurance data is presented for BEST ECONOMY mixture. If a BEST POWER mixture is selected, the endurance will ~?S
~~
I-j decrease 17%. BEE;'!' POWER can be obtained by following the procedure described under "Power Terminology", GENEHAL
!=: Section, Page 1-6.
....
<D ....8 M
...;J .... trlt"
...;J "",~t"
...... ENDURANCE PHOFILES (SIN 14150 & .....0::0
til
~ BEST ECONOM Y MIXTUHE ~OR

~~
ro
?- INTFHNATIONAL S'TANDARD ATMOSPHEHE
N
N
16,000 @t"'
>-
'0 ... \1: NOTES: 1. RESERVE TIME IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE
TOTAL ENDURANCE TIME.
trlt"'
;::!. 2. THE ENDURANCE DATA IS PRESENTED
::0
I-'

I-' !
..+_-1+::1,; FOR BEST ECONOMY MIXTURE. IF A
<J:! BEST POWER MIXTURE IS SELECTED. THE
-l I . ENDURANCE WI LL DECREASE 17%. BEST
-J
14,000 ~ POWER CAN BE OBTAINED BY FOLLOW
ING THE PROCEDURE DESCRIBED

C
op
UNDER "POWER TERMINOLOGY".
GENERAL SECTION. PAGE 16.

yr
ig
ht
C
om
m
an
o

de *
"tI
m

r O *un
~' '.~ ... iItI

w off
l>

ne ic
I-.. --~+ ..... - ..+...i-...j .! -t

rs ial
f
Z"tI

G co
G)i=

ro p
:1:8

up y*
, l>~
!

20 *
H ....... j ...... _.+ Z

13
I o

Al
o:J
o

lR
t o

ig
't '

ht
. -4-+-:-I-i-i1-''''+-----+ ~

s
. I .11
... I:J .. : a::1"

R
I .. ; . .

es
4000
..

er
::;:
. : 1'::;:\ :1 1::;:"

ve
. 0-
0::
f-.-:,":'l ~ .:.-.. "':', :f ~.

d
t
:..1 r
8
':::j~ . '"
N

2000
. ,

.
"'..:--1"]"--'
~
. ., " .. -_.-/
"~ ~ ..
..
1 ~,,,,.2:

.,:it:
..
'tj
trl
t
::0
o L -_ _ ~~k- __ ~~~ __ ~ __ ~ __ ~ __ ~ ____ ~~ __ ~ __ ~

"1CIJ
Otrl
4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 ::00
ENDURANCE '"'-' HltS S::...:j
;t> ......
(Jl ZO
I
0) oZ
I-' Figure 5-31. trl<
U1 'OCIl
I
0>
HOLDING TIME MM
:;o()
"" ..",I-j
0 ......
The Holding Time is presentee! in 5-32 for Holding Fuel. :;00
1 ~Z
:;<
Z
()
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS M
Power
Wing Flaps
Landing Gear
Cowl Flaps
o DEG
(2200 RPM)

RETRACTED
CLOSED

Mixture I3EST ECONOMY

C
op
TECHNIQUE

yr
ig
ht
Obtain 45 percent power at 2200 RPM. Trim the airplane for level flight at the holding altitude.

C
o"tl

om
EXAMPLE A

m
m

an
;:10

I
GIVEN: Holding Time 0.75 HR (0 HR:45 MIN)
l>

de *
.....

r O *un
FIND: Holding Fuel, Fig. 5-32 44 LB
Z"tl

w off
Or=

ne ic
EXAMPLE B
J:2

rs ial
Holding Fuel 240 LB l>,;;

G co
GIVEN:

ro p
Z

up y*
FIND: Holding Time, Fig. 5-32 4.16 HR (4 HR:10 MIN) o
CD

20 *
o

13
o

Al
~

lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d
.....
III
!!l NOTES: 1. See cruise power setting charts for manifold pressure schedule.
(1)
2. This chart is applicable for 45 percent power only. When 45 percent power can not be obtained due to high temperature and/or
?- high altitude conditions, increase the RPM and refer to the Power Setting Tables for fuel flow information. Holding time can
N
N

>
then be determined b:r dividing holding fuel by the fuel flow from the table. I ()
0:;0
~R

~~
'0
.....
'"!
.....
....
I'D
...::t .... Mr<
...::t :i:::Or<
..... HOLDING TIME :::()~

*'-~X
til
~ AT 45% MCP (2200 HPM)
ro
0.
~~
8~
N
N
;p. trJl:'""
"0 ~
,....
!oj
.....
......
<D
...;j
...;j

C
op
yr
ig
ht
C
8

om
NOTE: THIS CHART IS APPLICABLE I'OR 45% POWER ONLY.
WHEN 45% POWER CAN NOT BE OBTAINED DUE TO

I
m
HIGH TEMPERATURE AND/OR HIGH ALTITUDE

an
~ :;" I... . !....l.1
CONDITIONS. INCREASE THE RPM AND REFER TO
o."

de *
0 ... THE POWER SETTING
INFORMATION. TABLES
HOLDING FOR
TIME FUEL
CAN FLOW
THEN BE
::r:

r O *un
6 ...... .... DETERMINED BY DIVIDING HOLDING FUEL BY m
, THE FUEL FLOW FROM THE TABLE.
'"

w off
r-

ne ic
( f : '-1 ". t
:::::!
~ -:'J;.:~~:t:.

rs ial
Z."

G co
G');::

ro p
~ . ~~.-
4 ."
::1:2

up y*
r l

~ v;

20 *
Q z

13
-'
..4
o
UJ
:::l" a

Al
u.. 0:1
::r:
o

lR
2
o

ig
ht
"

s
R
I

es
er
o
o

ve
100 200 300 400

d
HOLDING FUEL "'- LB

'~' j ' . r'.


I' ........ l,m .. . , ' . t ... , ..i''1 '"
j' .. .,. rom.. 'm, " . j '..,"."r'
TI ..... .... !, 1'" 1 .!' ,. i I
... I
., '
....T I j ! .. I .T i' i . r . .,' '. . . I
o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
HOLDING FUEL "'- U. S . GAL "d
trJ
~
6gj
~()
S:'"'l
;p.-
(J1
I ()
o
Zz
..
en
w Figure 532. trJ<
()l
TIME, DISTANCE AND FUel USED IN DESCENT (SIN 14000 THRU 14149) 'tl til
...
I
I
0> trltrl
::tJo
The Time, Distance and Fuel used in Descent are presented in Figure 5-33 for varying Pressure Altitude at 1000 FT'MIN Rate of Descent. ":j>-1
0 0......
A table of approximate Descent Speed versus Pressure Altitude is presented in the upper left hand corner of the char! .
~~
::tI

Z
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS o
trl
Power 2400 RPM, 16IN.HG. MP.
Wing Flaps a DEG
Landing Gear RETRACTED
Cowl Flaps CLOSED

C
TECHNIQUE

op
yr
Follow the Scheduled Descent Speed versus Pressure Altitude as the descent progresses, maintaining sufficient power for 1000 FT /MIN Hate

ig
ht
of Descent.

C
o

om
EXAMPLE
."

m
m

an
GIVEN: Initial Pressure Altitude 5000 IT ;:IC

de *
Final Pressure Altitude 200 FT l>
-t

r O *un
FIND: The total time, distance and fuel to descend from 5000 FT to 200 FT from Figure 5-33. Z."

w off
G')i=

ne ic
INITIAL ALTITUDE FINAL ALTITUDE NET
I2

rs ial
Time 5.0 MIN minus 0.2 MIN equals 5 MIN

G co
l>V;
z

ro p
Distance 13.0 NAM minus 1.0 NAM equals 12 NAM
0.9 u.s .Gal o.04 U. S . Gal

up y*
Fuel minus equals 0.86 U.S. Gal (5.2 LB) o
o:J

20 *
o

13
o

Al
~

lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
....

d
tI'.I
~ NOTES: 1. Descent data is presented for zero wind conditions only.
<I>
P.-
I).;)
I).;)
2. The chart applies for outside air temperatures between -40 and +40 Degree C and for airplane weights between 3140 and
27401bs. I ()
0::0
>
'0 ~R
.....
~~
'"l
.....
....to .... StrJ
..:I
..:I
.... trJr:-'
"",::Or:-'
TIME, DISTANCE, FUEL USED IN DESCENT (SiN 14000 THRU 14149) ........ . 00
(")::u
>-<
({l

~
(ll
HATE OF DESCENT - 1000 FTI MIN .... :s::n
~~
0.
N
N ZM
;.- t:::lt"'
Mt"'
't:l
.....
'"1 ::u
.......
.....
<D
-J
-J
18,000 DESCENT SPEEDS
PRESSURE KIAS
NOTE: KIAS ASSUMES ZERO INSTRUMENT ERROR

C
ALTITUDE

op
Sea Level 148
16,000

yr
2000 148

ig
4000 147

ht
6000 146
8000 146

C
14,000 10,000 146

om
12,000 144
144

m
14,000
16,000 142

an
142
E-< 12,000
18,000
o

de *
r... ""C

r O *un
m
l :::'C

w off
~

ne ic
w 10,000 ~

rs ial
~
;::J Z""C

G co
~ G);::

ro p
E-< 8000
Ig

up y*
...:I

20 *
~V;
, ~ ~ , t +

13
Z
;::J 6000 o

Al
CI.l
CI.l OJ

lR
w o
0::

ig
P< 4000 o

ht
"

s
R
es
2000

er
ve
d
o IZC "'J+>-" I I I I I

01 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0


7.0 8.0 6.0
9.0 10.011.012.013.014.015.016.017.018.0
I DESCENT TIME ~ MINUTES
1 I , ..... l i t I' 1 ' 1 1 1 I I'
OJ. 5 10 15 1 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
, , DESCENT DISTANCE ~ NM (NO WIND) >t1
M
I I i [I . '! .,. I I" I t iI I; ::u
>-tjen
o 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 OM
DESCENT FUEL ~ U S. GAL ::Un
o
:S::>-:l
;.- ......
U1 ZO
I (")Z
Q)
U1 Figure 533. M<
""
I TIME, DISTANCE AND FUEL USED IN DESCENT (SIN 14150 AND SUBS) 'd!Zl
MM
0>
0> ::on
'Tj>-3
The Time, Distance and Fuel used in Descent are presented in Figure 5-34 for varyinf', pressure altitude at 1000 FT/MIN rate of descent. 00
A table of Scheduled Descent Speed versus Pressure Altitude is presented in the upper left hand corner of the chart. ~z
><
z
n
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS M

Power 2200 RPM (16 IN


Wing Flaps o DEG
Landing Gear RETRACTED
Cowl Flaps CLOSED

C
op
TECHNIQUE

yr
ig
ht
Follow the Scheduled Descent Speed versus Pressure Altitude as the descent progresses, maintaining sufficient power for 1000 FT /MIN

C
rate of descent.
o

om
-c

m
EXAMPLE m

an
'".....l>

de *
GIVEN: Initial Pressure Altitude 5000 FT

r O *un
Final Pressure Altitude 200 FT
Z-c

w off
c;;;::

ne ic
FIND: The total time, distance and fuel to descend from 5000 FT to 200 FT from Figure 5-34.
I8

rs ial
G co
INITIAL FINAL l>V;

ro p
ALTITUDE ALTITUDE NET Z

up y*
minus 0.2 MIN equals 4.8 MIN
o
Time 5.0 MIN

20 *
O::J
Distance 13.9 NAM minus 1.2 NAM equals 12.7 NAM o

13
Fuel O. 55 U . S Gal minus a.03 U. S . Gal equals 0.52 U.S.Gal (3.1 LB) o

Al
~

lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d
......
I7l
g! NOTES: 1. Descent data is presented for zero wind conditions only.
(!> 2. The chart applies for outside air temperatures between -40 and +40 Deg C and for airplane weights between 3140 and 2740 Lbs.
Q.

I:\:) n
I:\:) 0::0
> ~?S
~~
't:l
.....
"1
.....
.....
co
...:]
. . . 8~t-'
..... trJ
-.1 ~::ot-'
...... TIME, DISTANCE, FUEL USED IN DESCENT (SiN 14150 & SUnS)
[fl :::O::<:l
[Q
(1)
RATE OF DESCENT - 1000 FT IMIN ~~g
~~
0-
N
N ZM
tJt'"
>
'0 Mt'"
~. ::<:l
......
......
cD
-.J
-.J
18,000 I

C
. Sea Level
16, 000 ~""I

op
2000
4000

yr
6000

ig
f-'--- "_000
8000

ht
C
14 , 000 .. 12,000

om
E-< : :.::.... 14,000
~ ": 16,000

m
: 18,000
l o

an
12, 000

de *
"'tJ
m

r O *un
'::JQ"' ;:IC
:l>

w off
10, 000
E-< -4

ne ic
......
E-< Z"'tJ

rs ial
....:l
-< G);:::

G co
8000 .
Ig

ro p
'"'

up y*
~
::J :l>V;

20 *
[J)
[J) Z
6000 o

13
~ OJ

Al
0..
o

lR
4000 o

ig
"

ht
s
R
es
2000

er
ve
d
OIZ'C I I ','
a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Ii!.;, i
a 5
I J ;1
10
J tI 15 20
fESCT~T TI~E . "";, MIN
25 30
i l l , 1
35 40
'[
45
'tJ
; ; DESCENT DISTANCE "" NM (NO WIND) M
IT T I: / I I : I 'I I; I; I' I' ::<:l
"%j[J)
a 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 OM
DESCENT FUEL "" U.S.GAL. ~~. . .
>
c.n zO
I
Cl> n Z
-.J Figure 5-34. M<
U'I
I
0'>
LANDING GROUND ROLL DISTANCE, SHORT FIELD "d UJ
tr1tr1
w ::0(')
"11-,]
0 .....
The Short Field Ground Roll Distance is shown in Figure 5-35 for varying conditions of Outside Air
'-'P'''''''''''' at a gross weight of 3140 Lbs.
res, Pressure
~@
:;<
~
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS trl

Power IDLE
Wing Flaps 35 DEG
Landing Gear EXTENDED
Cowl Flaps CLOSED

C
Runway Conditions DRY, LEVEL,PAVED*

op
yr
ig
TECHNIQUE

ht
C
Make the final approach with the landing gear extended and the wing flaps at 35 degrees arriving at the 50 FT height at 71 KIAS. Touchdown
o

om
on the main wheels first, lower the nose wheel and apply maximum braking.
-0

m
m

an
EXAMPLE ;;10
-4

de *
r O *un
GIVEN: Gross Weight 3140 LB
Outside Air Temperature 25 DEG C Z-o

w off
G');::

ne ic
Pressure Altitude 200.FT
::r:9

rs ial
Wind Component 2 KT (TAILWIND)
v;

G co
ro p
FIND: Ground Distance, Fig. 5-35 790 FT Z

up y*
c
OJ

20 *
o

13
o

Al
"

lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d
....
f1l
~ NOTES: 1. IAS assumes zero instrument error.
(1)
C. 2. Allowance must be made for wet runways or other associated conditions which may differ from those above.
N
*3. For landing on dry grass surfaces, increase ground roll distances (')
N 0::0
> CAUTION: The final approach speed is a minimum for smooth air conditions. It should be increased as required 5 to 15 KIAS), ~8
~~
"CS
"'! if turbulence or wind shear conditions exist.
~
.....
(J:)
t:Jtr1
-:! ..... trlt"
-:! ~::Ot"
..... SHORT FIELD LANDING GROUND ROLL DISTANCE .....('}::u
t'!l
!!l
(!l
GROSS WEIGHT 31401.8 ~~X
A-
N
N
DRY, LEVEL, PA VED* RUNWAYS 50 FT HFIGIIT SPEED 71 KIAS ~~
ZI:'1
CIt"
1500 I I NOTES: 1. KIAS ASSUMES ZERO INSTRUMENT ERROR. I ] GOO 1:'1t"
2. FOR LANDINGS ON SHORT. DRY. GRASS RUNWAYS. w ::u
INCREASE THE GROUND ROLL DISTANCE BY 25%. Z
,...
<:0 1400 ~ . 1400
-l
-l

C
op
13 00 b. .... --..+.---~.--j-. .......+u 1300

yr
ig
ht
t

C
1200 I--=;";~-;;;F;':':~;';':;"~;+~'u...+. 1200 E-<

om
.....

m
l (

an
w 1100 1100 o

de *
w ."

r O *un
U U m
Z Z ::0

w off
..:x: ..:x:
t; l>

ne ic
1000 ~-F-;+-i--i-:+': 1000 U)
E-< ......

rs ial
Q S Z."

G co
...:l ...:l G')i=

ro p
...:l 900 I--.-.--+--..+-.. j ~..., 900 ...:l
... :...

up y*
@ @ ::x:
l>,;;

20 *
Cl Cl
Z z

13
Z
::::> 800 ~..;.....+-.:.~..;-+~t;L~ ::::> o
@

Al
@ 00
o

lR
Cl u
u o

ig
~
700 ~..:.+;....;.+":~.:.f~~~;l 700

ht
~
"

s
Cl
z

R
Z

es
..:x:
j 600 600 ...:l

er
ve
d
5 00 1--+--1-++; 500

4001--;++f 400
'tI
1:'1
300' "';'''''' " I I I ~WO ::u
lTJen
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 0 10 20 30 01:'1

UI
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE""'" DEG C WIND COMPONENT ,....., KT
~B
ZO
I
0'>
('}Z
<:0 Figure 5-35. 1:'1<':
U1
I TOTAL LANDING DISTANCE, SHORT FIELD "t1Ul
trItri
-;j
o ::0('")
>Tj,..;j

The Short Field Total Landing Distance from 50 Ft. height is shown in 5-36 for varying conditions of outside air temperatures, 00
pressure altitudes, and wind speeds at a gross weight of 3140 Lbs. ~z
~<
('")
trI
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS

Power IDLE
Wing Flaps 35 DEG
Landing Gear EXTENDED
Cowl Flaps CLOSED

C
Runway Conditions DRY, LEVEL, PAVED*

op
yr
ig
TECHNIQUE

ht
C
Make the final approach with the landing gear extended and the wing flaps at 35 degrees arriving at the 50 Ft height at 71 KIAS. Touchdown
o

om
on the main wheels first, lower the nose wheel and apply maximum braking. -a

m
m

an
EXAMPLE
'"

de *
:j

r O *un
GIVEN: Gross Weight 3140 LB Z-a
Outside Air Temperature 25 DEG C G)-

w off
r-

ne ic
Pressure Altitude 200 FT
:1: 0

rs ial
Wind Component 2 KT (TAILWIND)
-:!

G co
ZVI

ro p
FIND: Total Landing Distance
o

up y*
Fig. 5-36 1322 FT D::J
o

20 *
o

13
"

Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d
.....
til
NOTES: 1. lAS assumes zero instrument error.
~
(l) 2. Allowance must be made for wet runways or other associated conditions which may differ from those above.
f!- *3. For landing on dry grass surfaces, increase ground roll distances by 25%.
J)..) ('")
J)..)
0::0
>
~R
CAUTION: The final approach speed is a minimum for smooth air conditions. It should be increased as required (typically 5 to 15 KIAS) ,
1:1..... if turbulence or wind shear conditions exist .
.... Z~
....co t;ttl
-;j .... ttl t"'
-;j :; ::<:1 t"'
>-< SHOHT FIFLD TOTAL LANDING DISTANCE
Ul :::n~
g)
(!J
GROSS WEICI!T = 3140 LB ~~g
~~
0.
N
N DEY, LEVEL, PA VE D* RUNWAYS 50 FT HEIGHT SPEED .. 71 KIAS ZM
tj!:"'
>-
'0 M!:"'
:::! . :::0
.....
.....
CD
-J
-J

C
op
'400 2400

rT
NOTES: 1. KIAS ASSUMES ZERO INSTRUMENT ERROR.

yr
2. FOR LANDINGS ON SHORT, DRY, GRASS RUNWAYS, I

ig
w
INCREASE THE GROUND ROLL DISTANCE BY 25%. Z
.......

ht
..J
2200

C
'l
2200

om
t

m
an
2000 2000 o

de *
"'tJ
E-< m

r O *un
~ E-< ;;0
~
? :l>

w off
1800 1800

ne ic
-i
2

rs ial
Z"'tJ
~

G co
~ G)i=
~ 1600

ro p
1600 ~
I9

up y*
<t: <t:
~ E-< :l>v;

20 *
...... (fJ
Z
1400 a o

13
Q 1400
l:J OJ
l:J

Al
~ z o

lR
Q ......
~ 1200 1200 Z
Q
o

ig
<t:
"

ht
H H

s
g
H

R
H

es
1000 1000 ~

er
E-< 0

ve
E-<

d
800 800

6001-:-:::+--+"-+"+ .. ' f : 600


'U
M
400" "1"" "j'"
400 ~
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 o 10 20 30 40 50 0 10 20 30 'TIm
OM
~n
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE ~ DEG C WIND COMPONENT ~ KT
~j
,
CJ1 ZO
-J n Z
....... Figure 5-36 . M<
t.l1 'tiC/)
I MM
-J
tv ::0 0
""l~
0 ....
::o@
~<
o:zM

MILES PER HOUR/KNOTS NAUTICAL MILES/STATUTE MILES

C
op
MPH KT NAUTICAL STATUTE

yr
0
5~ ]
0 0

ig
ht
10 10 50
0

C
20 20 100 100

om
"tJ
30 150 m
30 150

m
200 :i'C
40

an
40 200 250
l>
50 -t

de *
60 50 250 300

r O *un
Z"'tJ
70 60 300 350 G">i=

w off
ne ic
80 70 350 400 J:O
-:!

rs ial
90 80 400 450
ZI.n

G co
100 500

ro p
90 450 C
110 550

up y*
100 500
120 600
'"00

20 *
130 110 550 650

13
140 120 600 700
"

Al
130 650 750

lR
150
800

ig
160 140 700

ht
170 750 850

s
150
900

R
180 160 800

es
190 950

er
170 850 1000
200

ve
d
....
til
~
III
..C- 0
N
N 0::0
>
't:I ~8
~~
"1
r::.:
.....
CD ......1:'1t"'
-J
-'I Figure 5-37. :;::::ot"'
ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION V1
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK WEIGHT AND BALANCE/
114 EQUIPMENT LIST

SECTION VI

WEIGHT AND BALANCE/EQUIPMENT LIST


The following information is applicable to Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Page
INiRODUCTION .......................... 6-1 WEIGHT A!>i'D BALA.~CE INSTRUCTIONS 6-2
C
op

AIRCRAFT WEIGHING ..................... 6-1 WEIGHT AND BALANCE REPORT ............ 6-2
Procedures ............................ 6-1
y rig
ht
C
om
m
an
de *

INTRODUCTION
r O *un
w off
ne ic

This section describes the procedure for establishing the aircraft Weight, Moment and Center of Gravity (C .G.).
rs ial

Procedures for calculating Weight, Moment and C. G. for various operations are also included in this section.
G co
ro p

A list of optional equipment for your specific aircraft can be found in the Weight and Balance Report (Form
up y*

AC 1678). This list consists of optional equipment, the weight, moment and center of gravity for items in-
20 *

stalled at the time of factory certification.


13
Al
lR

AIRCRAFT WEIGHING
ig
ht
s
R

PROCEDURES
es
er

1. Preparation:
ve

a. Inflate struts and tires to recommended pressures.


d

b. Remove all drainable fuel from wing fuel tanks.


c. With aircraft in ground attitude, fill sump to 8 quart level.
d. Move forward seats to the full forward position and place all seat backs in vertical position.
e. Install control lock to position all controls in neutral.
f. Fully retract wing flaps and close cabin doors.

2. Leveling:
a. Place scale under each wheel (500 Ibs nose, 1000 Ibs each main, minimum weight capacity).
b. Deflate nose tire to level aircraft as necessary.
c. Level datum is the forward floorboard.

3. Weighing:
With the aircraft level and brakes released, record the weight shown on each scale. Deduct the
tare, if any, from each reading.

Issued: 21 February 1976 6-1


R"." "<>rl' 1 ()"tnh" .... 1Q'7A
SEC110N VI PILOT'S ROCKWELL
WEIGHT AND BALANCE/ OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
EQUIPMENT LlST 114

-1. Measuring:
Stretch a line between the centers of the main gear. Measure directly fore and aft aiong the aircraft
centerline from the main gear centerline to each side of the nose gear centerline and average the mea-
surements. This is the Distance L used in the Aircraft Weight and Balance Report.

5. C sing the weights from step 3. and the measurements from step 4. the aircraft weight and C. G. can be
determined. The factory Weight and Balance Report (Form AC 1678) may be followed as an example.

WEIGHT AND BALANCE INSTRUCTIONS

The following iniormation will enable you to operate your Rockwell Commander 114 within the prescribed weight
and balance limitations.

To compute accurate Weight and Balance for your particular aircraft, use the Loading Schedule Example, Air-
craft Weight and Moment Tables and the Weight and Moment Allowables Envelope included in the Aircraft Weight
and Balance Report (Form AC 1678) provided with each individual aircraft.
C
op

Using the Loading Sub-Total Weight and Moment from the Weight and Balance Report (Form AC 1678), add the
y

additional Weight and Moment of passengers and baggage. Enter these two values to the Weight and Moment
rig

Allowables limitations (Page 3 of Weight and Balance Report) to determine if the aircraft falls within the Weight
ht

and Balance Envelope for the Zero Fuel Weight condition. Add the additional Weight and Moment of fuel and
C

enter these two values to the Weight and Moment Allowables Limitations to determine if the loaded aircraft
om

falls witllin the Weight and Balance Envelope.


m
an
de *

NOTE
r O *un
w off

The loading sub-total and loading schedule (example)


ne ic

assumes an occupant weight of 170 lbs. Allowance


rs ial

must be made for occupant weight variation.


G co
ro p
up y*

WEIGHT AND BALANCE REPORT - To be inserted by Quality Control for each individual aircraft
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

6-2 Issued: 21 February 1976


ROCKWELL PilOT'S SECTION VI
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK WEIGHT AND BALANCE/
114 EQllPMENT LIST

The following information is applicable to Serial Numbers 14150 and Subsequent.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page
INTRODUCTION ...... 6-3 LOADING GRAPH .................... 6-8
AIRPLANE WEIGHING PROCEDURES .. 6-3 CABIN STATION DIAGRAM ............... . 6-9
WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD . 6-5 AIRCRAFT OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS
SAMPLE WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD . 6-6 (WEIGHT AND MOMENT ALLOWABLES) . 6-9
WEIGHT AND BALANCE DETERMINATION WEIGHT AND BALANCE STATEMENT/
FOR FLIGHT ............. 6-6 EQUIPMENT LIST ...... 6-9
C
op

INTRODUCTION
y
rig
ht
C

This section provides procedures for establishing the airplane's basic empty weight, moment and
om

center of gravity (C.G.). Procedures for determining the weight and balance for flight are included.
m
an

This section includes weight and balance information on all items of equipment installed on the airplane as it
de *

was delivered from the factory. Required and optional equipment items are identified as such.
r O *un

A sample Weight and Balance Record form is included for easily keeping track of changes to the
w off

airplane which affect weight and balance (such as installation or removal of optional equipment).
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*

AIRPLANE WEIGHING PROCEDURES


20 *
13

It may be necessary to occasionally weigh the airplane to keep the Basic Empty Weight current. All changes
Al

to the airplane affecting weight and balance are the responsibility of the airplane's operator.
lR
ig

Configuration
ht
s
R

The airplane must be weighed in the following configuration:


es
er

1. Oil
ve

Oil tanks should be full. Total engine oil is 19 pounds at an ARM of 44.18 inches. A small portion of
d

this oil is undrainable (4 pounds at an ARM of 48.6 inches).

2. Fuel
The unusable fuel quantity should be in the fuel tanks. This amounts to 12 pounds at an ARM of
112.2 inches.

3. Hydraulic Fluids
Check for full hydraulic fluids. Service as required.

4. Wing Flaps
The wing flaps should be retracted.

5. Doors
All doors closed.

Issued: 1 October 1976 6-3


ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION VI
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK WEIGHT AND BALANCE/
114 EQUIPMENT LIST

The following information is applicable to Serial Numbers 14150 and Subsequent.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Page
INTRODUCTION ............... 6-3 LOADING GRAPH .................... 6-8
AIRPLANE WEIGHING PROCEDURES ... 6-3 CABIN STATION DIAGRAM ......... 6-9
WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD . 6-5 AIRCRAFT OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS
SAMPLE WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD 6-6 (WEIGHT AND MOMENT ALLOWABLES) . 6-9
WEIGHT AND BALANCE DETERMINATION WEIGHT AND BALANCE STATEMENT/
FOR FLIGHT ...... 6-6 EQUIPMENT LIST ........ 6-9
C
op

INTRODUCTION
y
rig
ht
C

This section provides procedures for establishing the airplane's basic empty weight, moment and
om

center of gravity (C.G.). Procedures for determining the weight and balance for flight are included.
m
an

This section includes weight and balance information on all items of equipment installed on the airplane as it
de *

was delivered from the factory. Required and optional eqUipment items are identified as such.
r O *un

A sample Weight and Balance Record form is included for easily keeping track of changes to the
w off
ne ic

airplane which affect weight and balance (such as installation or removal of optional equipment).
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*

AIRPLANE WEIGHING PROCEDURES


20 *
13

It may be necessary to occasionally weigh the airplane to keep the Basic Empty Weight current. All changes
Al

to the airplane affecting weight and balance are the responsibility of the airplane's operator.
lR
ig

Configuration
ht
s
R

The airplane must be weighed in the following configuration:


es
er

1. Oil
ve

Oil tanks should be full. Total engine oil is 19 pounds at an ARM of 44.18 inches. A small portion of
d

this oil is undrainable (4 pounds at an ARM of 48.6 inches).

2. Fuel
The unusable fuel quantity should be in the fuel tanks. This amounts to 12 pounds at an ARM of
112.2 inches.

3. Hydraulic Fluids
Check for full hydraulic fluids. Service as required.

4. Wing Flaps
The wing flaps should be retracted.

5. Doors
All doors closed.

Issued: 1 October 1976 6-3


SECTION VI PilOT'S ROCKWELL
WEIGFIT AND BALANCE/ OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
EQUIPMENT LIST 114

6. Parking Brake
The parking brake should be relAased.

7. Gust Locks
Any external gust locks should be removed from the control surfaces. The control lock must be
installed in order to keep the elevator streamlined.

8. Pilot and Front Passenger Seat Position


Seats should be located per Weight and Balance Statement (Form No. AC 1751) with the seat backs
in a vertical position (see Figure 6-2).

9. Installed Equipment
Installed equipment should be checked against the airplane equipment list and/or superseding forms.
All installed equipment must be in its proper place during weighing.

Fuel Draining

Drain fuel system in accordance with the Airplane Maintenance Manual.


C
op

After the airplane fuel tanks have drained, 12 pounds (1 Gal. per tank) of fuel must be added for
y
rig

the weighing.
ht
C

Leveling
om

Leveling can be accomplished as follows:


m
an
de *

1. Lateral
Lateral leveling is accomplished by placing a spirit level across the lower outside surface of the
r O *un

between station 62.50 and 97.60 and deflating the tire or strut on the high side of the airplane
w off

until the bubble in the spirit level is centered.


ne ic
rs ial

2. Longitudinal
G co
ro p

Longitudinal leveling is accomplished by placing a spirit level on the lower fuselage between
up y*

stations 62.50 and 97.60 in a fore and aft position. Inflating or deflating the nose tire or strut
raises or lowers the nose of the airplane as required until the bubble of the spirit level is
20 *

centered.
13
Al
lR

Scale Capacity
ig
ht

A scale with a minimum capacity of 1000 pounds is required under each main landing gear wheel. A scale
s

with at least a 500 pound capacity should be used under the nose wheel.
R
es
er

The scales should be properly calibrated and certified.


ve
d

Scale Location

Weighings should always be made in an enclosed area, free of air currents.

Measuring

Stretch a line between the centers of the main gear (from centerline of left axle to centerline of right axle).
:\1:easure directly fore and aft along the airplane centerline to each side of the nose gear centerline and average
the measurements. This is the distance "L" used in the Airplane Weight and Balance Statement (Form No.
AC 1751).

6-4 Issued: 1 October 1976


ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION VI
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK WEIGHT AND BALANCE/
114 EQUIPME:r-.l LIST

SECTION VI

WEIGHT AND BALANCE/EQUIPMENT LIST


The following information is applicable to Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Page
Ii'll'RODUCTION .......................... 6-1 WEIGHT AND BALANCE INSTRUCTIONS 6-2
C
op

AIRCRAFT WEIGHING ..................... 6-1 WEIGHT AND BALANCE REPORT ............ 6-2
Procedures ............................ 6-1
y rig
ht
C
om
m
an
de *

INTRODUCTION
r O *un
w off
ne ic

This section describes the procedure for establishing the aircraft Weight, Moment and Center of Gravity (C .G.).
rs ial

Procedures for calculating Weight, Moment and C. G. for various operations are also included in this section.
G co
ro p

A list of optional equipment for your specific aircraft can be found in the Weight and Balance Report (Form
up y*

AC 1678). This list consists of optional equipment, the weight, moment and center of gravity for items in-
20 *

stalled at the time of factory cerillication.


13
Al
lR

AIRCRAFT WEIGHING
ig
ht
s
R

PROCEDURES
es
er

1. Preparation:
ve

a. Inflate struts and tires to recommended pressures.


d

b. Remove all drainable fuel from wing fuel tanks.


c. With aircraft in ground attitude, fill sump to 8 quart level.
d. Move forward seats to the full forward position and place all seat backs in vertical position.
e. Install control lock to position all controls in neutral.
f. Fully retract wing flaps and close cabin doors.

2. Leveling:
a. Place scale under each wheel (500 lbs nose, 1000 lbs each main, minimum weight capacity).
b. Deflate nose tire to level ai rcraft as necessary.
c. Level datum is the forward floorboard.

3. Weighing:
With the aircraft level and brakes released, record the weight shown on each scale. Deduct the
tare, if any, from each reading.

Issued: 21 February 1976 6-1


Pt:)"{riC:!QN' 1 Ot"'t{)hOT" 1Q71=t
SECTION \11 PILOT'S ROCKWELL
WEIGHT AND BALANCE/ OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
EQUIPMENT LIST 114

4. Measuring:
Stretch a line between the centers of the main gear. Measure directly fore and aft along the aircraft
centerline from the main gear centerline to each side of the nose gear centerline and average the mea-
surements. This is the Distance L used in the Aircraft Weight and Balance Report.

5. U sing; the weights from step 3. and the measurements from step 4. the aircraft weight and C. G. can be
determined. The factory Weight and Balance Report (Form AC 1678) may be followed as an example.

WEIGHT AND BALANCE INSTRUCTIONS

The following information \\Jill enable you to operate your Rockwell Commander 114 within the prescribed weight
and balance limitations.

To compute accurate Weight and Balance for your particular aircraft, use the Loading Schedule Example, Air-
craft \Veight and Moment Tables and the Weight and Moment Allowables Envelope included in the Aircraft Weight
and Balance Report (Form AC 1678) provided with each individual aircraft.
C
op

Using the Loading Sub-Total Weight and Moment from the Weight and Balance Report (Form AC 1678), add the
y rig

additional Weight and Moment of passengers and baggage. Enter these two values to the Weight and Moment
ht

Allowables limitations (Page 3 of Weight and Balance Report) to determine if the aircraft falls within the Weight
C

and Balance Envelope for the Zero Fuel Weight condition. Add the additional Weight and Moment of fuel and
om

enter these two values to the Weight and Moment Allowables Limitations to determine if the loaded aircraft
falls \vithin the Weight and Balance Envelope.
m
an
de *
r O *un

NOTE
w off

The loading sub-total and loading schedule (example)


ne ic

assumes an occupant weight of 170 Ibs. Allowance


rs ial

must be made for occupant weight variation.


G co
ro p
up y*

WEIGHT AND BALANCE REPORT - To be inserted by Ouality Control for each individual aircraft
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

6-2 Issued: 21 February 1976


ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION VI
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK WEIGHT AND BALANCE/
114 EQUIPMENT LIST

The following information IS applicable to Serial Numbers 14150 and Subsequent.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Page
INTRODUCTION ............... 6-3 LOADING GRAPH .................... 6-8
AffiPLANE WEIGHING PROCEDURES . 6-3 CABIN STATION DIAGRAM ...... 6-9
WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD . 6-5 AffiCRAFT OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS
SAMPLE WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD . 6-6 (WEIGHT AND MOMENT ALLOWABLES) . 6-9
WEIGHT AND BALANCE DETERMINATION WEIGHT AND BALANCE STATEMENT/
FOR FLIGHT . 6-6 EQUIPMENT LIST 6-9
C
op

INTRODUCTION
y
rig
ht
C

This section provides procedures for establishing the airplane's basic empty weight, moment and
om

center of gravity (C.G.). Procedures for determining the weight and balance for flight are included.
m
an

This section includes weight and balance information on all items of eqUipment installed on the airplane as it
de *

was delivered from the factory. Required and optional equipment items are identified as such.
r O *un

A sample Weight and Balance Record form is included for easily keeping track of changes to the
w off
ne ic

airplane which affect weight and balance (such as installation or removal of optional equipment).
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*

AIRPLANE WEIGHING PROCEDURES


20 *
13

It may be necessary to occasionally weigh the airplane to keep the Basic Empty Weight current. All
Al

to the airplane affecting weight and balance are the responsibility of the airplane's operator.
lR
ig

Configuration
ht
s
R

The airplane must be weighed in the following configuration:


es
er

1. Oil
ve

Oil tanks should be full. Total engine oil is 19 pounds at an ARM of 44.18 inches. A small portion of
d

this oil is undrainable (4 pounds at an ARM of 48.6 inches).

2. Fuel
The unusable fuel quantity should be in the fuel tanks. This amounts to 12 pounds at an ARM of
112.2 inches.

3. Hydraulic Fluids
Check for full hydraulic fluids. Service as required.

4. Wing Flaps
The wing flaps should be retracted.

5. Doors
All doors closed.

Issued: 1 October 1976 6-3


SECTION VI PILOT'S ROCKWELL
WEIGlIT AND BALANCE/ OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
EQUIPMENT LIST 114

6. Parking Brake
The parking brake should be released.

7. Gust Locks
Any external locks should be removed from the control surfaces. The control lock must be
installed in order to the elevator streamlined.

8. Pilot and Front Passenger Seat Position


Seats should be located per Weight and Balance Statement (Form No. AC 1751) with the seat backs
in a vertical position (see Figure 6-2).

9. Installed Equipment
Installed equipment should be checked against the airplane equipment list and/or superseding forms.
All installed equipment must be in its proper place during weighing.

Fuel Draining

Drain fuel system in accordance with the Airplane Maintenance Manual.


C
op

After the airplane fuel tanks have drained, 12 pounds (1 Gal. per tank) of fuel must be added for
y
rig

the weighing.
ht
C

Leveling
om
m

Leveling can be accomplished as follows:


an
de *

1. Lateral
r O *un

Lateral leveling is accomplished by plaCing a spirit level across the lower outside surface of the
fuselage between station 62.50 and 97.60 and deflating the tire or strut on the high side of the airplane
w off

until the bubble in the spirit level is centered.


ne ic
rs ial

2. Longitudinal
G co
ro p

Longitudinal leveling is accomplished by placing a spirit level on the lower fuselage between
up y*

stations 62.50 and 97.60 in a fore and aft position. Inflating or deflating the nose tire or strut
raises or lowers the nose of the airplane as required until the bubble of the spirit level is
20 *

centered.
13
Al
lR

Scale Capacity
ig
ht

A scale with a minimum capacity of 1000 pounds is required under each main landing gear wheel. A scale
s

with at least a 500 pound capacity should be used under the nose wheel.
R
es
er

The scales should be properly calibrated and certified.


ve
d

Scale Location

Weighings should always be made in an enclosed area, free of air currents.

Measuring

Stretch a line between the centers of the main gear (from centerline of left axle to centerline of right axle).
::\1easure directly fore and aft along the airplane centerline to each side of the nose gear centerline and average
the measurements. This is the distance "L" used in the Airplane Weight and Balance Statement (Form No.
AC1751).

6-4 Issued: 1 October 1976


ROCKWELL PILOT'S
SECTION VI
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK WEIGHT AND BALANCE/
114 EQUIPMENT LIST

Weighing

1. Note the weights indicated on each scale and record them under the scale reading column of the
Airplane Weight and Balance Statement (Form No. AC 1751).

2. Determine any scale error (if known) and/or tare and record them in the appropriate columns.

3. Scale error and/or tare should be added or subtracted from their respective scale readings to
determine net weights. The net weights are then totaled to arrive at the aircraft's total weight.

Basic Empty Weight and C. G. Calculations

1. Add measurement L (Distance between main gear and nose gear) to 39.00 inches. This distance
determines the arm of the main gears and becomes distance D of the Airplane Weight and Balance
Statement (Form No. AC 1751).

NOTE
All measurements are in inches.
C
op
y

2. Formula:
rig
ht

C. G. " D - (F x L)
C

-W-
om
m

WHERE: F " Nose Gear Net Weight


an

L" Distance between Main Gear and Nose Gear


de *

D" Distance between Main Gear and Datum (39.0 + L)


r O *un

W" Total Airplane Weight


w off
ne ic

3. After the total airplane weight and C. G. have been determined, enter these figures in the airplane
rs ial

(as weighed) row and under the Weight and C. G. Arm column of the Airplane Weight and Balance
G co

Statement.
ro p
up y*

4. The total airplane moment is determined by multiplying the total airplane weight by its C. G. arm.
20 *

Enter this number in the airplane (as weighed) row under the moment column.
13

5. The Basic Empty Weight, C. G. and moment are determined from the Airplane as weighed by
Al

addition of the Weight and Moment of any ballast, if required.


lR
ig
ht

WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD


s
R
es
er

At the time of delivery, Rockwell International provides the necessary weight and balance data to compute
ve

individual loadings. All subsequent changes in airplane weight and balance are the responsibility of the
d

airplane owner and/or operator.

The ballast requirements are determined from the airplane as weighed condition. If ballast is required,
due to factory installed optional equipment, it will be included in the basic empty weight. Any changes in
equipment which are made by the owner should be entered on the Weight and Balance Records of the airplane
and ballast requirements checked to assure thai the airplane is still within the C. G. Envelope.

Issued: 1 October 1976 6-5


SECTION VI PILOT'S ROCKWELL
WEIGHT AND BALANCE/ OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
EQUIPMENT LIST 114

SAMPLE WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD

AI RPLANE MODEL
I SERIAL NUM8ER I PAGE NUMBER

WEIGHT CHANGE
ITEM NO. RUNNING BASIC
! DESCRIPTION
REMOVED EMPTY WEIGHT
OF
ADDEO (+/ H
DATE
ARTICLE OR MODIFICATION WT. ARM MOMEN WT. ARM MOMENT WT, MOMENT
IN OUT
(lb.) (In.) /1000 (lb,) (In.) /1000 (lb.) 11000

..
C
op
yr
ig
ht
C
om
m
an
de
r O **un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
R l
ig

i
ht
s
R
es

WEIGHT AND BALANCE DETERMINATION FOR FLIGHT


er
ve

To assure acceptable stability, control, performance and adherence to structural limitations, it is essential
d

that the aircraft be loaded within the limits defined by the flight envelope. This is the pilot's responsibility
and should be accomplished prior to each flight.

This section will present information and procedures appropriate to the determination of the aircraft's weight
and center of gravity for flight.

The procedure presented will center around a sample loading schedule example (Page 2 of Airplane Weight
and Balance Statement (Form No. AC 1751) composed of a seven-step process. The steps will be explained
~ the same order as they appear on the Airplane Weight and Balance Statement (Form No. AC 1751). For the
Weight and Balance calculations, the flight envelope in this section is defined in terms of weight and moment/
1000.

6-6 Issued: 1 October 1976


ROCKWELL PilOT'S SECTION VI
COM;\fANDFR OPERATING HANDBOOK WEIGHT AND BALANCE/
114 EQUIPMENT LIST

Procedure

1. Airplane Basic Empty Weight

Determine the airplanes basic empty weight and moment/IOOO. This information should be
available from tile Weight and Balance Records. Enter these numbers in the Item I row under

tile appropriate columns of tile Airplane Weight and Balance Statement (Form No. AC 1751).

2. Pilot and Front Passenger

Determine the weight of the pilot, tilen refer to tile loading graph (Figure 6-1) to determine
the moment/lOOO value. Enter tilese numbers in tile Item 2 row under tile appropriate columns

of tile Airplane Weight and Balance Statement.

NOTE
The moment/lOOO values for tile pilot and front passenger depicted
on tile loading graph are based on a nominal front seat location of
99.0 inches. This location should be representative of most loadings;
C

however, if it is known tilat the front seat(s) will be located at some


op

otiler position, tile moment/IOOO can be calculated as follows:


yrig
ht

a. Determine the front seat(s) location with


C

respect to a Fuselage Station. (Front seat


om

F.S. travels are depicted in Figure 6-2).


m
an

b. The moment/lOOO value is determined by


multiplying the total weight to be placed on
de *

tilese seats by tile F. S. location of tile seat(s)


r O *un

and then dividing by 1000.


w off
ne ic

c. Enter tile weight and moment/lOOO in tile Item 2


rs ial

row under tile appropriate columns of tile Airplane


G co

Weight and Balance Statement.


ro p
up y*

3. Rear Seat Passengers


20 *
13

Determine tile weight of tile passengers tilen refer to tile loading graph (Figure 6-1) to determine the
Al

moment/lOOO value, using tile proper loading lines. Enter tile weight and tile moment/lOOO under
lR

the appropriate columns of tile Item 3 row of tile Airplane Weight and Balance Statement.
ig


ht

4. Cargo and/or Baggage


s
R
es

Determine tile weight of cargo and/or baggage to be carried, then refer to the loading graph
er

(Figure 6-1) to determine the moment/lOOO value. It must be noted that tile loading graph for tile
ve

baggage assumes a fixed fuselage station location of 164.0 inches; however, at times it might be
d

desirable to carry baggage in different areas of tile baggage compartment or tile cabin. Should tilis be
the case, refer to Figure 6- 2 to determine tile fuselage station location, tilen calculate tile moment!
1000 by using tile same procedure explained in Step No.2. Enter tile weights and moment/lOOO values
in Row 4 under tile appropriate columns of tile Airplane Weight and Balance Statement.

5. Zero Fuel Weight

Add the columns of Rows 1-4 of tile Airplane Weight and Balance Statement. These subtotals become

the zero fuel weight and moment. Refer to the flight envelope (Figure 6-3) to determine that these
weight and moment limitations have not been exceeded. Any weight carried above tile maximum zero
fuel weight must be in the form of fuel. Should your calculations at this point show that you have
exceeded the zero fuel weight limitations, the load must be redistributed or removed to stay within
the maximum limits. Passengers and baggage can be added as long as tileir combined weights and
moments do not exceed the zero fuel weight limits.

Remember: Zero Fuel Weight = Aircraft Basic Empty Weight + Pilot, Passengers, and Baggage.

Issued: 1 October 1976 6-7


Revised: 3 March 1977
SECTION VI PILOT'S ROCKWELL
WEIGHT AND BALANCE/ OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
EQUIPMENT UST 114
6. Fuel Load

Determine the fuel requirements for flight in pounds (assume 6. a Lbs/Gal for aviation type fuel),
then refer to the loading graph to determine the moment/lOOO value. Enter these values under the
appropriate columns of the Item Number 6 row of the Weight and Balance Statement.

NOIE
The maximum gross weight will dictate the amount of fuel that can be carried.

7. Takeoff Weight

Total (the columns of) Items 5 and 6 of the Airplane Weight and Balance Statement to get takeoff weight
and moment/lOaD. Check to assure that the gross weight and the moment/lOOO values are contained
within the flight envelope (See Figure 6-3).

I WARNING I
C
op

TAKEOFFS WITH THE WEIGHT AND/OR MOMENT/lOOO OUTSIDE


y
rig

THE FLIGHT OR ZERO FUEL ENVELOPES ARE PROffiBITED.


ht
C
om

LOADING GRAPH
m
an
de *
r O *un
w off

400
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p

350
up y*
20 *
13

300
Al

rd
lR

...:l
ig
ht

( 250
s
R

Eo<
es

::r::
er

C)
;...; 200
ve

til
~
d

~
til
Eo< 150
.....

100

50

MOMENT/lOOO .-..., IN-LBS

Figure 6-1. loading Graph


6-8 Issued: 1 October 1976
Revised: 3 March 1977
ROCKWELL PilOT'S SECTION VI
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK WEIGHT AND BALANCE/
114 EQUIPMENT LIST

CABIN STATION DIAGRAM

'FRONT SEAT TRAVELS BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT WEIGHT LIMITS


MAXIMUM FORWARD TRAVEL' F.S 90,0 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WEIGHT IN
MAXIMUM AFT TRAVEL, F,S, 102,0 8AGGAGECOMPARTMENT200LBS

..J f- ..J
0 ..J
UJ
z ..JC>
...J

_0)
"- I-~o s:
..J
"- ov.i UJ ' UJ
Uu. Wt:)<D t:)
s:
UJ
f-
z VlZ~
UJ a:UJ t:)
a: ::;;: Ulv.i t:)
f-0
u. :;:), uJ(/)u.:
a::;t
a::f- i 0'"
..JC'l
C!l
f-
(/') 0:0 u..
?:: u.
C
op
y
rig
ht

FUSELAGE STATION 62,5 80,0 123,0 148,0 164,0 178.0


C

",,,-I
om

" " DOD'


m
an
de *
r O *un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR

XIS 17
ig
ht

Figure 6-2. Cabin Station Diagram


s
R
es
er
ve

AIRCRAFT OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS - See Figure 6-3.


d

WEIGHT AND BALANCE STATEMENT - To be inserted by Quality Control for each individual airplane.

Issued: 1 October 1976 6-9


SECTION VI PILOT'S ROCKWELL
WEIGHT AND BALANCE/ OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
EQUIPMENT UST 114

AIRCRA IT OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS

WEIGHT AND MOME!'-.'T ALLOWABLES


(OPEHATION OUTSIDE MIN. AND MAX. VALUES IS PHOHIBITED)
(GEAR HETRACTION MOMEl'.'T ACCOUNTED FOR)

NOTE: UTILITY CATEGORY APPLICABLE TO SERIAL NUMBERS 14000 THRU 14254 WITH
CUSTOM KIT NO. CK1141 INSTALLED, AND SERIAL NUMBERS 14255 AND SUBS.

3200
NOR,\'AL CATEGORY l
3000
C

i'-<
op

:t:
U
y

~ 2800
rig

;:::
ht

t;.:l
C

:s
om

2600
m

P;
an

0:::
......
de *

<: 2400
r O *un

Q
:.J
w off

Q
ne ic

(5 2200
rs ial

....:l
G co
ro p
up y*

200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360


20 *

LOADED AIRPLANE MOMENT /1000 INCH LBS


13
Al
lR

3200 r---------~--------~------ __ ----~ __ ----~--_,


ig
ht

UTILITY CATEGORY
s
R
es

3000
er

i'-<
:t:
ve

C)
......
d

w 2800
;:::

2000 ~ __ ~ ____ __ ____ ____


~ ~ ~ L-~~ ____ ~ __ ~~ __ ~

180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360
LOADED AIRPLANE MOMENT /1000 INCH LBS

Figure 6-3. Airplane Operational limitations


6-10 Issued: 1 October 1976
Revised: 6 Anril 1977
ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION VII
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK AIRPLANE AND SYSTEMS
114 DESCRIPTIONS

SECTION VII

AIRPLANE AND SYSTEMS DESCRIPTIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Page
GENERAL ............................... . 7-2 Ignition System ......................... 7-14
C

7-2
op

AIRFRAl'vlE ............................... . Induction Air System .................... 7-14


Fuselage .............................. . 7 -2 Exhaust System ......................... 7-14
yrig

Cabin Doors ........................... . 7-2 Fuel Injection System .......... '" ...... 7-14
ht

CloSing Door In Flight .................. . 7-2 Engine Cowling ........................ 7-15


C

Seats ................................. 7-3 Baffles Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7-15


om

Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses ...... 7-3 Starter ................................ 7-15
m

Baggage Door ......................... . 7-4 Accessories ............................ 7-15


an

Baggage Compartment ................. 7-4 Fuel Pump .......................... 7-15


de *

\Ving ................................. . 7-4 Vacuum Pump ...................... 7-15


r O *un

Empennage ........................... 7-4 Engine Mount .......................... 7 -15


FLIGHT CONTROLS .................... 7-5 PROPELLER .... 7-15
w off
ne ic

Control Lock .......................... 7-5 Propeller Governor ................... 7-16


rs ial

Flap Control System ................... 7-5 FUEL SYSTEM ......................... 7-16


7-5
G co

Aileron Control System ................. . Fuel Filler Caps ........................ 7-17


ro p

Aileron Trim Tab ...................... 7-5 Fuel Filters and Drain Valves ............ 7-17
up y*

Elevator Control System ............... 7-6 Fuel Selector Valve ................... 7-17
20 *

Elevator Trim System ................. 7-6 Auxiliary Fuel Pump ..................... 7-17
Rudder Control System ................. 7-6
13

Fuel Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17


Rudder Trim System ................... . 7-6 Fuel Contamination ................... 7-18
Al

GROUND CONTROL ...................... 7 -6 Fuel Tank Vent System ................. 7-18


lR

LANDING GEAR .......................... . 7 -6 Fuel Quantity Indicators ............... 7-18


ig

INSTHU:\lENTS ........................... . 7-7 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ..................... , 7-18


ht

7 -7
s

Flight Instruments ..................... . Landing Gear ExtenSion/Retraction System. 7-18


R

Pitot Pressure System .................. 7-10 Position Indicator Lights and Gear
es

Static Pressure System ................. . 7-10 Warning Light ....................... 7-18


er

Alternate Static Source Valve ............ . 7-11 Landing Gear Position Handle ....... ,. 7-20
ve

Stall Warning System ................... . 7-11 Gear Down Ground Contact (Squat)
d

ENGINE .............................. 7-11 Switch ...................... 7-20


Engine Controls ....................... . 7-11 Emergency Gear Extension Valve ...... 7-20
Engine Instruments .................... 7-11 Brake System .................... 7-20
Tachometer ................. 7-11 Hydraulic Brake System ...... 7-20
Oil Temperature Indicator ........... 7-11 Parking Brake System ........... 7-20
Oil Pressure Gage .................. 7-12 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM .................... 7-20
Manifold Pressure/Fuel Flow Master Switch ..................... 7-21
Gage ........................ 7-12 Ammeter ................ 7-21
Fuel Pressure Gage ............... 7-12 Voltmeter .................... 7-21
Cylinder Head Temperature .......... 7-12 Circuit Breakers ................. 7-21
Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) Gage ... 7-13 Alternator ................ 7-21
Proper Operation and Care of Engine .... 7-13 External Power ............... 7-21
Break -in ......................... 7-13 Lighting Systems ........... 7-23
On Going ........................ 7-13 'Exterior Lighting .................... 7-23
Engine Lubrication ............... 7-13 Interior Lighting . . . . . . 7-23
Engine Oil Screens ................... 7-14 ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEM .......... 7-24
Oil Pressure Gage ............ 7-14 Cabin Heat and Ventilation Schematic .. 7-24
Oil Temperature Indicator ........ 7-14 Heating and Ventilation System .. 7-24

Issued: 21 February 1976 7-1


Revised: 1 October 1976
SECTION VII PilOT'S ROCKWELL
AffiPLANE AND SYSTEMS OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
DESCRIPTIONS 114

GENERAL

The l'.Iudel1l4 is a four-place, low-wing, all-metal retractable gear aircraft powered by a six cylinder, nor-
mally Lycumins ellslne that is equipped with a Hartzell all metal constant- two-bladed propeller.
Access to the cabin interior is through two lockable cabin doors, one in each side of the aircraft. The cabin in-
terior is sectioned wio four seating areas a center console which houses engine and propeller controls, ele-
vator trim control wheel and passenger convenience items.

Standard overhead console equipment includes separately adjustable ventilation outlets, and four reading lights.
All primary and supporting flight instruments are located on the left side of the main panel; engine and fuel sys-
tem indicators are located in the left instrument subpanel. Avionics packages, ventilation controls and electri-
cal system circuit breakers are grouped on the right side of the main instrument and sub panels.

The aircraft is equipped with a retractable tricycle landing gear system, and incorporates a steer able nose
wheel and toe-operated hydraulic disc brakes.
C

AIRFRAME
op
yr
ig

FUSELAGE
ht
C

The fuselage consists of the nose section, center section anQ aft section. The nose section, extending from
om

fuselage station 22.00 to 62.50, houses the power plant and retractable nose landing gear. Nose landing gear
m

doors, which open and close as the gear is extended or retracted, form an aerodynamically smooth nose section
an

during flight. The nose section is joined to the center fu selage section at fuselage station 62.50, which is also
de

the location of the firewall. The center fuselage, which contains the main cabin area and baggage com-
r O **un

partment, e:<.'iends from fuselage station 62.50 to 178.00 where it is joined to the aft fuselage section. The cen-
w off

ter section houses the seats for pilot and three passengers, and has two doors that afford easy access
ne ic

to entering the aircraft from either side. The pilots area is equipped with a wide-vision windshield and large
rs ial

door windows to assure maximum pilot visibility during flight. The aft fuselage section, extending from fuse-
G co

lage station 178.00 to 263.00, is permanently secured to the center fuselage section and provides structural
ro p

attachment points for the empennage flight surfaces and controls. This section houses the battery, hydraulic
up y*

power pack unit and various control surface cables. The entire fuselage is designed to assure a strong safety
20 *

for all flight conditions and to provide attaching structures for the wing and empennage. Sturdy alum-
13

inum flooring supported by longitudinal beams and bulkheads extends from the firewall aft through the baggage
compartment. The center wing structure is attached to the fuselage so that a part of the wing torque is absorbed
Al
l

by the fuselage structure. The aft tail cone is capped by a fiberglass stinger containing mounts for a tail navi-
R

p~ion lil';ht and lens assembly, and a tail tie-down ring mounted in the vertical fin portion of the cap.
ig
ht
s
R

CABIN DOORS (SIN 14000 thru 14349)


es
er

The aircr:lit is equipped with two all-metal cabin doors. Each door has three (3) latch points, the center and
ve

lower latches are slam-type with spring-loaded, over-center mechanisms, and these engage when doors are
d

closed. The upper latch is a cam -actuated over-center latch, and the handle must be rotated aft to engage the
latch. after door has been closed. If lower door handle has more than 1/8 to 1/4-inch free play, door is not
adequately latched. Locks are incorporated into the exterior cabin door handles, and doors may be securely
locked when aircraft is parked. The pilot's door has a key lock, the passenger door has a plunger-type lock
and either door may be locked before it is closed. The pilot's cabin door has a vent window (passenger vent
window is optional) which may be opened in flight, however airspeed is restricted to 130K with vent window open.

'LOSING DOOR IN FLIGHT (SIN 14000 thru 14349)

The following procedure should be followed when attempting to close door in flight:

1. Slow airspeed to 80 knots.


2. Unlatch upper door latch.
3. Open vent window (if installed) .
4. Force door open approximately four (4) inches and slam door shut.
5. Verify door is closed.

7-2 Issued: 21 February 1976


Revised: 16 December 1977
HOCKWELL PilOT'S SECTION VII
CO\Il\1A0;DEH OPERATING HANDBOOK AIRPLA~E AND SYSTEMS
114 DESCRIPTIONS

NOTE
If lower door handle has more than 1/8 to 1/4-inch free play, door is
not adequately latched, Repeat steps 1. thru 5.

6. S('cure upper door latch.

CABIN DOORS (SIN 14350 and SUBS)

These airplanes are equipped "ith two all-metal cabin doors. Each door has three latch points. The center
and lower latches are bayonet-type pins which extend into receptacles in the door frame in the latched position.
These pins are extended and retracted by a lever operated, over-center, cam type mechanism. The upper
latch is a cam-actuated over-center latch, and the latch handle must be rotated aft to engage the latch.

Exterior door handles are recessed and must be lifted out and rotated up to retract the pins. When opening the
door, unlatch the upper latch before releasing the lower latches; when closing the door, engage the lower pins
C

first, before engaging the upper latch.


op
yr

I
To close the doors from the inside, pull door closed using built in armrest, hold door in closed position, and
ig

rotate black lever arm forward and down to engage the pins. It is not necessary to slam the door. With lower
ht

pins engaged, rotate the upper latch handle to the CLOSE position.
C
om

I
A Sliding metal pin, located at the aft end of the armrest on both entrance doors, may be used to lock the doors
m

from the inside. Sliding the metal pin aft \Vith the door closed and latched, mechanically locks both the inner
an

and outer door handles in the closed poSition. The pin must be in the forward position for the door to be opened.
de

Recommend the pin be left in the forward (unlocked) pOSition during all ground operation and during takeoff and
r O **un

landing.
w off
ne ic

To open the doors from the inside, rotate upper latch handle to the OPEN position; slide the metal pin forward
rs ial

to unlock the door mechanism, if necessary, and rotate the black lever up to release the door pins.
G co
ro p

A locking mechanism, controlled by a spring-loaded plunger type pin, prevents moving the exterior door handle,
up y*

or the interior lever, to the latched poSition when the door is open. The plunger releases the locking mechanism
20 *

when the door is closed.


13
Al

A key operated lock is located in the pilot's entrance door. The right entrance door must be locked from the
l

inside using the sliding pin.


R
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

Issued: 16 December 1977 7-2A/7-2B


ROCKWELL PilOT'S SECTION VII
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK AIRPLANE AND SYSTEMS
114 DESCRIPTIONS

SEATS

Pilot and passenger seats are bucket type with inclividually adjustable backrests. The recliner control handle
is located on the lower, aft, outboard corner of each seat. To reposition backrests, lift handle and simultan-
eously move backrest to desired position, then release handle. In addition to the adjustable backrests the pilot
and front passenger seats are adjustable fore and aft, and rise slightly when moved forward. To repositIOn
seats, lift handle, which is located in the center of and just below each seat, move seat to desired position, and
release handle. When repositioning seats and/or backrests always check to ascertain that locking mechanisms
have properly engaged after adjustments have been completed.

SEAT BELTS AND SHOULDER HARNESSES

Lap belts incorporate quick release metal to metal buckles and length adjustments on both inboard and outboard
halves of belt. Belts should be adjusted to pOSition buckle over inboard hip of wearer (see Figure 7-1). Lap
belts may be released by lifting upper half of buckle.
C
op
yr
ig
ht

SHOULDER HARNESS
C
om
m
an
de
r O **un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13

INBOARD HALF
Al

OF SEAT BELT
l
R
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve

Figure 7-1. Shoulder Harness Secured


d

Inertia reel-type shoulder harnesses are installed on the pilot's and front passenger seats (installation for rear
seats is optional). The inertia restraint system provides pilot and passenger mobility without undue restriction
or constant adjustment of the harnesses. After the harness strap is extended from the seat back and secured to
the seat belt the inertia reel will permit free movement, so long as a sudden forward movement is not attempted.
Sudden forward movement will automatically lock the inertia reel and shoulder harness to provide restraint. To
check the inertia reel locking device, give the shoulder harness a quick jerk. Relaxing forward pressure will
unlock the inertia reel.

Issued: 21 February 1976 7-3


Rpvi sPri: 1 fi np(,pmhpr 1 CJ77
SECTIO)'-; VII PILOT'S ROCKWELL
AIRPLANE AND SYSTEMS OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
DESCRIPTIONS 114

To secure the shoulder harness, refer to Figure 7 -1, fasten the seat belt first. Extend the harness strap over
the shoulder and lengthen sufficiently to allow the harness end to reach the seat belt. Secure by snapping the
harness end plate over the metal stud located on the slotted half of the seat belt. To release the harness assem-
bly quickly. simply unlatch the seat belt and allow the reel to retain the harness and seat belt portion against the
seat back.

BAGGAGE DOOR

I
The baggage door is of all-metal construction, and is located aft of the wing on the left side of the aircraft.
Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149 - the door is equipped with a keyed rotary-type lock, and must be opened
and closed using the key. Serial Numbers 14150 and Subsequent - the door is equipped with a spring-loaded
latch assembly in addition to the keyed rotary-type lock. The key can be removed in either the locked or un-
locked IX)sition.

NOTE
If the baggage door is to remain open for an extended period of time,
the baggage door light circuit breaker should be pulled to prevent de-
C
op

pleting the battery.


yrig
ht

BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
C
om

The baggage compartment is located in the aft most portion of the cabin area of the aircraft. Access is through
m

the baggage door on the left side of the aircraft, or through the cabin area behind the rear passenger seats .
an

Volume of the baggage compartment is twenty two (22) cubic feet and maximum baggage is restricted to two
de *

hundred (200) pounds. When loading the aircraft, refer to the Weight and Balance section of the Pilots Operating
r O *un

Handbook to assure that aircraft loading meets all requirements and restrictions. All loads should be securely
w off

fastened using the cargo net and the tie-down rings (4) located in the corners of the baggage compartment, thus
ne ic

preventing inadvertent movement during aircraft operations.


rs ial

I I
G co
ro p

WARNING
up y*
20 *
13

Passengers should not be allowed to ride in the baggage compartment


under any circumstances.
Al
lR

Do not carry hazardous material.


ig
ht
s
R

WING
es
er

Each wing is of an all- metal stressed- skin construction incorporating spars, formed ribs and an integral fuel
ve

tank contained in a three-rib section, forward of the main spar. The main spar of each wing is joined together
d

at the center of the fuselage with spar cap splices. The wing is installed in the lower center fuselage section.
It is secured to Ule fuselage load-bearing frames and fittings by bolts and nuts at stations 85.00, 123.00 and
forward of station 148.00. Access plates located at various points on the lower skin of the wing provide access
for inspection and repair of the fuel system and the flight control cabling. Landing gear fitting/retraction me-
chanisms are installed in the basic wing structures to provide attachment points for the main landing gear. An
opening in the inboard leading edge of each wing serves as a ram air intake for the lower cabin ventilation sys-
tem. An electrically operated wing flap is installed between the fuselage and aileron on each wing. The flaps
are attached to the aft wing spar by hinge assemblies. Extension and retraction of the wing flaps is controlled
by an electrically operated jackscrew and torque tube arrangement. Metal ailerons, extending outboard from
the flaps to wing station 189.00, are attached to the aft wing spar by hinge assemblies.

EMPENNAGE

The empennage consists of the vertical and horizontal stabilizers. The vertical fin assembly is made of two
separate components; an upper assembly which is mated at the horizontal stabilizer, and a lower stub assembly
which is integral with the aft tail cone structure. A rudder control surface is attached to the vertical stabilizer

7-4 Issued: 21 February 1976


Revised: 1 October 1976
ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION VII
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK AmPLANE AND SYSTEMS
114 DESCRIPTIONS

at twCJ lunge points. A fiberglass fin cap contains provisions for mounting the VHF navigation antenna and the
flashing beacon. A ram air intake. recessed into the center of the vertical stabilizer, provides maximum C( I()1
air for in -flight cabin ventilation. The horizontal stabilizer, conSisting of a fixed stabilizer and movable eleva-
tor surface. is attached to the lower vertical stabilizer stub assembly. The horizontal and vertical stabilizers
both utilize stressed and beaded skin construction to provide maximum strength with minimum structural com-
p' ,nents. The horizontal tail is of single unit construction with a fixed forward surface and a hinged elevator
('ontrol surface. The elevator provides mounting attachment for a fiberglass tip-fairing at each outboard end for
streamlined appearance.

FLIGHT CONTROLS

CONTROL LOCK

A c(Jntrollock is provided on the pilot's control column. The control lock pin and flag assembly should be in-
serted through instrument panel control column mount and control column, after holes have been aligned. When
properly installed, the flag on the control lock will cover the starter switch. The control lock should be removed
C

before the key is inserted in starter switch, and no attempt should be made to defeat the purpose of the flag.
op
yr
ig
ht

FLAP CONTROL SYSTEM


C
om

Wing flap position is controlled by a switch labeled WING FLAPS and is mounted directly to the right of the ac-
cessory electrical switches. flap pOSition is electrically indicated by a gage mounted above and to the right of
m
an

the flap switch. Power from the electric motor is transmitted to the flaps through a jackscrew connected to a
de

torque tube, and from the torque tube to the flaps with push-pull rods. To extend the wing flaps, the wing flap
switch must be depressed and held DOWN until the desired degree of extension is reached by pilot reference to
r O **un

the flap pOSition indicator. After the desired flap extension is obtained, releaSing the switch allows it to return
w off

to the center OFF position. When flap retraction is necessary, place the switch UP. The switch will remain
ne ic

in the UP position without manual assistance due to an over-center design within the switch. With the flaps ex-
rs ial

tended in flight, placing the flap switch UP will retract the flaps in approximately 6 seconds. Gradual flap re-
G co

traction can be accomplished by intermittent operation of the flap switch to UP. Normal full flap exiension in
ro p
up y*

flight will require approximately 9 seconds. After the flaps reach maximum extension or retraction, limit
switches will automatically shut off the flap motor; however, when the flaps reach the fully retracted position,
20 *

the wing flap switch should be manually returned to the center-off position. An additional limit switch is in-
13

stalled on the flap motor drive to activate the gear warning system when flaps are extended 25 degrees or more
Al

with the landing gear retracted. No appreciable change in trim is required over the full flap extension range,
l

however minor changes in trim can be made depending on airspeed and aircraft loading. Normally there will
R
ig

be a slight nose down trim change.


ht
s
R
es

AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM


er
ve

The aileron control wheels are mechanically interconnected through a series of control chains, sprockets and
d

cables. Control cables extend aft from the control column passing under the floor structure and through idler
pulleys to a bracket assembly. The cables are then routed through the bracket assembly and out through the
wing to the aileron bellcranks. Adjustable push-pull rods connect the aileron bellcranks to the ailerons. An
aileron balance assembly is mounted on the outboard end of each aileron. The aileron and rudder control sys-
tems are interconnected by the use of a spring thus providing improved stability by aiding the coordinated appli-
cation of aileron and rudder control movements.

AILERON TRIM TAB

A fixed-position trim tab is attached to the left aileron. A left wing high attitude may be corrected by bending
the trim tab down. Bending tile tab up will correct a left wing low attitude. Use forming block when bending
tab, and do not bend more than O. 50-inch tab deflection in either direction.

Issued: 21 February 1976 7-5


SECTION VII PILOT'S ROCKWELL
AffiPLANE AND SYSTEMS OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
DESCRIPTIONS 114

ElEVA TOR CONTR Ol SYSTEM

Ea('h elevator is of all- metal construction. and is hinged at three places and attached to the aft spar of the hori-
zontal st:1biliz('r. The eleyators are operated by the fore and aft movement of the control column. Elevator
::11':n s. ~nt::1('h ed to the ('ontrol ('olumn in the console tunnel, are connected to control cables which are routed
thr()u~h :1 series of pulll'Ys to thl' elevator bellcrank. The bell crank is connected to the elevator horn with a
push-pull rod. When the contrul wheel is moved forward or aft, the cables move in opposite directions, turn-
inb the bellcral1k, which in turn pushes or pulls the control rod, causing the elevators to move up or down. Two
turnbuckles. installed in the C>levator control system between fuselage stations 205.00 and 230.50, permit con-
tn.,l c::1ble tension adjustment.

ELEVATOR TRIM SYSTEM

Controll"llie trim tabs. located on the inboard trailing edge of each elevator, are operated by an elevator trim
tab control wheel installed in the center console. A portion of the trim tab control wheel extends through the
center console, and when rotated. actuates the trim tab through a mechanical linkage of cables,
chains, jackscrew assembly and push rods that attaches to the trim tab. Turnbuckles are utilized for rigging
and adjusting cable tensions. An indicator strip, visible through a slot in the console, indicates neutral, nose
C

up or nose down pOSitions. Rotating the wheel forward, toward the nose down indicator will provide nose-down
op

t rl[!V 1'< ,t Cltion in the direction produces nose-up trim.


y

~:'-.~,~
rig

, \~;'
ht
C

RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM


om

Dual rudder- brake control pedals enable the pilot or copilot to control the rudder, brakes, and nose wheel
m
an

steering. The rudder control system consists of mechanical linkage and cables connecting the rudder pedals to
de *

the rudder. The rudder pedals are connected to rudder bars, which in turn are connected to the rudder bell-
crank with push-pull rods. Cables are attached to the bell crank and are routed aft through a series of pulleys
r O *un

to the rudder horn. When force is applied to one rudder pedal, the cables move in opposite directions, turning
w off

the rudder horn and rudder. The pedals are connected to the nose wheel steering with cables and bungee assem-
ne ic

blies which act as return springs for the rudder pedals. The rudder pedals are interconnected to the aileron
rs ial

controls "s outlined in the aileron control system.


G co
ro p
up y*

RUDDER TRIM SYSTEM


20 *
13

A TIlddC'r trim control knob, labeled RUDDER TIUM is mounted to the left of the console, below the lower edge
Al

()f the instrument panel, and manual control of trim around the vertical axis. Rotation of knob clock-
lR

wise will yaw the aircraft to the right, opposite rotation will yaw the aircraft to the left. An indicator is in-
ig

corporated in the right side of the lower instrument cluster to indicate rudder trim position.
ht
s
R
es
er

GROUND CONTROL
ve
d

The nose wheel steering system is tied in with the rudder trim systems and is controlled by movement of the
rudder brake pedals. A combination of cables, bungees, bellcranks, turnbuckles and pulleys operate the nose
wheel steering and give the aircraft a minimum turn radius of 21' 10.25". Nose steering limit ~ 30 0

LANDING GEAR

The aircraft is equipped with a hydraulically operated tricycle landing gear that includes a steerable nose wheel
and self-adjusting disc brakes for the main landing gear wheels. Landing shocks are absorbed in the nose gear
by a conventional oleo strut assembly and by an oleo strut connecting rod arrangement connected to the trailing
arm of the main landing gear. Nose wheel steering is controlled by a cable-pulley system attached to the nose
gear and to the rudder/brake pedal and actuated by depressing the rudder/brake pedals from either pilot's
position. The single-disc, dual piston hydraulic brakes are operated by individual master brake cylinders at-
tached to the rudder/brake pedals. The brakes are actuated by applying toe pressure to the top of the rudder/
brake pedals. The aircraft is also equipped with a parking brake system which operates from the master brake
cylinders and is actuated by a parking brake control knob. A shimmy dampener is attached to the fixed and
movable portions of the nose gear strut to provide a dampening action on the gear. The emergency extension

7-6 Issued: 21 February 1976


Revised: 16 December 1977
ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION VII
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK AIRPLANE AND SYSTEMS
114 DESCRIPTIONS

valve, located on the left side of center console, is used for emergency extension of the gear. This valve by-
passes hydraulic fluid directly to the reservoi;. allowing the gear to drop :)y gravity; gear extension is assisted
by down springs. The emergency gear extenso :1 knob is spring-loaded to prevent accidental operation and
must be pulled out and then pushed down to operate. The main landing gear retracts inward :md upward into the
wheel wells in the lower side of tJle wing. The nose landing gear retracts aft and upward into the wheel well.
Mechanically operated doors, connected to the landing gear by link assemblies, open and close during the ex-
tension and retraction cycle. A flat surface on the fixed portion of the nose gear keeps the landing gear cen-
tered when the gear is retracted. Retraction and extension of the landing gear is controlled by an electro-
hydraulic power pack that is actuated by the position of the landing gear selector switch mounted on the instru-
ment panel. When the landing gear selector switch is placed in the UP pOSition, the landing gear retracts
until the gear up pressure switch is actuated. When the gear up pressure switch is actuated, the hydraulic
power pack pump is shutoff and all three gear are retained in the uplock position by a hydraulic pressure lock.
A loss of 250 psi hydrauliC pressure will energize the hydraulic power pack and buildup pressure to the pres-
sure switch setting. When the landing gear selector switch is placed in the DOWN pOSition, the hydraulic
pressure lock is released and hydraulic fluid is directed to the down side of the landing gear actuator cylinders
extending the gear until the pressure switch is actuated. When the pressure switch is actuated, the hydraulk
power pack pump is shutoff and all three gear are held in the downlock position by overcenter braces assisted
by trapped hydraulic pressure. A ground contact switch, on the right main gear, will prevent landing gear
retraction while on the ground caused by an unintentional pOSitioning of the landing gear selector switch to the
C
op

UP poSition. Landing gear poSition indicators and a warning bell or horn system are provided to alert the pilot
when the landing gear is in the up, or down and locked position. Position indicators, both red and green, are in-
yr
ig

stalled in front of the pilot. The greer. lights are installed in the instrument panel and the red light is installed
ht

on the glare shield. The gear down position is indicated by three green lights above the gear selector switch.
C

The unsafe red (GEAR WARN) light, on the glareshield, indicates the gear is intransit or not fully down and
om

locked. There is no electrical indication of gear being fully retracted other than all indicator lights being
m

extinguished. When the landing gear extends to the full down pOSition, three landing gear down switches are
an

actuated causing the green lights to illuminate, indicating the gear is down and locked.
de
r O **un
w off
ne ic
rs ial

INSTRUMENTS
G co
ro p
up y*

The standard equipment instrument installation provides all instruments necessary for safe and efficient opera-
20 *

tion of the aircraft. With the exception of the magnetic compass and optional outside air temperature gage, all
instruments are installed in the main instrument panel and sub-panel areas, and are grouped according to func-
13

tion and ease of surveillance (see Figure 7 -2). Instruments are divided into three groups for discussion in
Al

this section: Flight Instruments, Engine Instruments and Miscellaneous Instruments.


l R
ig

All primary flight and gyro instruments are installed in the left side of the main instrument panel. Manifold
ht

pressure and tachometer gages are mounted in the lower center area of the main panel and the remaining engine
s
R

instruments are grouped horizontally across the left instrument sub-panel. Optional navigation and communica-
es

tions equipment is located in the center and right side of the main instrument panel. The lower right instrument
er

sub-panel contains electrical system circuit breakers and heating-ventilation control knobs.
ve
d

flIGHT INSTRUMENTS

Flight instruments consist of the magnetic compass, airspeed indicator, altimeter and, optional vacuum-
driven attitude and directional gyro. An electrically-driven turn coordinator is also available. A vertical
speed indicator is also available as part of the pitot-static instrument system. Refer to Figure 7-3. The
pitot-static system provides pitot (impact) and static (atmospheric) air pressure to the airspeed indicator, and
static air pressure to the altimeter and vertical speed indicator.

The vacuum system gyros are driven by ambient air drawn into the instrument case to replace the air evacuated
by the vacuum pump. The inlet air for the gyro instruments is filtered through the instrument vacuum air filter.

The turn-and-bank indicator is an electrically operated instrument. It is powered by the aircraft electrical sys-
tem and, therefore, operates only when the master switch is on.

Issued: 21 February 1976 7-7


R"";c,,,rl' 17 "'''hr'' .... rH 1Q7A
SECTION VII PILOT'S ROCKWELL
AffiPLANE AND SYSTEMS OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
DESCRIPTIONS 114

S/N 14000 thru 14149

55
C
op
yr
ig
ht
C
om
m
an
de

53 52 51 50 49 48 54 47 46 45 44 4342 41 40 3938 3736 35343332313029282726252423


r O **un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*

1. AIRSPEED INDICATOR 28. FLAP INDICATOR CKT BKR


20 *

2. ALTIMETER 29. STARTER AND ACCESSORIES CKT BKR


13

3. MAGNETIC COMPASS 30. STALL WARNING CKT BKR


Al

4. LANDING GEAR SA FE LIGHT 31. TURN COORDINA TOR CKT BKR


l

5. COWL FLA PS CONTROL 32. OIL TEMPERATURE CKT BKR


R
ig

- 6. FUEL PUMP S\v1TCH/CKT BKR 33. CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERA TURE CKT BKR
ht

7. PITOT HEAT SWITCH/CKT BKR 34. RIGHT FUEL QUANTITY CKT BKR
s

'U 8. ANTI-COLLISION BEACON SWITCH/CKT BKR 35. LEFT FUEL QUANTITY CKT BKR
R
es

Ir'C 9. NAVIGA TION LIGHTS SWITCH/CKT BKR 36. FLAP POSITION INDICATOR
"~c. 10.
er

INSTRUMENT LIGHTS S\V1TCH/CKT BKR 37. DEFROSTER CONTROL


ve

V~l1. LANDING LIGHT SWITCH/CKT BKR 38. CABIN HEAT CONTROL


d

12. AVIONICS MASTER SWITCH/CKT BKR 39. CABIN VENTILATION CONTROL


13. FLAP ACTUATOR 40. EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE GAGE
14. CIGAR LIGHTER 41. STATIC SOURCE SELECTOR VALVE
15. DME CKT BKR 42. LANDING GEAR SELECTOR
16. COM-NAV. 1 CKT BKR 43. RUDDER TRIM INDICA TOR
17. COM-NAV. 2 CKT BKR 44. TACHOMETER
18. TRANSPONDER CKT BKR 45. OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
19. GLIDE SLOPE CKT BKR 46. OIL PRESSURE GAGE
20. ADF CKT BKR 47. CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE GAGE
21. MARKER BEACON CKT BKR 48. IGNITION SWITCH
22. AUDIO CKT BKR 49. RIGHT FUEL QUANTITY INDICATOR
23. ALTERNATOR OUTPUT CKT BKR 50. LEFT FUEL QUANTITY INDICA TOR
24. ALTERNATOR FIELD CKT BKR 51. VOLTMETER
25. LANDING GEAR ACTUATOR CKT BKR 52. AMMETER
26. LANDING GEAR SELECTOR AND HORN 53. MASTER SWITCH
CKT BKR 54. MANIFOLD PRESSURE/FUEL FLOW GAGE
27. FLAP MOTOR CKT BKR 55. FUEL PRESSURE GAGE
56. LANDlliG GEAR WARNlliG LIGHT

Figure 7-2. Instrument Panel (Sheet 1 of 3)


7-8 Issued: 21 February 1976
Revised: 16 December 1977
ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION Vll
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK AIRPLANE AND SYSTEMS
114 DESCRIPTIONS

SIN 14150 thru 14349



4

C
op
yr
ig

35
ht
C
om
m
an

40
de
r O **un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al

1. AIRSPEED INDICATOR 20. CABIN HEAT CONTROL


l

2. ALTIl\<F:TER
R

21. CABIN VENTILATION CONTROL


ig

3. LANDING GEAR SAFE LIGHTS 22. EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE GAGE


ht

4. MAGNETIC COMPASS 23. LANDING GEAR SELECTOR


s

5. LANDING GEAR WARNING LIGHT


R

24. STATIC SOURCE SELECTOR VALVE


es

6. COWL FLAPS CONTROL 25. TACHOMETER


er

" 7. FUEL PUMP SWITCH/CKT BKR 26. RUDDER TRIM INDICATOR


ve

-18. PITOT HEAT SWITCH/CKT BKR 27. OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR


d

c-t 9. ANTI-COLLISION BEACON SWITCH/CKT BKR 28. OIL PRESSURE GAGE


i!~10. NAVIGATION LIGHTS SWITCH/CKT BKR 29. MANIFOLD PRESS./FUEL FLOW GAGE
{''ill. INSTRUMENT LIGHTS S\VITCH/CKT BKR 30. CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE GAGE
Q
[l 12. LANDING LIGHT SWITCH/CKT BKR 31. DIMMER CONTROL - AVIONICS
13. STROBE LIGHTS SWITCH/CKT BKR 32. IGNITION SWITCH
14. FLAP ACTUATOR 33. DIMMER CONTROL - INSTRUMENTS
15. CIGAR LIGHTER 34. RIGHT FUEL QUANTITY INDICATOR
16. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 35. FUEL PRESSURE GAGE
17. FLAP POSITION INDICATOR 36. LEFT FUEL QUANTITY INDICATOR
18. RADIO CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 37. VOLTMETER
19. DEFROSTER CONTROL 38. AMMETER
39. MASTER SWITCH
40. DIMMER CONTROL-CIRCUIT BREAKERS

X21010A6

Figure 7-2. Instrument Panel (Sheet 2 of 3)


Issued: 21 February 1976 7-9
Po,,; ~C'>rl" 1R f'\ClIf""oT"(\ho.,.. 1 017'7
SECTION VlI PILOT'S ROCKWELL
AIRPLANE AND SYSTEMS OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
DESCRIPTIONS 114

S!N 14350 & Subs

C
op
y
rig

35
ht
C
om
m
an
de *
r O *un
w off
ne ic

NOTE: Effective SiN 14350 and subs. , the electrically operated instruments, oil temperature (27), cylinder
rs ial

head temp. (30), right fuel quantity (34), left fuel quantity (36), voltmeter (37) and ammeter (38) will
G co

indicate at zero, or at dot, on low end of instrument scale upon complete loss of electrical power.
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al

1. AIRSPEED INDICATOR 20. CABIN HEAT CONTROL


lR

2. ALTIMETER 21. CABIN VENTILATION CONTROL


ig

3. LANDING GEAR SAFE LIGHTS 22. EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE GAGE


ht
s

4. MAGNETIC COMPASS 23. LANDING GEAR SELECTOR


R

5. LANDING GEAR WARNING LIGHT 24. STATIC SOURCE SELECTOR VALVE


es

6. ALTERNATE INDUCTION Am 25. TACHOMETER


er

7. FUEL PUMP SWITCH/CKT BKR 26. RUDDER TRIM INDICATOR


ve

L"

,j,8. PITOT HEAT SWITCH/CKT BKR 27. OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR


d

l
u- 9. ANTI-COLLISION BEACON SWITCH/CKT BKR 28. OIL PRESSURE GAGE
,,-'-'-10. NAVIGATION LIGHTS SWITCH/CKT BKR 29. MANIFOLD PRESS./FUEL FLOW GAGE
'" 11. INSTRUMENT LIGHTS SV,lITCH/CKT BKR 30. CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE GAGE
(' 12. LANDING LIGHT SWITCH/CKT BKR 31. DIMMER CONTROL - AVIONICS
13. STROBE LIGHTS SWITCH/CKT BKR 32. IGNITION SWITCH
14. FLAP ACTUATOR 33. DIMMER CONTROL - INSTRUMENTS
15. CIGAR LIGHTER 34. RIGHT FUEL QUANTITY INDICA TOR
16. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 35. FUEL PRESSURE GAGE
17. FLAP POSITION INDICATOR 36. LEFT FUEL QUANTITY INDICATOR
18. RADIO CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL 37, VOLTMETER
19. DEFROSTER CONTROL 38. AMMETER
39, MASTER SWITCH
40. DIMMER CONTROL-CIRCUIT BREAKERS

X210 lOA6

Figure 7-2, Instrument Panel (Sheet 3 of 3)


7-10 Issued: 21 February 1976
1977
R""ri<:pn' 1 f\ Opt'pmhpr
IWCKWELL PilOT'S
SECTION VII
COMrvlANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK AIRPLANE AND SYSTEMS
114 DESCRIPTIONS

1
4 5 S
2

00
op

o
yrig
ht
C
om
m

L TURN COORDINATOR (ELECTRIC) (OPTIONAL) 5. VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (OPTIONAL)


an

2. AIRSPEED INDICATOR 6. ALTIMETER


de *

3. DIRECTIONAL GYRO (VACUUM) (OPTIONAL) 7. MAGNETIC COMPASS


r O *un

4. ARTIFICIAL HORIZON (VACUUM) (OPTIONAL)


w off
ne ic

X210 lOA6
rs ial

Figure 7-3. Flight Instruments


G co
ro p
up y*
20 *

The magnetic compass is liquid-filled, with expansion provisions to compensate for temperature changes. It
13

is equipped with compensating magnets adjustable from the front of the case. Access to the compass light and
Al

the compensating magnets is provided by pivoted covers. No maintenance is required on the compass except
lR

periodic checks on a compass rose with possible adjustment of the compensating magnets.
ig
ht
s

PITOT PRESSURE SYSTEM


R
es
er

Impact pressure (pitot pressure) is sampled by the pitot tube installed near the center of the left wing on the
ve

lower surface. Pitot system tubing is routed from the pitot head, aft of the spar structure inboard to the wing
d

root and into the cabin. A drain is located eight inches left of aircraft centerline immediately aft of the spar.
From the drain, the tubing routes forward through the center console, to the instrument panel where pitot pres-
sure is transmitted to the airspeed indicator.

STATIC PRESSURE SYSTEM

The static ports are located on both sides of the aft fuselage at station 205.00. Tube routing from the static
pressure ports is up to a tee at the aircraft centerline then forward through the upper cabin upholstery to the
windshield area. The line is then routed to the alternate static valve (which doubles as a drain), then to the
instrument panel where it is coupled to the altimeter, airspeed and vertical speed indicators.

Issued: 16 December 1977 7-10A


SECTION VII PILOT'S ROCKWELL
AlRPLAt-.'E AND SYSTEMS OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
DESCRIPTIONS 114

s/.::-l 14000 thru 14349

I
::~ "~~ ;
C
op
yrig

~I ;l ~
ht
C
om

~EUiI I
m

"I~
an

J to
1
de *

T Pi

...........
r O *un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co

X24 1
ro p
up y*
20 *

SIN 14350 & Subs


13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

I ,
U
l
L
HI

I
C
H

P
...T R M

0
0
p
I


l
T
T

X
T
U
"
P l
I
P
M
R
I
C
l I L
0
S

0
0
l
LO
..
(

X24 1

Figure 7 -3A. Engine Control Pedestal


7-10B Issued: 16 December 1977
Revised: 17 Fehruarv 1971'1
ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION VII
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK AIRPLANE AND SYSTEMS
114 DESCRIPTIONS

ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE VALVE

A toggle-type alternate static source valve is installed in the instrument sub-panel directly below the landing
gear position handle. In the event that the normal external static ports become obstructed, causing erroneous
static pressure instrument readings, the alternate static source valve should be placed in the ALT position to
provide an alternate (cabin) source of static pressure. When the alternate source valve is in the ALT position,
the normal exterior static port lines, are isolated and static pressure for the airspeed indicator, altimeter and
vertical speed indicator is supplied strictly from inside the cabin.

Due to the inside cabin pressure differential, operation with the static source valve on ALT will cause the air-
speed and altimeter to read approximately nine (9) knots and 100 feet higher than normal. For detailed correc-
tions, consult the correction card installed in the aircraft.

STALL WARNING SYSTEM


NOTE
With the master switch OFF, the stall warning system is inoperative.
C

A stall warning lift detector switch is located in the leading edge of the left wing. The lift detector sv.itch is
op

set to close the circuit and sound the stall warning horn at 5 to 10 knots above aircraft stall speed. The stall
y

warning horn is located on the firewall in the cabin area. The stall warning lift detector switch is intercon-
rig

nected to the ground contact switch to prevent inadvertent actuation of the stall warning horn with aircraft on
ht

the ground.
C
om
m
an

ENGINE
de *
r O *un
w off

The aircraft is equipped with a fuel-injected Lycoming IO-540-T4A5D, (Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149 or a
ne ic

I
Lycoming IO-540-T4B5D (Serial Numbers 14150 and Subs) horizontally-opposed, 6 cylinder engine. This
rs ial

engine incorporates its own oil supply and distribution system and utilizes a separate oil cooler assembly.
G co

The engine is certified to operate on 100/130 octane (green) aviation fuel and is rated to produce 260 BHP at 2700
ro p

RPM. Aviation fuel 100 LL (blue color) is an approved alternate fuel. A Lycoming Engine Operator's Manual
up y*

is supplied with each airplane and should be consulted for complete engine specifications.
20 *
13
Al

ENGINE CONTROLS
lR

The power plant controls are located on the forward end of the center console (see Figure 7-3A) and rotate in
ig
ht

fore and aft movements. The control levers are color and shape-coded to assist in identification. Functions
s

of the control levers are, proceeding from left to right: Induction Air (black/half-round shaped), controls
R

heating of intake air to the fuel injector (S/N 14000 thru 14349); Cowl Flap (white/cube shaped), controls pOsi-
es

tion of cowl flaps (S/N 14350 and Subs); Throttle (black/round), controlling manifold pressure; Propeller Control
er
ve

(blue/crowned) which regulates engine RPM; and the Mixture Control (red/hexagonal), which manually controls
d

the fuel/air ratio. A cam type friction control lever is mounted on the right side of the control quadrant to per-
mit lOCking the control levers at a desired setting. For further Power Plant information refer to the Mainte-
nance Manual.

ENGINE INSTRUMENTS - Refer to Figure 7-4.

TACHOMETER

The tachometer is a mechanical indicator driven at half crankshaft speed by a flexible shaft. Most tachometer
difficulties will be found in the drive shaft To function properly, the shaft housing must be free of kinkS, dents
and sharp bends. There should be no bend on a radius shorter than six inches, and no bend within three inches
of either terminal. Maximum indication on tachometer should not exceed 2700 RPM (red line).

OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

The oil temperature indicator is electrically connected to a temperature sensing bulb installed on the engine.
Changes in oil temperature are sensed by the bulb and transmitted to the oil temperature indicator. The
master switch must be on for this indicator to function. Normal operating range for the oil temperature indi-
cator is 160 0 F to 245 0 F (green arc), and temperature should not exceed 245 0 F (red line).
Issued: 21 February 1976 7-11
Revised: 11 April 1980
SECTION VII PILOT'S ROCKWELL
AIRPLANE AND SYSTEMS OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
DESCRIPTIONS 114

l ('-----"1

o L------J
C
op
yr

2
ig
ht
C
om
m
an

1. FUEL PRESSlJRE GAGE 5. OIL TEMPERATURE I~'DICATOR


de

2. MANIFOLD PRESSURE/FUEL FLOW GAGE 6. T AeHOMETER


r O **un

3. CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATlJRE GAGE 7. EXHAUST GAS TErvWERATURE


4. OIL PRESSURE GAGE
w off
ne ic
rs ial

Figure 7-4. Engine Instruments


G co
ro p
up y*

OIL PRESSURE GAGE


20 *
13

The Bourdon-tube type oil pressure gage is a direct-reading gage, operated by a pressure pickup line connected
Al

to the engine main oil galley. The engine should not be operated when less than 25 PSI (red line) is indicated on
l

gage. Caution should be used when operating between 25 PSI and 60 PSI (yellow arc), and normal operating
R

I
ig

range is from 60 PSI to 90 PSI (green arc). Oil pressure should not exceed 90 PSI (red line) on airplanes SiN
ht

14000 thru 14349 or 100 PSI (red line) on airplanes SiN 14350 and subs.
s
R
es

MAAIFOLD PRESSURE/FUEL FLOW GAGE


er
ve

The manifold pressure/fuel flow gage is mounted to the left of the engine tachometer. The manifold pressure
d

half of the gage is calibrated in inches of mercury and indicates the pressure in the induction air manifold. The
fuel flow half is a fuel pressure gage calibrated to indicate gallons/hour of fuel flow. It is operated by a pres-
sure line from a fitting on the fuel injector flow divider. A red line at 27.5 gallons per hour and 9.5 PSI indi-
cates the allowable maximum fuel flow and pressure respectively.

FUEL PRESSURE GAGE

A fuel pressure gage, installed in the left side of the instrument panel, is connected by tubing to a port on the
forward side of the fuel injector and indicates the engine fuel pump pressure. Minimum and maximum allow-
able operating fuel pressures are marked by red radial lines at 14 and 45 PSI.

CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE

The cylinder head temperature indications are controlled by an electrical resistance type temperature probe
that receives power from the aircraft electrical system. The probe is installed in the hottest cylinder head
and indicates the temperature of that cylinder head. During normal operations temperatures should remain
between 2000 and 5000F (green arc) and temperatures should never be allowed to exceed 5000 F (red line).

7-12 Issued: 21 February 1976


Revised: 16 December 1977
ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION vn
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK AIRPLANE & SYSTEMS
114 DESCRIPTIONS

EXHACST GAS TEl\IPERATURE (EGT) GAGE

An EGT gage is installed in the instrument sub-panel, directly above the engine control levers . The gage is
used to aid the pilot in selecting various fuel-air mixtures for cruising flight with 75 percent power or less.
Temperature indications for the EGT gage are provided by a temperature probe installed in the exhaust manik:d.
For best power mixiure, lean to peak EGT, then enrichen lOOoF. For best economy mixture, lean to and ope-
r:]tc at peak EGT.

PROPER OPERATION AND CARE OF ENGINE

BREAK-IN

All new engines have been tested and run-in before leaving the Avco Lycoming factory, and require no further
break-in period.

To promote faster seating and improved oil control, this aircraft was delivered from the factory with a
mineral-type (non detergent) oil installed. Mineral-type oil should be used for the first fifty (50) hours only,
at which time it must be drained and replaced with detergent oil.
C
op

After the first twenty five (25) hours of operation. drain engine oil, clean suction and oil filter screens and l'(>-
yr

filter dements. Refill the sump with non-detergent oil and use until the fifty (50) hour mark is reached.
ig

or oil consumption has stabilized, then change to detergent oil conforming to specification. Also after first
ht

twenty five (25) hours of operation the normal fifty (50) hour inspection should be performed on the engine.
C
om

ON GOING
m
an

When operating the aircraft, the engine should never be allowed to exceed the speed and power ranges speeified
de

in this manual. This will prolong engine life and ensure reliability.
r O **un
w off

In addition to proper operation, pre-flight and periodic inspections should be performed, and any indications of
ne ic

leaks or malfunctions should be corrected before they can develop into major problems. Careful attention
rs ial

should be given when checking oil and fuel systems, and any problems should be corrected before next flight.
G co

\\'hen senicing aircraft, the proper fuels and lubricating oils should always be used. Aviation Grade Fuel ,\ith
ro p
up y*

a minimum octane rating of 100/130 (green color) or 100 LL aviation fuel (blue color) must be used. Under no
eircumstances should automotive fuel (regardless of octane rating) be used. When pre-flight check indicates
20 *

low oil level , service with aviation grade engine oil as follows:
13
Al

TEMPERATURE SAE GRADE


l

MIL-L-6082-B MIL-L-22851
R
ig
ht

Below lOaF 20 30
s

OaF to 70 0 F 30 40 or 30
R
es

30 0 F to 90 0 F 40 40
er

Above 60 0 F 50 40 or 50
ve
d

Single or multi viscosity aviation grade oils conforming to current Lycoming Service Instruction #1014 must
be used.

ENGINE LUBRICATION

The oil supply and distribution system is integral with the basic engine except for an independent oil cooler
assembly mounted on the right side of the firewall. The amount of oil directed through the cooler is regulated
by a thermostatic flow control valve that regulates oil temperature relative to engine heat and ambient air
temperature.

The oil pump draws oil through the oil sump pick-up screen, and directs it to the oil cooler through a flexible
line. Cooled oil is then routed to the oil pressure relief valve installed in the upper-right side of the engine,
just aft of the number 5 cylinder.

Issued: 21 February 1976 7-13


Revised: 6 April 1977
SECTION VII PilOT'S ROCKWELL
AffiPLANE ANi) SYSTEMS OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
DESCRIPTIONS 114

ENGINE OIL SCREEt-..'S

An engine oil suction screen is installed in the oil sump to filter out any sizeable metal particles or heavy
from the oil before it is directed through the oil pump. An oil pressure screen is installed in the
thermostatic/oil pressure screen housing located on the upper-center section of the accessory case. The oil
pressure screen filters any small solid particles that may have passed through the oil suction screen to the
oil pump.

OIL PRESSURE GAGE

The oil pressure gage, mounted on the gage cluster on the instrument sub-panel, is a direct reading
instrument. A small oil line is connected to one end of the oil pressure outlet housing on the accessory case.
The opposite end is connected to the rear of the gage case.

OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

The oil temperature indicator is electrically connected to a temperature sensing bulb installed on the oil pres-
cooler bypass valve. Changes in oil temperature are sensed by the bulb and transmitted to the oil
temp. indicator. Temperature variations are registered as changes in electrical current flow to the indicator.
C

The master switch must be on for this indicator to function.


op
yrig
ht

IGNITION SYSTEM
C
om

The engine is equipped with one Bendix D6LN-2031 (impulse coupling) magneto. This is a dual magneto
m

system utilizing one housing. There are two complete ignition systems on the engine, and these are completely
an

independent of each other. Each ignition system has a shielded harness assembly and a set of radio shielded
de *

spark plugs. Each cylinder utilizes two (2) spark plugs. The left magneto fires the bottom plugs in cylinders
r O *un

one (I) three (3) and five (5), and the top plugs in cylinders two (2) four (4) and six (6). The right magneto pro-
vides spark for the opposite spark plugs.
w off
ne ic
rs ial

INDUCTION AIR SYSTEM


G co
ro p
up y*

The external scoop on the left side of the lower cowl serves as the ram air source for the induction air system.
Intake air is directed through a dry paper filter element and flexible ducts for delivery to the induction manifold
20 *

assembly. The manifold then directs the filtered air to the Bendix fuel injector unit for the fuel/air mixing
13

process. A second (heated) air source is taken downstream of the engine near the left muffler and routed to
Al

the induction air manifold. This provides an alternate source of intake air in the event of fuel injector nozzle
lR

impact icing, or icing of the external filter element. This heated airflow source is controlled by the INDUC-
ig

I
TION AIR control lever (black, half-round in shape) on the engine controls pedestal on airplanes SiN 14000
ht

thru 14349, and by a round pUll-to-operate control adjacent to the landing gear indicator lights on airplanes
s
R

SiN 14350 and Susequent.


es
er
ve

EXHAUST SYSTEM
d

The enfdne is equipped with two (2) exhaust muffler systems. One system for each bank of three (3) cylinders.
Stainless steel exhaust pipes are flange-mounted to each cylinder exhaust port and connected individually to the
muffler assembly. A single stack extends through the lower cowl from each of the muffler assemblies to direct
exhaust gases overboard. A heat shroud is fitted around the right muffler assembly to provide a source of
heated air for the cabin heat and defroster system.

FUEl INJECTION SYSTEM

Filtered air is introduced into the engine through the servo regulator body, then flows into an air intake riser
where it is distributed to each cylinder by individual intake pipes. The amount of air entering the engine is
controlled by a throttle valve (butterfly) contained in the body of the fuel injection servo regulator. Fuel is
metered and distributed to the individual cylinders by the servo regulator and fuel flow divider valve. The
fuel-air ratio is determined by the position of the throttle valve and air sensing functions of the servo regulator.
Fuel and air are mixed within the cylinder. The fuel injection system consists of the air flow senSing and fuel
control sub-systems. Components of the injection system are: the servo valve, fuel control unit, fuel flow
divider valve, and air bleeder nozzles. The servo valve and fuel control unit are contained within the throttle
body casting, installed on the engine intake manifold air inlet. Priming is provided by the fuel injection system.
A separate priming system is not required.

7-14 Issued: 21 February 1976


RpviSf'd: 16 December 1977
ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION vn
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK AIRPLANE & SYSTEMS
114 DESCRIPTIONS

ENGINE COWLING

The cowling consists of t'KO molded fiberglass assemblies containing scoop inlets for oil COOling and induction
air intake, including landing light and cowl flap/nose gear door components. The upper half of the cowling is
~ccu reel by two Camloc fast~ners (aft of the propeller spinner) and four over- center side latches. The lo~\'er
p()rtion is secured by machine screws to a fuselage/firewall flange. Two external cowl flaps are controlled
mechanically from the instrument panel by a push-pull control knob labeled COWL FLAPS-PULL OPEN. Cowl
flaps should be full open for ground operations and takeoff and adjusted as required during climb and cruise
to maintain cylinder head temperature and oil temperature within the proper green arc range.

BAFFLES INSTALLATION

Sheet metal baffles are installed on the engine to provide optimum cooling airflow around the engine cylinders
and accessory components. These baffles incorporate rubber-asbestos composition seals at points of contact
with the engine to confine and direct intake air to the desired areas. The baffles, air blast tubes anel
scoops are carefully positioned to maintain proper cooling efficiency, their alteration or damage will cause
improper air circulation and engine overheating.
C
op
yr
ig

ST ARTER
ht
C

A Bendix-type starter is installed on the lower left side of the front of the engine. The starter drive pinion en-
om

gages the engine flywheel ring gear to provide direct cranking of the engine. The starter relay, installed on the
battery box in the tailcone, is energized by a key-operated, spring-loaded ignition-starter switch. When start-
m
an

ing the engine, avoid energizing the starter for more than 30 seconds, and allow at least 5 minutes between
I
de

cranking periods to permit the starter to cool.


r O **un
w off
ne ic

ACCESSORIES
rs ial

FUEL PUMP
G co
ro p
up y*

A diaphragm type, self-regulated pressure pump is installed on the aft lower left side of the engine accessory
housing. This engine operated pump provides a continuous flow of fuel to the engine without pressure varia-
20 *

tions. The pump design allows the auxiliary pump to move fuel through it to the engine in the event it becomes
13

inoperative and also for the purpose of initial engine priming and starting.
Al
lR

VACUU;vt PUMP
ig
ht

Suction to operate directional and attitude gyro instruments is provided by an engine-driven vane-type vacuum
s
R

pump. The vacuum pump, installed on the engine accessory housing, is gear-driven through a spline-type
es

coupling. A vacuum regulator is used to control system pressure.


er
ve
d

ENGINE MOUNT

The mount is a welded tubular structure attached to the firewall at five (5) different locations. The
structure serves as an engine mount and nose gear mount. The mount has four (4) points that the engine at-
taches to and uses two rubber shockmounts at each point. The bonded rubber and metal shockmounts are
designed to reduce the transmission of engine vibrations to the airframe.

PROPELLER

The Model 114 is equipped with a Hartzell, all metal HC-C2YR-1BF/F8467-7R, constant speed, two-blade
propeller. Maximum dian1eter is 77 inches, no cutoff is allowed.

The constant speed propeller used on this aircraft is a single-acting type in which oil pressure from the engine,
boosted and regulated by a governor, is used to increase blade pitch. The natural centrifugal twisting moment
of the rotating blades and the force of a spring are used to decrease blade pitch.

Issued: 21 February 1976 7-15


Rp'\!i sPri: ~ M:Hf'h 1 (177
SECTION vn PILOT'S ROCKWELL
AIRPLANE & SYSTEMS OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
DESCRIPTIONS 114

FUEL QUANTITY GAGES

fr [ZJ VENT [2J ~


I

VENT VENT
(FLUSH SCOOP) ** DRAIN""- (FLUSH SCOOP)
VALVE
*FUEL SELECTUR VALVE
WITH DRAIN CUt-.'TRUL
**FUEL SELECTUR VALVF
AlJXlLIARY WITHUUT DRAIN CUNTRUL
FUEL PUMP
SWITCH
OrF
C
op

AUXILIARY
THROTTLE l l\UXTURE
y

FUEL PUl\IP
rig

I
WITH BY-PASS I
ht

I
FUEL I
C

I
PRESSURE
om

I
GAGE I
m

I
an

I
I
de *

I
I
r O *un

I
ENGINE-DRIVEN I
w off

I
FUEL PUMP
ne ic

I
I
rs ial

_ _ oJI
G co
ro p

c:=J FUEL SUPPLY


up y*

~ FUEL PRESSURE
20 *
13

c:::=:=J FUEL VENT FUEL FWW GAGE


MECHANICAL RIGHT HALF OF
Al

FLOW
ELECTRICAL DUAL GAGE
lR

DIVIDER
~ *S/N 14100 THRU 14149
ig

CHECK VALVE TO ENGINE


ht

**S/N 14150 AND SUBSEQUENT


CYLINDER
s

X2S 17A6
R
es

Figure 7-5. Fuel System Schematic


er
ve
d

PROPElLER GOVERNOR

The propeller governor is a single- acting, centrifugal type, which boosts oil pressure from the engine and
directs it to the propeller where the oil is used to increase blade pitch. A single-acting governor uses oil
pressure to effect a pitch change in only one direction; a pitch change in the opposite direction results from
a combination of centrifugal twisting moment of rotating blades and compressed springs.

FUEL SYSTEM

Aviation fuel (100/130 minimum octane, green color or 100 LL, blue color) is supplied to the engine by two (2)
integral fuel tanks, one in the forward center section of each wing. The fuel capacity is 35 U .8. gallons for
each wing tank, 34 of which are considered usable. A reduced fuel load indicator is located in the filler neck.
This indicator is used to indicate a usable fuel capaclty of 24 U.8. gallons with aircraft in normal flight attitude.
From the wing tanks, fuel flow is directed through a selector valve, gascolator, electric fuel pump (with by-
pass), and engine-driven fuel pump for delivery to the fuel injector unit.

7-16 Issued: 21 February 1976


R ",vi I'lPri: 1 ()rt()1if>r 197fi
ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION VII
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK AIRPLANE & SYSTEMS
114 DESCRlPTIONS

FUEL FILLER CAPS

The filler necks of each wing fuel tank incorporate an anti-siphoning flapper valve to prevent loss of fuel in
flight if a cap is inadvertently left off or improperly secured. The caps are secured to the valve plates by a
quarter turn, spring-loaded plunger. To remove the cap, simply depress the fastener in the center of the cap
and rotate one-quarter turn. To replace the cap depress the fastener, rotate counterclockwise one-quarter
turn (until the unit clicks) then rotate clockwise one-quarter turn.

FUEL FILTERS AND DRAIN VALVES

Fuel filters are located in the outlet line of each wing fuel tank, the firewall mounted gascolator and the fuel
injector inlet fitting. Drain valves are located in the wing tanks sumps, gascolator and fuel selector valve in
Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149, and in the wing tank sumps, gascolator and wheel wells in Serial Numbers
14150 and subsequent. I
FUEL SELECTOR VALVE

I
C

A five-position fuel selector valve (see Figure 7-6) is installed in the forward section of the center console.
op

The valve handle controls selection of: OFF, LEFT tank, BOTH tanks, RlGHT tank and a second OFF position.
y rig
ht

The fuel selector valve handle (Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149) provides a remote control for draining fuel
C

samples from the wing tanks individually, or both tanks simultaneously, through a drain on the bottom of the
om

fuel selector valve. PlaCing the valve handle in either LEFT or RlGHT position, and pulling up on the valve
m

handle, will drain fuel from that particular tank only; the BOTH position will provide simultaneous drain from
an

both tanks.
de *
r O *un

Prior to the first flight of the day, and after each refueling operation, on Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149
set the selector valve on BOTH and pull the selector handle up to drain for approximately four seconds.
w off
ne ic

Visually check that drain valve closes when the handle is released. Depress red tab to rear of fuel selector
rs ial

to select OFF.
G co
ro p
up y*

FUEL
20 *

100/130 OCTANE MIN


13

USABLE US GAL.

-
Al

34
lR

U
ig
ht

-24
s
R
es

FUEL
er

100/130 OCTANE MIN.


ve

SIN 14000 thru 14149 SiN 14150 and Subs


d

Figure 7 -6. Fuel Selector Valve and Fuel Tank Placard

AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP

The electric auxiliary fuel pump is located on the right forward side of the firewall, and is controlled by a two-
position rocker switch labeled FUEL PUMP in the row of accessory electrical switches. The auxiliary fuel
pump is used as a boost in starting and in the event of engine-driven fuel pump failure. For further Fuel Sys-
tem information refer to the Maintenance Manual.

FUEL MANAGEMENT

It is the pilot's responsibility to ascertain that there is sufficient fuel on board the aircraft to safely complete
any flight. A visual check of each fuel tank should be made, and this should be compared with quantity indicated
on the fuel tank gages. When fuel quantities are checked, the aircraft should be level to assure that any fuel
quantity indications, either visual or electrical, will be accurate. DJring cruise, alternate fuel tanks to
maintain lateral trim. When planning flight allow enough reserve fuel for safe completion of flight.

Issued: 21 February 1976 7-17


Pt"l''\'''';Cr.,M. 1 (\ .... fnh .......... 1 ()"7~
SECTION VlI PilOT'S ROCKWELL
AIRPLANE & SYSTEMS OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
DESCIUPTIONS 114

FUEL CONTAMINATION

To a\'oici fuel contamination always service the aircraft from fuel facilities that utilize proper filter systems to
remove impurities and water accumulations from the bulk fuel. If filtering facilities are not available, filter
(he fuel through a quality grade chamois. Fuel tanks should be serviced after the last flight of each day to re-
duce condensation and allow any entrapped water accumulations to settle to the fuel system drains prior to the
next fli ght. Prior to the first flight of the day, the wing tank sumps, gascolator, and fuel selector valve (SIN
14000 thru 14149) or wheel well drains (SiN 14150 and subsequent) should be drained to check for the presence
of water or sediment in the fuel system. If water or sediment is present in the fuel sample, continue to drain
fuel until all traces of water or sediment are removed from system.

FUEL TANK VENT SYSTEM

The fuel tanks are vented to atmosphere through vent scoops on the lower outboard wing surfaces and under the
center fuselage. These vents must be free of obstructions and should be checked prior to the first flight of the
day. Should a vent become obstructed it could result in fuel starvation of the engine, and possible engine stop-
page.

FUEL QUANTITY INDICATORS


C
op

The fuel quantity indicating system consists of fuel quantity indicators, (right and left) installed in the instru-
yr
ig

ment sub-panel and electrically connected to the fuel quantity transmitters installed in each fuel tank. The fuel
ht

quantity indicating circuit is provided with two dampening resistors within the transmitter. These resistors
C

dampen indicator needle OScillations, caused by irregular movement of the transmitter float during flight
om

through rough air. The fuel quantity transmitters and indicators have been calibrated at the factory and should
m

not require recalibration; however, if for some reason the system requires recalibration this should be done
an

by a licensed A & P mechanic in accord with a current Maintenance Manual.


de

I
r O **un

Effective on SiN 14350 and subs., at 3/4 indication on fuel quantity indicators, the tanks contain 26-1/2 gallons
of fuel. Ungaugeable fuel begins at 27 gallons and fuel in the tank in excess of 27 gallons is indicated with the
w off
ne ic

pOinter at the high side of the 3/4 mark.


rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
20 *
13

LANDING GEAR EXTENSION/RETRACTION SYSTEM


Al
l
R

Refer to Figure 7 -7. The hydraulic power supply is an integrated pack containing a reversible electric motor-
ig

driven hydraulic pump, reservoir, pressure control valves, thermal relief valve and a gear up check valve.
ht

The power pack is located in the left forward area of the fuselage tail cone " A landing gear selector switch,
s
R

mounted on the instrument panel, controls the direction of fluid flow from the pump to permit gear retraction
es

or extension. A hydraulic manifold serves as the mounting base for attaching the power pack to the airframe.
er

When the landing gear selector switch is pulled out slightly to clear a detent, and placed in the UP position,
ve

pressurized hydraulic fluid at 1650 (~ 50) psi is directed through the manifold to the actuators. Fluid on the
d

opposite side of the cylinder piston flows back through the manifold into the power pack. When all three gears
are retracted, the pump is shutoff and the gears are held up by hydraulic lock. The hydraulic pressure switch
controls the pump by removing power to the pump when the pressure reaches 1650 e-50) psi. A loss of hydrau-
lic pressure is sensed by the pressure switch and turns on the power pack to build up additional pressure. When
the landing gear selector switch is placed in the DOWN position, pressurized hydraulic fluid at 500 (:! 50) psi is
directed through the hydraulic manifold to the down side of the actuator cylinders. When the gear are all down
and locked (drag brace over center) the power pack is turned off by a gear down pressure switch set at 500 (2: 50)
psi. Hydraulic pressure is maintained in the gear down system by a pilot operated check valve. The emergency
dump valve bypasses fluid from the up side of the hydraulic actuators (which form the hydraulic uplock) directly
'I the reservoir, the gears then drop by gravity, assisted by down springs. With the emergency dump valve in
the down position, the gear will not retract because the pressure is being relieved through the dump valve back
to the reservoir and not to the hydraulic cylinders.

POSITION INDICATOR LIGHTS AND GEAR WARNING LIGHT

Three green indicator lights, mounted directly above the landing gear position handle, provide an electrical in-
dication that nose and main gears are down and locked. These gear down lights are the "press-to-test" type,
and incorporate dimming shutters.

A red GEAR WARN light is installed in the glareshield surface to indicate that the gear is not fully up, or not
down and locked. Gear up is indicated by the GEAR WARN and all pOSition lights being out.
7-18 Issued: 21 February 1976
D ....... ...; ..... r>,..J~ 1 Co T\ ................. ~l-.r. ..... 10'7'7
::<:1- ...... 0::<:1
ro ~ :;;:00
~. C HYDRAULIC POWER PACK ASSEMBLY ~O
m I1l
ro n. FlLTEH mGH PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE s:~
n."
..... N
--:-- (1800-2000 psi)
;..::
ZM
...... Or-'
O>-rj Mr-'
;::;'ro
o 0-
g2
"1 f.l
LOW PRESSlmE CONTROL VALVE
(600-700 psi)
[Y
-!=}L
THERMAL HELIEF VALVE
(21:;0-2300 psi)
::0

..... "1

C
<0'<

op
....:J ....
0)<0

yr
...J
0)

ig
ht
..." HIGH PRESSURE CONTROL AND THEHMAL
RELIEF VALVES REMAIN IN POSITION'

C
(Q
c

om
iii SHOWN UNLESS PRESSURE LIMITS AHE
EXCEEDED .

m
......

an
I
......
/ /

de *
:x: PORT flO" PORT PORT "An GEAR-UP CHECK VALVE o

r O *un
'<
c.. nC ff .."
C m

w off
GEAR-UP CHECK VALVE OPENS AT BEGINNING :;0
~

ne ic
,... OF RETRACTION CYCLE AND THEN CLOSES TO l>

rs ial
VI MAINT AIN RETRACTION PRESSURE. --I

G co
'<
VI
Z~

ro p
;;)
G')r-

up y*
3
VI @ ~I ; LEFT MAIN GEAR RIGHT MAIN GEAR ~::::e!=====~?)
o
:::r: .....

20 *
n
;r i ACTUATOR ACTUATOR ~ l>V;

13
/I)
3 Z
e.

Al
o

lR
n O:J
GEAR UP PRESSURE
+---_ RETRACTED
EMERGENCY RETRACTED o

ig
<;) SWITCH MAINTAINS
EXTENSION o

ht
/I)
o SYSTEM PRESSURE - - - -+

s
VALVE
"'I i / AT 1600 TO 1700 PSI \ A

R
\
:la

es
~ ! /

er
o
0-/
ve
n
;;) NOSE GEAR

d
-
c.. ACTUATOR

;..
+--~
I ..,
RETRACTED ::a
'd
r-'
:J>
I / t:l
MM(fl
Z

--/
- RETRACTION PRESSURE (fl~M
c::::::::J RETURN PRESSURE O(fll)
x C1>-<~
'd(fl0
-:t
'"w ~~Z
w
.....I OS:"::::
Z(fl~
<0
SECTION VII PilOT'S GULFSTREA:\I
AlRPLAz.,;E &. SYSTEMS OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMA':';DER
DESCIUPTION 114

I
A;; a reminder that the gear is retracted, the gear warning bell, or horn. will actuate whenever the throttle is retarded
below approxllnately l-l inches of mal1lfold pressure with the gear retracted, or flaps extended 25 degrees or more with
t he gear retracted I regardless of throttle position!. Master switch must be on for gear warning. On some airplanes a red
GEAR \\,AR~ will also illuminate when the gear warning bell or horn is actuated.

LANDING GEAR POSITION HANDLE

The \\heel-shaped landing gear handle is mounted to the left of the accessory electrical switches and moves
vertically through two positions - above center for gear UP and below center for gear DOWN. From the DOWN
position, the gear handle must be pulled out slightly to clear a detent before it can be repositioned to UP. After
the gear handle is placed in the desired position, hydraulic pressure is directed within the gear system to re-
tract or extend the gear to the position selected. Gear DOWN is indicated by illumination of the three (green)
gear-down indicator lights, and absence of the gear warning bell or horn and GEAR WARN light. Gear UP is
indicated by the GEAR WARN light being out. If a pOSition indicator light fails to illuminate, check bulb condi-
tion by pressing to test. A burned out bulb may be replaced in flight with the bulb from the magnetic compass.

GEAR DOWN GROUND CONTACT (SQUAT) SW1TCH

The gear down ground contact (squat) switch is located on the right main landing gear trunnion. This switch is
C

adjusted so that the switch is actuated within the last quarter of an inch of gear extension. The function of the
op

gear down contact (squat) switch is to prevent inadvertent retraction of landing gear when aircraft is on the
yr

ground.
ig
ht

EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION VALVE


C
om

A red emergency extension knob (installed in the forward left side of the center console) is provided for
m

use in the event a total electrical system failure. The valve will allow relief of pressure which normally
an

retains the landing gear in the up position, thereby allowing spring assisted gravity free fall to extend the gear.
de
r O **un

BRAKE SYSTEM
w off
ne ic
rs ial

HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM


G co
ro p

The two main wheels are equipped with self-adjusting, single-disc, dual piston hydraulic brakes which are
up y*

actuated by individual master cylinders attached to the rudder pedals. On Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149 the
20 *

brake master cylinders are attached to the pilot's rudder pedals only. Both pilot master cylinders incorporate
reservoirs to supply system fluid to respective wheel brake cylinders. Since the co-pilots brakes lack reser-
13

voirs, they are hydraulically interconnected to the pilot's master cylinders. On Serial Numbers 14150 and Sub-
Al

sequent, a brake fluid reservoir located in the engine compartment, supplies system fluid to the pilot's
l
R

master cylinders. The pilot's master brake cylinders supply fluid to the co-pilat's brakes. The brakes are
ig

actuated by applying toe pressure to the tops of the rudder pedals.


ht
s
R

PARKING BRAKE SYSTE:\l


es
er

The parking brake system uses a panel mounted control knob and cable connected to a dual park brake valve.
ve

To apply the parking brakes, depress the tops of the rudder pedals and pull the control knob (labeled PARK
d

BRAKE) straight out, thereby captivating hydraulic pressure to the brakes. Toe pressure may then be re-
leased. To release the parking brake, depress the rudder pedals and push control knob to the full-in position
releasint: hydraulic pressure. For further Hydraulic Systems information refer to the Maintenance Manual.

ElECTRICAL SYSTEM

Electrical power is supplied by a 12-volt, direct-current system powered by an engine-driven alternator.


The 12-volt battery is located in the aft tailcone structure and is accessible through the baggage com-
partment. Electrical power is supplied to all accessory circuits through a single bus bar, incorporating an
over-voltage relay to protect avionics equipment from harmful tranSient voltages. Alternator capacity is
limited to 60 amperes on Serial Numbers 14000 thru 14149. Alternator capacity is 70 amperes on Serial
Number 14150 and subs.

7-20 Issued: 21 Februrary 1976


Revised: 16 July 1986
ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION VII
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK AIRPLANE AND SYSTEMS
114 DESCRIPTIONS

MASTER SWITCH

A spIlt -rocker type master switch, which controls all accessory electrical systems, is located in the extreme
left lower portion of the instrument sub-panel. This switch, labeled l'vlASTER, is ON when the upper half of
both sides of the switch are depressed. The left half of the switch (BATT), controls all battery power to the
aircraft and the right half (ALT) controls alternator output. For all normal operations, both sides of the mas-
ter switch should be ON; however, the BATT side can be turned ON separately to check the operation of equip-
ment during pre-flight.

With the ALT side turned OFF, the entire accessory electrical load is placed on the battery; therefore, all
non-essential electrical equipment should be turned off.
I
AMMETER

I
The panel mounted ammeter indicates current flow, in amperes, from the alternator to the battery, or from
the battery to the electrical system. With the engine operating and both halves of the master switch ON, the
ammeter should indicate on the charge side. In the event of an alternator malfunction, or if the electrical
C

load demand exceeds the alternator output, the ammeter will indicate on the discharge side. When the
op

ammeter continues to display on discharge Side, electrical load must be reduced as necessary.
yrig
ht

VOLTMETER
C
om

A voltmeter, located in the lower left instrument sub-panel, allows the pilot to monitor bus bar voltage.
m

See Section III for details concerning over-charging or insufficient voltage problems. Maximum allowable
an

voltage is indicated by a red radial at 16.0 volts.


de *
r O *un
w off

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ne ic
rs ial

Push-to-reset, push-pull, or rocker switch circuit breakers are used to protect all electrical circuits in the
G co

aircrait.
ro p
up y*

I
The main circuit breaker panel is contained \Vithin the lower right instrument sub-panel (see Figure 7 -8). All
20 *

general system and avionics circuit breakers contained in this panel are the push-to-reset type. All accessory
13

lighting equipment, pitot heat and the auxiliary fuel pump circuits are protected by circuit breakers built di-
Al

rectly into the back of the individual rocker switch. A convenience circuit breaker is installed near the
lR

battery for overhead reading light, electric clock, baggage compartment light and step light circuits.
Fuses are also installed to protect some of the circuits. See Airplane Maintenance Manual for details
ig
ht

on circuits and their protection.


s
R
es

ALTERNATOR
er
ve
d

A 14-volt, aircraft type alternator is installed on the forward lower right side of the engine. A ram air blast
tube extending from the ring cover of the alternator to the forward engine baffle supplies cooling air to the
alternator. A belt from the alternator pulley, to a pulley which is integral with the aft propeller flange, drives
the alternator at 3.25 times the speed of the engine.

EXTERNAL POWER

A dc power receptacle, located ait of the battery on the left side of the fuselage, provides a means for connect-
ing external power to the aircraft electrical system. To conserve battery life, external power should always
be used for starting a cold soaked engine when ambient temperature is below 40F or when performing mainte-
nance requiring electrical power. Voltage setting on external power should not exceed 14.0 volts.

Issued: 21 February 1976 7-21


SECTION VII PILOT'S ROCKWELL
AIRPLANE & SYSTEMS OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
DESCRIPTIONS 114

SERIAL NUMBER THRU 14149

FUEL PITOT NAV INST LAND RADIO

I Ii tifi"
*
i Id i
* *
ii' *
*
I ~
*PITCH
TRIM
*
@) * @)(W@@
ONE
* *
* * * * ~@
COMM
1 2
NAV
XPNDR GIS ADF MlB AUDIO
OPTIONAL
EQUIPMENT

(@
iiii I
C
op

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
yr
ig
ht

1. LEFT FUEL QUANTITY IND. A.""D VOLTMETER 9. WING FLAP MOTOR


C

2. RIGHT FUEL QUANTITY IND. 10. GEAR POSITION IND. LIGHTS


om

3. CYL. HEAD TEMPERATURE GEAR WARN LIGHT & BELL


m

4. OIL TEMPERATURE Th.TD. LNDG GEAR POSITION SWITCH


an

5. TlJ"RN COORDINATOR OR TURN & BANK IND. FLAP ACTUATED GEAR WARN SWITCH
de

6. STALL WARNING HORN THROTTLE & SQUAT SWrrCH


r O **un

7" STARTER 11. LNDG GEAR UP-DOWN RELAYS


HYDRAULIC POWER PACK
w off

COURTESY & OVERHEAD LIGHTS (opt)


ne ic

8. FLAP POSITION INDICATOR 12. ALTERNATOR FIELD


rs ial

13. ALTERNATOR OUTPUT


G co

X:210 7
ro p

SERIAL NUMBER 14150 AND SUBSEUUENT


up y*
20 *

FUEL PI TOT ANTI-COL NAV INST LOG STROBE


PUMP HEAT LlTES-----
13

i i i i i i i*
Al
lR
ig
ht
s

*
R

OPTIONAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
es

EQUIPMENT

! 11 ! !
er

*PITCH

1 1
ve

TRIM
d

@)(W@@) ()@) @
ON~ 00000
DME GIS MlB AUDIO MKR
OFF~
RADIO
MASTER
00000 @)@)@)@Ci)@) <@)

*
XPNDR 1
COMM
RADIO CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
1
NAV
2 2
COMM - NAV
r
8
III
9 10 11
t t
12 13
r
14
1. COURTESY & OVERHEAD LIGHTS 9. RIGHT FUEL QUANTITY IND.
2. ST ALL WARNING HORN 10. TURN COORDINATOR
3. CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE 11. FLAP POSITION INDICATOR
4. OIL TEMPERATURE IND. 12. WING FLAP MOTOR
5. STARTER 13. LANDING GEAR SELECTOR
6. ALTERNATOR FIELD LANDING GEAR WARNING HORN
7. ALTERNATOR OUTPUT 14. LANDING GEAR ACTUATOR
8. LEFT FUEL QUANTITY IND. AND VOLTMETER HYDRAULIC POWER PACK
X210 10

Figure 7-8. Circuit Breakers

7-22 Issued: 21 February 1976


ROCKWELL PilOT'S SECTION VII
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK AIRPLANE AND SYSTEMS
114 DESCRIPTIONS

The position of the master switch is important in a starting operation using external power. Before connecting
external power to the ai:- :'aft the BATT half of the split master switch should be turned OFF, and the ALT por-I
Han of the mJ.ster switl. . .eft OFF. Turn the battery switch ON to apply external power to ac electrical system.
After the has started, discOlmect the external power. The ALT half of the master switch should then be
turned ON to allow normal electrical system charging. It is not recommended to use external power cart to
airc raft batte ry . See Airplane Maintenanc e Manual.

LIGHTING SYSTEMS

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

Three conventional navigational lights are installed on the wing tips and aft end of the tailcone. The lights are
by the NA V LITE rocker switch (located in the accessory electrical system of the lower instrument
panel). A single-beam landing light is mounted in the lower center area of the nose cowl for night operations.
The light is controlled by the LAND LITE rocker switch.

A unique independent set of exterior courtesy lights are provided. One light is mounted on each lower side of
the aft fuselage to illuminate the baggage area and wing steps. This light system is "independent" in the sense
C

that it can receive its power directly from the battery (without the master switch being on), and operates
op

through a three (3) minute time-delay circuit to automatically turn the lights off after night boarding and de-
y
rig

planing operations. The left forward cabin reading light also operates off this three (3) minute time delay cir-
cuit. The lights are activated by a remote switch button on the left entrance step attach plate. Depressing
ht

the switch within the step plate activates the lights and a holding relay to provide approximately three minutes
C
om

of illumination before the lights go off automatically. Lights can be reset if additional time is needed. Also,
whenever the baggage door is opened, the baggage compartment courtesy light illuminates, and remains illum-
m
an

inated until the baggage door is closed.


de *

A series of three strobe-type anti -collision lights are available for installation on the aircraft. Optional strobe
r O *un

lights will be wing-tip mounted, and installed on the tail stinger. The strobe light installation provides superior
w off

identification lighting, as compared with conventional flashing beacon lights.


ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p

NOTE
up y*

Beacon or strobe lights should not be used when flying through


20 *

clouds or overcast; the flash effect reflected from water particles


13

in the atmosphere, particularly at night, could produce vertigo


Al

(loss of orientation). Also, as a consideration to other pilots, the


lR

strobe light should be left OFF during taxi near other occupied
ig

aircraft.
ht
s
R
es

INTERIOR LIGHTING
er
ve

Standard interior lighting systems include four individual overhead reading lights for passengers, baggage com-
d

partment, left control wheel map reading light (right control wheel and map light is optional), and instrument
panel lighting.

The individual reading lights are controlled by a push button on/off type switch. Lamp bulb rem 0 val is ac-
complished by inserting a pencil in lamp unit and pressing pencil eraser on bayonet type bulb, while turning
counterclOckwise. The baggage compartment light, located in the ceiling aft of the rear seats, is con-
trolled automatically by a plunger-type switch in the baggage door. Lamp bulb replacement access in this unit
is gained by carefully prying off the translucent lens cover.

A map light is installed on the bottom edge of the pilot's control wheel to provide convenient chart illumination
during night operation. The light is turned on and off by a slide-type switch on the under side of the control
wheel. Move left for off and right for on.

Instrument panel illumination is provided by blue-white flood light units installed on the under side of the glare-
shield. The magnetic compass and radio installations contain integral lighting . Instrument panel lighting in-
tensity is controlled by a rheostat control knob labeled INSTR: radio and engine instrument light intensity is
controlled by a second rheostat knob labeled AVIONICS. Rotating either rheostat control clockwise will in-
crease light intenSity. Both rheostat controls are located on the instrument panel directly below the pilot's
control column.

Issued: 21 February 1976 7-23


SECTION VII PilOT'S ROCKWELL
Amp LANE AND SYSTEMS OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
DESCRIPTIONS 114

WING
RAM Am
INLET
(TYPICAL)

\)
~
DEFROSTER CONTROL
\

/
I

CABIN HEAT CONTR6L

ENGINE CABIN ~m CONTROL\ "


EXHAUST
,,
," ' ! ! I
,~> ~ -------------J
\\'--~ c

-1,--- ,.- ~ ~'::'8 $ _-~;;---'~


---- ~~\
--I I \
C

~~,~, __ ~ ~
op

HEATER ----=-<:---.lL-
y

~
rig

RAM Am
INLET DEFROSTER -- CABIN- EMPENNAAmGEINRLAEMT \\
ht

OUTLET :' EXHAUST


C
om

C>
m

I
an

RAM Am \
de *

-. VENTILATION I
r O *un

- HEATED AlR
w off

"".,. CONDITIONED AIR


ne ic

c--0> EXHAUSTED Am
rs ial
G co

X171
ro p
up y*

Figure 7-9. Cabin Heat and Ventilation Schematic


20 *
13
Al

ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEM
lR
ig
ht

CABIN HEAT AND VENTILATION SCHEMATIC - Refer to Figure 7-9,


s
R
es
er

HEATING AND VENTILATION SYSTEM


ve
d

Three ventilation systems provide interior comfort control which can be suited to individual pilot and passenger
preference,

The cabin heating system consists of an intake, within the nose cowl landing light housing, an exhaust shroud
to heat the incoming air, and three (3) air box assemblies to direct heated air to two (2) windshield defroster
outlets or four cabin floor side outlets for interior heating.

Two separate knobs control adjustment and routing of the heated air; one labeled DEFROSTER, controls wind-
shield defrosting and one labeled CABIN HEAT controls cabin heating. The heat and ventilation control knobs
:>re located above and to the right of the engine controls on the instrument sub-panel. Pulling the control knobs
out to full extension will provide the maximum amount of heated airflow, intermediate settings will provide an
adjustment in the air temperature for the individual requirements.

Two separate systems provide maximum air intake for cabin ventilation. The four individually adjustable out-
lets in the overhead console utilize an intake in the vertical fin leading edge. The second system utilizes one
intake in the inboard leading edge of each wing to supply four adjustable outlets at cabin floor level. Ventilation
airflow is controlled by a knob labeled VENT, located adjacent to the CABIN HEAT and DEFROSTER controls.
Pulling knob to full extension provides maximum ventilation airflow.

7-24 Issued: 21 February 1976


O ......... .;r",....~. 1 r'\ .... ~,...."',.... .... 1 (V,&:!
ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION VIn
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK HANDLING, SERVICING
114 AND 1:tAINTENANCE

SECTION VIII

HANDLING, SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Page
INTRODUCTION ........................... . 8-1 Returning Aircraft to Service ............ 8-5
C

PUBLICA TIONS .. . ...................... 8-2 SERVICING ........................... 8-5


op

L\IRPLANE INSPECTION PERIOD ........... . 8-2 Battery ................................ 8-5


yrig

PREVENTf..TIVE MAINTENANCE TIIA T Tires .................................. 8-6


ht

MAY BE ACCOMPLISHED BY A Shock Strut Servicing .................. 8-6


Oil System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8-6
C

CERTITIED PILOT ...................... 8-2


om

ALTERATIONS OR REPAIRS TO Fuel System .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8-6


AIRCRAFT .............................. . 8-2 To Refuel Aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8-7
m
an

GROUND HANDLING ...................... . 8-2 Fuel Drains ......................... 8-7


de *

Precautions ........................... . 8-2 Hydraulic System ....................... 8-8


Towing ................................ . 8-3 Landing Gear Power Pack ............. 8-8
r O *un

Towing Precautions .................... . 8-3 Hydraulic Brakes .................... 8-8


w off

Parking .............................. 8-3 Lubrication ............................ 8-8


ne ic

l\100ring ............................... 8-4 AIRCRAFT TINISH CARE ................... 8-8


rs ial

Jacking ............................... . 8-4 ENGINE CLEANING ........................ 8-11


G co

PROLONGED OUT OF SERVlCE CARE ...... . 8-5 LANDING GEAR AND WHEEL WELLS ........ 8-11
ro p
up y*

8-5 PROPELLER ........................... 8-11


Short Term (less than 28 days) .......... 8-5 INTERIOR CLEANING ...................... 8-12
20 *

Long Term (more than 28 days) .......... . 8-5


13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es

INTRODUCTION
er
ve
d

Some procedures covering ground handling, servlclllg, and lubrication should be included in the pilots
general knowledge of his aircraft. Those procedures most likely to be encountered or accomplished by a pilot
are included in this section. Adherence to the procedures outlined in this section can save many hours of main-
tenance and down time.

It is recommended that service or maintenance required on the aircraft, that cannot be accomplished by a certi-
ficated pilot, be taken to an authorized Rockwell Commander Aircraft Dealer or certified service station. Your
authorized dealer will have available all service publications and FAA Airworthiness Directives pertaining to
your aircraft, as well as trained personnel, thus ensuring maximum utility and safety from your aircraft.

It is the responsibility of the owner and/or operator of the aircraft to ensure that the aircraft is maintained by
qualified mechanics and conforms to all airworthiness requirements established for this aircraft.

To ensure a prompt reply, and correct information from Rockwell International, General Aviation Division,
Customer Service Department, it is important to include the aircraft serial number in any correspondence con-
cerning service or maintenance on this aircraft. The serial number appears on the General Aviation Manufac-
turers A ssociation Plate attached to the left side of the ventral fin adjacent to the tailcone tie-down ring.

Issued: 21 February 1976 8-1


ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION VIII
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK HANDLJNG, SERVICING
114 AND MAINTENANCE

:3. \\'hen operating the engine, remove all towing equipment and observe the following:
a. Head aircraft into the wind and chock wheels.
b. Remove all control locks.
c. All personnel, work stands, and equipment shall be clear of danger areas.
d. Set parking brake.
e. Position nose wheel straight ahead and hold rudder pedals in neutral position when operating
engine at high power.
f. Perform engine ground runup in clear area to prevent foreign object damage to engine and
propeller.

TOWING

Movement of the aircraft on the ground may be accomplished by the following methods:

1. Pulling and guiding with nose gear tow bar. The nose wheel may be turned a maximum of 30 degrees to
the left or of center. Nose wheel tow limits must be strictly observed to prevent nose gear dam-
age.
2. Rotating aircraft overcenter on main landing gear to clear nose gear of ground and towing backwards.
C

The main wheels are near the center of balance, and two men can lower the tail and move the aircraft
op

with little effort.


yr

3. Attaching rope harness to main landing gear. This method is to be used when towing aircraft forward
ig
ht

throu gh snow and over soft or muddy ground. Use tow bar to steer aircraft.
C
om
m

TOWING PRECAUTIONS
an
de

1. N ever push, pull, or lift aircraft by use of control surfaces.


r O **un

2. Never use nose gear strut body or tail cone tie-down ring as an attach paint for towing.
3. Never place undue strain on aircraft when tOWing, and avoid jerky motions.
w off
ne ic

4. Do not use ropes attached to main gear for towing aircraft backward through mud or snow.
rs ial
G co
ro p

PARKING
up y*

Head aircraft into wind and set parking brake. Do not set parking brake if brakes are overheated or if brakes
20 *

are wet and ambient air is 32F (OC) or less as there is a possibility of moisture accumulation freezing brake
13

assembly. Close cowl flaps, install internal control lock, place chocks under wheels, and release parking
Al

brake.
R l
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

X162A

Figure 8-1. Mooring

Issued: 21 February 1976 8-3


SECTION VIII PilOT'S ROCKWELL
HANDLING, SERVICING OPERAl"ING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
AND MAINTENANCE 114

PUBLICA liONS

The General Aviation Division of Rockwell International delivers with each aircraft a Maintenance Manual and
:m Fr\A Approved Pilot's Operating Handbook. All revisions to the initially furnished Pilot's Operating Hand-
buok ::md Maintenance lvlanual will be provided to the aircraft owner. The aircraft owner will also receive, on
a continuing basis, Senice Releases (which include Service Bulletins, Service Letters, Service Information
and Custom Kit Sales Sheets). An Illustrated Parts Catalog may be purchased from Rockwell International,
General AVIation Division, and once purchased. subsequent revisions will be furnished.

NOIE
It is the responsibility of the aircraft owner, upon receipt of his
aircraft, to notify the General Aviation Division Publications De-
partment, in writing, his compi ete mailing address and any sub-
sequent changes thereto.

Change of address cards are provided in all copies of technical manuals, and a "Publication Change Request"
form is also provided in all copies of technical manuals for the purpose of recommended changes to the manuals.
For more information on service publications see Service Information No. SI-101.

AIRPLANE INSPECTION PERIOD

1. FAA Required Annual Inspections


2. See "Servicing" section of Maintenance Manual.
C
op
yr

PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE THAT MAY BE ACCOMPLISHED BY A CERTIFIED PILOT


ig
ht
C

Those items of maintenance which may be performed by a certificated pilot are listed in Part 43 of Federal
om

Aviation Regulations. Before attempting to perform any maintenance refer to Regulation, Part 43. All other
m

maintenance must be performed by properly licensed personnel.


an
de

NOTE
r O **un
w off

All maintenance must be accomplished in accord \\1th current


ne ic

Maintenance "Manual.
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*

ALTERATIONS OR REPAIRS TO AIRCRAFT


20 *
13

All alterations or repairs to aircraft must be accomplished by licensed personnel. The FAA should be con-
Al

tacted prior to any unapproved alterations on the airplane to ensure the airworthiness of the airplane is not
l
R

inadvertently violated.
ig
ht
s
R
es

GROUND HANDLING
er
ve
d

PRECAUTIONS

The following precautionary measures should be taken when handling the aircraft on the ground:

1. Do not use parking brake to hold unattended aircraft.


2. Do not set parking brake lever if brakes are wet and ambient air is 32F (OoC) or less as there is al
possibility of moisture accumulation freezing in brake assembly.

8-2 Issued: 21 February 1976


SECTION Vlli PILOT'S ROCKW E LL
HANDL1NG , SERVICING OPERATING HAND BO O K COMMA NDER
AND MAINTENANCE 114

MOORING

It is recommended that the air cr aft be hangared when not in use to minimize the deteriorating effect of weathe r
and high winds . The aircraft may be secured in outside tie-down by nylon or manila rope . If manila rope is
u sed for tie-down , allow enough slack to compensate for contr action of the rope fiber . Tie-dowJl p ro~edure s
are as foll ow s :

1. Turn aircraft into wind , if possible , and install control wheel lo ck.
2. Chock both sides of each wheel and tie chocks together .
3. Plac e a rop e around the nose gear s trut Jlear the base and , using a half-hitch , allow the two ends of th e
rope to extend an equal distance on each side of the nose wheel. Se cu re the ropes to tie - down points .
4. Secure a rope to the tail cone tie-down ring and secure to a point aft of the t ail.

It is strongly r ecommended that exterior control surfa ce locks be locally fabricat e d and installed at any tim e
the aircraft is tie d down . Also , soft foan1 rubber intake opening plugs \\.ill prevent for eign matter fro m accum-
u lating inside the engine cowling .
C
op
yr
ig
ht
C
om
m
an
de
r O **un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13

BALLAST
Al
l
R
ig
ht
s
R
es

X Uii ]
er

Figure 8-2. Jacking


ve
d

JAC KING

Aircraft jacking s hould be a ccomplishe d in a hangar unle ss wind is calro . To jack the aircraft for landing gear
maintenance , e t c., r efer to Fi gure 8 - 2 and proceed as follOWS:

1. Place jacks under jack pads on the underside of both wings and nose jack pad near the nose gear wheel
well.
:2. Attach a tail suppor t s tand to the t ail tie-down fitting, and ballast as required.
3. Raise nose and wing ja cks evenly u ntil all three wheels are clear of the floor and struts have fully ex-
tended . P rovide adequ ate clearan ce from floor surface if landing gear cycle tests are planned.

Check that parking brake is released prior to lowering the aircraft after maintenance.

The nose ge a r m ay be raised without th e use of jacks, by lowering aft fuselage and securing with weighted tail
stand.
8-4 Issued: 21 February 1975
ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION VIII
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK HANDLING, SERV1CING
114 AND MAINTENANCE

PROLONGED OUT OF SERVICE CARE

STORAGE

Thl' aircraft is constructed of corrosion resistant alclad aluminum, however it is subject to oxidation. and must
1Je perlOdically checked for of corrosion. The first indications of corrosion is the formation of white de-
posits or spots on unpainted surfaces. Painted surfaces will discolor or blister. The aircraft should be stored
in a dry hangar for

SHORT TERM (less than 28 days)

Special preservation measures are not required for airframe and system components if the aircraft is to be
stored for 28 days or less. However, the following procedures should be accomplished before the aircraft is
placed in storage.

1. Service fuel, engine oil and hydraulic systems.


2. Place fuel selector valve in the OFF position.
C

3. All electrical equipment OFF.


op

4. Install rubber intake plugs, gust locks and tie-down the aircraft if stored outside.
y rig

5. Clean and rotate tires weekly to prevent flat-spotting.


ht

6. Remove and store battery during cold weather.


7. Rotate propeller through several revolutions by hand once every seven (7) days after checking ignition
C
om

switch 'OFF' .
8. Start engine and run-up to operating temperatures each seven (7) days.
m
an
de *

LONG TERM (more than 28 days)


r O *un
w off

When the aircraft is to be stored for periods greater than 28 days, the general steps under the period of 28 days
ne ic

or less, plus cleaning and polishing of the aircraft, should be followed to prepare the airfran1e for storage. In
rs ial

addition the engine must be prepared and stored in accordance with INSTALLATION AND STORAGE details
G co

contained in the Lycoming Operator's Manual.


ro p
up y*
20 *

RETURNING AIRCRAFT TO SERVICE


13
Al

If proper procedures have been observed during storage, very little preparation will be necessary to reactivate
lR

the aircraft. Install a fully charged battery and perform a thorough inspection and preflight check. If the en-
ig

has been preserved, comply with the procedures for returning the engine to operation as detailed in the
ht

Lycoming Operator's Manual.


s
R
es
er
ve

SERVICING
d

BATTERY

The 12 -volt battery is installed in the left side of the tail cone, and is accessible through the baggage compart-
ment. Loosen and remove the thermoplastic battery box cover for battery inspection and electrolyte level
checks. A built-in plastic carry strap is provided for convenience in handling the battery if it becomes neces-
sary to remove it from the battery box.

Check the battery electrolyte level frequently, especially during hot weather. If visual check shows low cell
level, add distilled water to bring the cell(s) up to proper level. Periodic hydrometer check for proper specific
gravity of electrolyte is recommended. Battery charging and specific gravity requirements are defined in the
Maintenance Manual.
I

Issued: 21 February 1976 8-5


Rpm ""IOn' 1 O/'tnhpr 1 Q7h
SECTION V1II PilOT'S ROCKWELL
HANDLING, SERV1CING OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
AKD MAINTENANCE 114

TIRES

The nose and main gear tires and struts should be checked periOdically for proper inflation.

I
TIRE PRESSURE STRUT PRESSGRE
Nose Gear (5. 00 x 5, 6 Ply) 50 PSI 120 PSI

Main Gear (7.00 x 6, 6 Ply) 38 PSI 405 PSI

The wheels and tires are balanced assemblies and the red dot on tire must align with yellow mark on tube. If
tires are suspected of being out of balance, they may be balanced on automotive type balancing equipment.

When cleaning the tires, use only soap and water. Do not use solvents for cleaning, as they may produce harm-
ful effects on sidewall rubber. etc. Tires should be rotated frequently whenever the aircraft is stored for ex-
tended periods to prevent flat-spotting.

SHOCK STRUT SERVICING


C
op

'\laintain nose strut air pressure at 120 PSI and main strut pressures at 405 PSI. Check the landing gear daily
yr
ig

for general cleanliness, security of mounting, and hydraulic leaks. Keep machined surfaces of strut piston
ht

wiped free of excessive hydraulic fluid.


C
om
m

ENGINE Oil SYSTEM


an
de

The oil level should be checked prior to each flight. Maintain a minimum of 6 quarts and fill to 8 quarts for ex-
r O **un

tended duration flight. The oil may be changed every 100 hours of operation, provided that the filter element
is changed every 50 hours. Oil that becomes dirty and contains sludge deposits should be changed regardless
w off
ne ic

of time since last oil change. When preflight check indicates low oil level, service with aviation grade engine
rs ial

oil as follows:
G co
ro p

TEMPERATURE SAE GRADE


up y*

MlL-L-6082-B MlL-L-22851
20 *

Below 10F 20 30
13

OOF to 70F 30 40 or 30
Al

30 0 F to 90F 40 40
Rl

Above 60F 50 40 or 50
ig
ht

Deter!!,cnt or "ashless-dispersant" oil, conforming to current Lycoming Service Instruction #1014 must be used.
s
R
es

NOTE
er
ve

To promote faster ring seating and improved oil control, this


d

aircraft was delivered from the factory with a mineral-type


(non detergent) oil installed.

This type of "break-in" oil should be used for the FIRST 50


HOURS ONLY, at which time it should be drained and replaced
with detergent oil.

After the first 25 hours of operation, drain engine oil, clean suction and oil pressure screens and replace the
'ilter element. Refill the sump with non-detergent mineral type oil and use until the 50 Hour mark is reached
or oil consumption has stabilized, then change to detergent oil conforming to specifications, listed above.

FUEL SYSTEM

The fuel tank filler caps are located on the upper outboard surface of each wing tank and contain anti-siphoning
I flapper valves. Do not service the aircraft with an octane rated fuel lower than 100/130 (green). Aviation fuel
100 LL (blue) is an approved alternate.

8-6 Issued: 21 February 1976


Po,'; ",,,A, 1 R 1\lhu 1 Q'7fl
ROCKWELL PilOT' 5 SECTION "'"III
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK HANDLING, SERVICING
114 AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING I
Ground aircraft and fuel servicing equipment to the aircraft prior to
servicing. Smoking in, or around the aircraft during refueling is
stri ctly prohibited.

Service the aircraft from fuel facilities that utilize proper grounding equipment and filter systems to remove
impurities and water accumulations from the bulk fuel. If filtering facilities are not available, filter the fuel
through a quality grade chamois. Fuel tanks should be serviced after the last flight of each day to reduce con-
densation and allow any entrapped water accumulations to settle to the fuel system drains prior to the next
flight.

TO REFUEL AIRCRAFT PROCEED AS FOLLOWS:

1. Verify battery switch 0 FF .


C

2. Verify fuel ['_teetor is in OFF position,


op

3. Remove filler cap and service with 100/130 (green) octane rated fuel until level rises to filler opening.
yr
ig

,1 Rephce filler cap and check it for security.


ht

5. Wash any spilled fuel from wings with clean water.


C

6. Repeat for opposite fuel tank.


om
m
an
de
r O **un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *

WHEEL WELL SUMP DRAIN


13

(SiN 14150 AND SUBS.)


Al
l R
ig
ht
s
R
es

WING DRAIN
er
ve
d

\ ,
\
XIS lA

Figure 8-3. Fuel Drains

FUEL DRAINS

After servicing, all fuel drains (see Figure 8-3) should be checked for the presence of water or other impurities
in the fuel system.

Drain check the fuel system as follows:

1. Drain a fuel sample from the wing tank sumps on the inboard underside area of each tank.
Issued: 21 February 1976
RPv1 c::Prl' 1 ()"t"h",1" 1 Q7P.
8-7

SECTION V1II PilOT'S ROCKWELL
HANDLING, SERVICING OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
AND MAINTENANCE 114

2. '~ 14000 thru 14149) Place fuel ~elect()r val\'e, located on interior center console, on BOTH and pull
tu drain ~elect()r \'al \'e throu:J1 bottom of fuselage. An outside assi stant will be needed to obtain fuel

NOTE
The fuel selectur remote drain valve will also permit draining of the
individual tank lines by switching to either LEFT or RIGHT and pulling
up on valve hancUe.

I
3. 14150 and Subsequent) Drain a fuel sample from drain located in each main gear wheel well.
4. Drain fuel from gascolator by pulling tee handle fuel release.
5. Visually check that all drain valves close after draining.

If water is observed in the drain samples, there is a possibility that the ta.nk sumps and lines contain additional
water. Therefore, a complete re-draining check should be made.

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
C

LANDING GEAR POWER PACK


op
yrig

To check the hydraulic power unit fluid level. remove the left side baggage compartment sidewall by releasing
ht

Velcro fastener. Remove the vent screw from the top of the power unit, and check fluid leveL Service with
C

IVIlL-H-5606 hydraulic fluid.


om

HYDR\ULIC BRAKES
m
an
de *

N 14000 thru 14149) The hydraulic brake system utilizes two fluid reseryoirs incorporated on the pilot's
r O *un

rudder cylinders. Each reservoir contains a plastic filler plug for inspection and servicing the system
with !\UL-H-5606 hydraulic fluid. Before removing a filler plug, wipe the top of the master cylinders to prevent
w off

dirt from entering the brake reservoir. Reservoir level should be maintained at the bottom of the filler plug
ne ic

opening. The co-pilot's brakes are hydraulically interconnected to the pilot's master cylinders.
rs ial
G co

I
ro p

(S/N 14150 and Subsequent) The pilot's and co-pilot's brake cylinders are supplied fluid from a separate fluid
up y*

reservoir, located on the left forward side of the firewall. Before removing the filler plug, clean the top of
the resen-oi l' to prevent dirt from entering the reservoir. Service reservoir to the bottom of the filler plug
20 *

opening with MIL- H- 5606 hydraulic fluid.


13
Al

If blepding of brakes is required, refer to the Maintenance Manual.


lR
ig
ht

LUBRICATION - See Figure 8-4.


s
R
es
er
ve

AIRCRAFT FINISH CARE


d

Exterior Cleaning Climate and operating conditions will determine the extent and frequency of cleaning re-
quired. Frequent washing when operating near salt water areas will help to minimize corrosion. Prior to
cleaning the exterior of the aircraft cover the wheels, making certain the brake discs are covered. Securely
install or mask off all openings. Be particularly careful to mask off both static air sources before wash-
ing or waxing. Do not apply wax or polish to the exterior surface of the aircraft for a period of 90 days after
deli very, as waxes and polishes seal the paint from the air and prevent curing. If it is necessary to clean the
')ainted surfaces before the expiration of the 90-day curing period, use cold or luke warm water and a mild
;oap. Never use hot water or detergents. Any rubbing of the painted surface should be gentle and held to a min-
imum to avoid damaging the paint film. Use a mild commercial soap to wash the aircraft and rinse with clean
water. Loose dirt should be flushed away with clean water before soap is applied. Harsh or abrasive soaps or
may cause corrosion or scratches and should never be used. Soft cleaning clothes or a chamois
should be used to prevent scratches when cleaning and polishing. The exterior surfaces may be waxed with a
quality grade automotive paste wax after allowing adequate curing time.

The windshield and cabin side windows are made from plastic; therefore, care must be exercised when ser-
vicing the aircraft to prevent scratching or otherwise damaging the window surfaces. The windshield and cabin
windows may be cleaned by carefully washing with a mild commercial soap and clean water.

8-8 Issued: 21 February 1976


n .......... ..: ,..."...J. 1 r'\_~~\...,,,, 1 n""~
ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION vrn
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK HANDLING, SERVICING
114 AND MAINTENANCE

APPLlCA TlON
SPECIFICATIONS AND TYPE OF LUBRICATION
SY MBOL

HAND PACK
t MIL-G-3545 HlGH TEMPERATURE AIRCRAFT GREASE

ClOTH WIPE
(HF)
MIL-G-23827 AIRCRAFT GREASE (TOP OF NOSE GEAR TRUt-.'NION ONLY)

MIL-H-5606 HYDRAULIC FLUID



Oil CAN
If MIL-L-7870 WW TEMPERATURE GENERAL PURPOSE
LUBRICATING OIL.

ZERK GUN MIL-G-81322 AIRCRAFT GREASE


I
C

@ I~~~.I ~:6~
op
yr
ig
ht
C
om
m
an
de
r O **un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
l
R
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve

[I]-----;:;~~
d

SEAT
ROLLERS

ENGINE OIL.
REFER TO MAINTENAl"ICE
MANUAL.

X164

Figure 8-4. Lubrication Chart (Sheet 1 of 2)


Issued: 21 February 1976 8-9
D ....... ....; .... ""rl. ~ lI,if ..... _ .... l.. 1fV'P',
SECTION VIII PilOT'S ROCKWELL
HANDLING, SERVICING OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
AND MAINTENANCE 114

NOSE GEAR NOSE GEAR DOORS

SiN 14000 THRU 14149

C
op
yrig
ht
C
om
m
an
de *
r O *un
w off
ne ic
rs ial

X165 xl. 6
G co
ro p

MAIN GEAR AND MAIN GEAR DOORS


up y*
20 *
13
Al

SiN 14150 AND SUBS.


lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

)(167A X2239

Figure 8-4. Lubrication Chart (Sheet 2 of 2)


8-10 Issued: 21 February 1976
n "',.,..; C'.,.\I'~. ~ T\1f#) "'~h 1 Q'77
ROCKWELL PILOT'S SECTION VIII
COMIvIANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK HANDLING, SERVICING
114 A:t-.rn J\.1AINTENANCE

Do not use gasoline, alcohol, benzene, acetone, carbon tetrachloride,


deicer fluids or glass cleaning components on plastic surfaces as they
will soften the plastic and cause crazing.

A void rubbing the plastic surface with a dry cloth since this can cause scratches and build up an electric static
charge that will attract dust particles. If scratches are visible after removing dirt accumulations, finish the
plastic with a quality grade of commercial wax. Apply wax in a thin even coat and carefully buff out with a soft
cloth. Do not buff or polish in one area for more than a brief period of time; heat generated by rubbing the
surface may soften the plastic and produce vi:"ual distortion.

ENGINE CLEANING
C
op
yr

Engine and cowling may be cleaned with any standard engine solvent approved for this purpose. Prior to clean-
ig

ing engine, cover all openings to prevent solvent from entering engine. Spray or brush solvent over engine
ht

and wipe dry. Blow excess cleaning solution from engine with compressed air.
C
om
m
an
de
r O **un

Do not allow commercial cleaning sol vents to enter magnetos, starter,


w off

alternator or any primary component housing. Protect engine com-


ne ic

ponents by wrapping in suitable plastic or otherwise covering areas to


rs ial

prevent sol vent contact.


G co
ro p
up y*
20 *

LANDING GEAR AND WHEEL WELLS


13
Al
l

Clean landing gear and wheel wells with a compound containing an emulsifying agent to remove oil, grease, and
R

surface dirt. The emulsion is removed by rinsing with water or spraying with a petroleum solvent. Cover the
ig
ht

wheel and brake during landing gear and wheel well cleaning. If a water rinse is used in cold weather, blow
s

all water from wheel well with an air hose, to prevent freezing. Emulsion type cleaners usually contain sol-
R

vents which are injurious to rubber if allowed to remain in contact for any length of time; therefore, rinse
es

affected area immediately with water. After cle~ming landing gear, wipe exposed strut piston with a clean
er

cloth moistened with IvllL-H-5606 hydraulic fluid. To clean tires, rinse with water and scrub with a brush.
ve

Tire surface may be brightened after washing by rubbing with glycerene or applying a brush coat of commercial
d

tire paint.

NOTE

Assure that ground contact (squat) switch and all landing gear limit
switches are dry prior to flight.

PROPELLER

Check propeller blades and hub periodically for oxidation, corrosion, cracks and nicks. Brush oxidized or
corroded area with a phosphating agent to remove superficial corrosion, then remove etched and pitted area
by buffing smooth with an aluminum polish. Small nicks, particularly near the prop tips and on the leading
edges, should be dressed out as soon as practical since these nicks can produce stress concentration.

Issued: 21 February 1976 8-11


SECTION VIII PILOT'S ROCK\VELL
HANDLING, SERVICING OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
AND .MAINTENANCE 114

NOTE
repairs of metal propellers involves evaluating the damage and
determining whether the repair will be a major or minor one. Federal
Aviation Regulations, Part 43 (FAR 43) defines major and minor re-
pairs and alterations and who may accomplish them. Federal A,dation
Regulations and the Hartzell manufacturer's instructions must be
observed.

Never use an alkaline cleaner on the propeller blade surfaces, Remove dirt 'With a petroleum base solvent.
After cleaning, wiping propeller blades and hubs occasionally with an oily cloth to clean off stains, will
assure long trouble-free operation, When cleaning propeller, take the following precautions:

a. Check that ignition switch is OFF.


b. Make sure engine has cooled completely.
c. When moving propeller, do not stand in line of blades.
d. Avoid using excessive amounts of liquid cleaner as it may splatter or run down blade and enter
propeller hub or engine.
e. After cleaning, check area around propeller hub to be sure all cleaning solution is removed.
C
op
yr
ig

INTERIOR CLEANING
ht
C
om

Seats, rugs, upholstery panels, and instrument panels should be vacuumed frequently to remove surface dust.
m

Spots and stains should be removed with products specifically manufactured for this purpose. Clean the air-
an

craft interior with commercial cleaning compounds designated for plastic, vinyls and rug materials. Such
de

products can be purchased locally. Do not use water to clean fabric surfaces, since it will spot upholstery and
r O **un

remove the flame-resistant chemical impregnated in the cloth. Before applying any cleaner, carefully read
w off

the directions and test the cleaner on an obscure piece of material to check its compatibility and cleaning re-
ne ic

action.
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
l
R
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

8-12 Issued: 21 February 1976


ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENTS

C
op
y rig

SECTION IX
ht
C
om

SUPPLEMENTS
m
an
de *
r O *un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

Issued: 21 February 1976 9-1


PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IX OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
SUPPLEMENTS 114

LOG OF SUPPLEMENTS
Supplement
No. Title FAA Approved Date

~~'f.N'f~
1 Puritan "Altitude Traveler" Portable Oxygen System
(Pages 1 of 4 thru 4 of 4) 2/21/76
DEi OP PC-203

2 Winterization Kit
(Pages 1 of 2 and 2 of 2) ~~':f. rf\~~
DEL OP PC-203 6/21/76

3 Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT)


(SHARC 7H-2A and SHARC 7K) (Pages
1 of 2 and 2 of 2)
f\-;.~~~
DEL OP PC-203 10/1/76
C
op

4 Narco CP 136 Audio Panel ,,~ ':f. rf\~~


y
rig

(Pages 1 of 2 and 2 of 2)
DEL OP PC- 203 12/16/77
ht
C

J?~f.K\C~
om

5 Narco COM 120 Transceiver


(Pages 1 of 2 and 2 of 2)
m

DEL OP PC-203
an

12/16/77
de *

6 Narco NAV 121 Navigation Unit


f\-;.~~~
r O *un

(Pages 1 of 4 thru 4 of 4)
w off

DEL OP PC-203 12/16/77


ne ic
rs ial

7 Narco NAV 124 Navigation Receiver


G co

(With Narco HSI-100S Horizontal


ro p

,,~{ rf\~~
up y*

Situation Indicator) (Pages 1 of 7


thru 7 of 7)
20 *

DEL OP PC-203 12/16/77


13

f\-;~~~
Al

8 Narco ADF 141


lR

(Pages 1 of 4 thru 4 of 4)
ig

DEL OP PC-203 12/16/77


ht
s

9 Narco AT 150 Transponder


~~':f rf\c~
R
es

(Pages 1 of 3 thru 3 of 3)
DEL OP PC-203 12/16/77
er
ve

f\-;.~qlr
d

10 Narco DME 195


(Pages 1 of 3 thru 3 of 3)
DEL OP PC-203 12/16/77

9-2 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVEO Issued: 21 February 1976


Revised: 16 December 1977
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMAJ."IDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENTS

LOG OF REVISIONS TO SUPPLEMENTS


Revised
Re\'lsion Supplement
Xumber Number Description of Revision FAA Approved Date

1 1 Revised pages 1 of 4 and 3 of 4 J?~-.~c~ 5/18/76


C DEL OP PC-203
op
y rig
ht
C
om
m
an
de *
r O *un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

Issued: 21 February 1976


Revised: 18 May 1976 OATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVEO 9-3/9-4
ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENTS

SUPPLEMENT 1

PURITAN rfALTITUDE TRAVELER" PORTABLE OXYGEN SYSTEM

SECTION I
GENERAL

The purpose of this Pilot' s Operating Handbook Supplement is to provide additional information appropri-
C
op

ate to the operation of the Puritan "Altitude Traveler" Portable Oxygen System. When an aircraft is
y

equipped with the Puritan Portable Oxygen System, this Supplement must be included in the Pilot's Ope-
rig

rating Handbook.
ht
C

DESCRIPTION
om
m

The Puritan "Altitude Traveler" Portable Oxygen System consists of 1800 PSI oxygen cylinder, a
an

manual regulator, four oxygen outlets, four oxygen masks and hoses and a protective carrying case.
de *

The manual regulator provides a means of varying the oxygen flow rate, thus giving the system a wide
r O *un

selection of operating altitudes. The system meets the flow rate requirements set forth in FAR 23.1443
w off

and is authorized for use at altitudes up to 30,000 feet. The oxygen system is installed in the center of
ne ic

the rear seat and is easily removable for servicing.


rs ial
G co

To operate the system, the manual regulator should be adjusted to the altitude range bracketing the in-
ro p

tended operating altitude. Plug in the number of oxygen masks desired, verify that there is flow to each
up y*

mask by noting that the oxygen flow indicators, located in each delivery hose, have changed from Red to
20 *

Green, place the mask over the nose and mouth, adjust the retaining strap and breath normally. Never
13

plug in more masks than are necessary as this will result in a needless use of oxygen. Any time a
flight altitude change is made) a readjustment of the manual regulator may be necessary to assure that
Al

its altitude range brackets the newly selected flight altitude. If this is not accomplished, inadequate
lR

flow rates would result if the flight altitude selected is higher than the altitude range selected on the
ig

manual regulator, while excessive and wasteful flow rates would result if the flight altitude selected is
ht
s

lower than the altitude range selected on the manual controller. An emergency position is available on
R

the manual regulator. When this position is selected) an oxygen flow rate of 6 liters per minute at Sea
es

Level is established.
er
ve

Oxygen duration is a function of the manual regulator setting and the number of occupants utilizing the
d

system. The following table depicts that relationship.

Altitude
1'-lLlMBER OF MASKS IN USE
Setting on
Regulator 1 2 3 4

8 - 12 6:10 2:50 1 :56 1 :30

12 - 16 4:56 2:28 1 :35 1:08

16 - 20

20 - 25
3:53

3:06
1 :50

1:30
1 :16

0:58
0:54

0:42

25 - 30 2:30 1 :12 0:48 0:36
I
OXYGEN DURATION - HOURS:MlNUTES
NOTE: The above chart is based on 1800 PSI, starting at noted altitude.

Issued: 21 February 1976


Revised: 18 May 1976 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 1 of 4
PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IX OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
SUPPLEMENTS 114

The oxygen duration chart only shows average durations and assumes that the oxygen bottle has been
filled to maximum capacity prior to use. As these durations are approximate, it is advisable to peri-
odic311y check the oxygen level to preclude the possibility of unexpectedly exhausting the oxygen supply.
It is 3lso advisable to periodically check the oxygen flow indicators to each mask to assure that each
occupant utilizing the system is receiving oxygen. Should the oxygen supply become exhausted or should
the flow to any mask cease (and flow cannot be restored), a descent should be made immediately to an
altitude that would not require the use of supplemental oxygen.

Oxygen capacity is a direct function of oxygen bottle pressure. 1800 psi at 700 F represents a fully
charged bottle, while 75% capacity represents 1350 pSi, 50% capacity represents 900 psi and 25% capa-
city represents 450 pSi. These pressure values vary slightly with temperature but have no Significant
effect on oxygen duration. For more detailed information concerning this temperature/pressure rela-
tionship and for servicing instructions refer to the "Altitude Traveler" Owner's Instruction Manual
provided with each unit.

Cylinder

Rating 1800 PSI, steel cylinder 'with OOT3AA 1800 Rating


C

Capacity - 22 Cubic Ft. (625 Liters) when charged to 1800 PSI at 70 o F.


op
yr
ig
ht
C

Type - Aviators Breathing Oxygen per MIL-O-27210, Type I or equivalent.


om
m

\Veight
an
de

ApprOximate total weight of cylinder and masks - 17.5 Lbs.


r O **un
w off
ne ic

SECTION II
rs ial
G co

LIMITATIONS
ro p
up y*

There are no changes to the operating limitations when this equipment is installed.
20 *
13

SECTION III
Al
R l

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
ig
ht

Oxygen Flow Interruption


s
R
es

1. Oxygen Regulator - EMERGENCY


er
ve

If oxygen flow is re-established:


d

2. Oxygen Regulator - RESET TO DESIRED ALTITUDE RANGE.

If oxygen flow is not restored:

3. Descent - DESCEND TO AN ALTITUDE THAT OOES NOT REQUIRE THE USE OF


SUPPLEMENT AL OXYGEN.

I WARNING I
An insufficient supply of oxygen can severely limit a pilot's ability to
effectively fly his aircraft.

2 of 4 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.!\,A. APPROVED Issued: 21 February 1976


ROCKWELL PilOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENTS

SUPPLEMENT 1 (CONTD)

SECTION IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES

Pre- Flight Inspection

Interior

1.
2.
3.
Oxygen Quantity - CHECK.
Oxygen Masks - CHECK CONDITION and AVAILABILITY.
Oxygen Bottle and Case - SECURELY TIED DOWN.

Before Starting

1. Oxygen Masks - COJ\~ECT TO BOTTLE.


C
op

NOTE
y
rig

Connect only those masks which will be used in flight.


ht
C

2. Oxygen Regulator - SET ANTICIPATED CRUISING ALTITUDE RANGE.


om

3. Oxygen Flow Indicator - CHECK GREEN ON ALL MASKS ANTICIPATED FOR USE.
m

4. Oxygen Regulator - OFF.


an
de *
r O *un

Normal Climb
w off
ne ic

1. Oxygen Masks - DON.


rs ial

I
G co
ro p

WARNING
up y*
20 *
13

AIl smoking materials must be extinguished when oxygen


is being used.
Al
lR

2. Oxygen Regulator - SET DESIRED ALTITUDE RANGE.


ig
ht
s

NOTE
R
es

FAR 91.32 requires that the pilot use supplemental oxygen


er

between 12,500 Ft. MSL and 14,000 Ft. MSL when that
ve

portion of the flight exceeds 30 minutes. It further requires


d

that the pilot use supplemental oxygen at altitudes in excess


of 14,000 Ft. MSL and that all occupants are provided \\lith
supplemental oxygen at altitudes in excess of 15,000 Ft. MSL.

It is recommended; however, that all occupants use supple-


mental oxygen at altitudes in excess of 10,000 Ft. MSL and
that the pilot USe supplemental oxygen when flying at altitudes
in excess of 5,000 Ft. MSL at night.

3. Oxygen Flow Indicators - CHECK GREEN ON ALL MASKS IN USE.

Cruise

1. Oxygen Flow Indicators - PERIODICALLY CHECK ALL MASKS IN USE.


2. Oxygen Capacity - PERIODICALLY CHECK.

Issued: 21 February 1976


Revised: 18 May 1976 OATA ON THIS PAGE IS f.A.A. APPROVED 3 of 4
PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IX OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
SUPPLEMENTS 114

Descent

1. Oxygen Regulator - READJUST AS NECESSARY.

\\'hen aircraft has descended below an altitude where supplemental oxygen is no longer required:

2. Oxygen Regulator - OFF.


3. Oxygen Masks - STOW.

SECTION V

PERFORMANCE

There are no changes to the operating performance data when this equipment is installed.
C
op
yrig
ht
C
om
m
an
de *
r O *un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

4 of 4 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED Issued: 21 February 1976


ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENTS

SUPPLEMENT 2

WINTERIZATION KIT

SECTION I
GENERAL

The purpose of this Pilot's Operating Handbook Supplement is to provide additional information appro-
priate to aircraft operation when the Winterization Kit is installed. When an aircraft is equipped with
C

a Winterization Kit, this Supplement must be included in the Pilot's Operating Handbook.
op
yr
ig

DESCRIPTION
ht
C

The Winterization Kit consists of a partial blocking plate, which is inserted over the front face of the
om

oil cooler. The blocking plate reduces the cooling surface area of the oil cooler by approximately
m

fifty percent, thereby providing a means of increasing oil and engine operating temperatures.
an
de

As oil and engine operating temperatures are a function of outside air temperature, it will become in-
r O **un

creaSingly more difficult, (especially at low power settings) to maintain oil and engine operating tem-
peratures within their normal operating ranges during cold weather operation. For this reason, it is
w off
ne ic

recommended that the Winterization Kit be installed if prolonged cold weather operation is anticipated.
rs ial
G co
ro p

SECTION II
up y*
20 *

LIMITATIONS
13

Outside Air Temperature Limitation


Al
l

Winterization kit must be removed when the OAT exceeds 50 o F.


R

1.
ig
ht

2. Placards
s
R
es

DO NOT OPERATE AIRCRAFT WITH


er

WINTERIZATION KIT INSTALLED IF


ve

O.A.T. IS GREATER THAN 5QOF.


d

ABOVE AND TO THE RIGHT OF ALTIMETER

SECTION III
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

There are no changes to the Emergency Procedures Section when this equipment is installed.

Issued: 21 June 1976 1 of 2


PilOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IX OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
SUPPLEMENTS 114

SECTION IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES

:\'()rnnl Climb

1. Cowl Flaps - CLOSED.

NOIE
Engine temperatures should be monitored closely during
the climb. Should any temperature exceed its respective
limit, the cowl flaps should be opened enough to reduce
and then to maintain temperatures within their normal
operating ranges.

SECTION V
C

PERFORMANCE
op
yrig

There are no changes to the Performance Section when this equipment is installed.
ht
C
om
m
an
de *
r O *un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

2 of 2 Issued: 21 June 1976


ROCKWELL PilOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENTS

SUPPLEMENT 3

EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER {ELT}


(SHARC 7H-2A AND SHARC 7K)

SECTION I
GENERAL

The purpose of this Pilot's Operating Handbook Supplement is to provide additional information appropri-
C

ate to the operation of the SHARC-7 Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT). When an aircraft is equip-
op

ped with a SHARC-7 Emergency Locator Transmitter, this Supplement must be included in the Pilot's
y
rig

Operating Handbook.
ht
C

DESCRIPTION
om

The ELT is a self-contained battery powered transmitter. It is colored bright orange and located on the
m
an

left side of the tail cone behind the aft baggage wall or on the aft mounted avionics shelf (if installed)
de *

and is accessible thru the removable panel just inside the baggage door. A placard located on the
r O *un

removable panel shows battery replacement date.


w off

Its purpose is to automatically transmit a sweeping audio signal on the international distress frequencies
ne ic

of 121. 5 MHz with the SHARC 7K, or 121. 5 MHz and 243.0 MHz with the SHARC 7H-2A, after being
rs ial

subjected to a 5 "g" deceleration for a short period of time, along the airplane line of flight. The
G co
ro p

transmitter may be controlled from the cockpit by actuation of the switch on the upper right instru-
up y*

ment panel. With the control switch in the ARM position, the ELT is armed for transmitting when
the "g" switch in the transmitter is activated. With the control switch in the ON position, signals are
20 *

manually transmitted regardless of the "g" switch position.


13
Al

General aviation and commercial aircraft, the FAA, and CAP monitor 121. 5 MHz, The military
lR

monitor 243.0 MHz.


ig
ht

Following a crash landing, the ELT will provide line-of-sight transmission up to 100 miles at 10,000
s

feet.
R
es
er

The duration of ELT transmissions is affected by ambient temperature. At temperature of +210 to


ve

+54 0 C (+70 to +130 0 F) continuous transmission for 115 hours can be expected; a temperature of -400C
d

(-40 0 F) will shorten the duration to 70 hours.

SECTION II
LIMITATIONS

There are no changes to the operating limitations when this equipment is installed.

SECTION III
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

Forced Landing Procedures

ELT procedures prior to a forced landing are included in Section ill of the Pilots Operating Handbook
. ,. for the specific emergency involved.

Issued: 1 October 1976 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED lof2


PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IX OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
SUPPLEMENTS 114

Immediately after a forced landing where emergency assistance is required, the ELT should be utilized
as follows:

1. ENSURE ELT ACTIVATION: Turn a radio transceiver ON and select 121. 5 MHz. If the
ELT can be heard transmitting, it was activated by the "g" switch and is functioning
properly. If no emergency tone is audible, gain access to the ELT and place the function
selector switch in the ON position.

2. PRIOR TO SIGHTING RESCUE AIRCRAFT: Conserve airplane battery. Do not activate


radio transceiver.

3. AFTER SIGHTING RESCUE AIRCRAFT: Place ELT function selector switch in the OFF
pOSition, preventing radio interference. Attempt contact with rescue aircraft with the
radio transceiver set to a frequency of 121. 5 MHz. If no contact is established, return
the function selector switch to ON immediately.

4. FOLLOWING RESCDE: Place ELT function selector switch in the OFF position, termi-
nating emergency transmissions.
C
op

Inadvertent Actuati! ., of ELT "gil Switch


yr
ig

It is recommended that the transmitter be checked, following a lightning strike or an exceptionally hard
ht

landing by turning the aircraft VHF communication receiver to 121. 5 MHz and listening for ELT audio
C

sweeps.
om
m

Should the ELT "g It switch be inadvertently triggered, proceed as follows:


an
de

1. Emergency Locator Transmitter Control Switch - ON, momentarily, then


r O **un

2. Emergency Locator Transmitter Control Switch - ARM. This will reset the "gil switch.
w off
ne ic
rs ial

SECTION IV
G co
ro p
up y*

NORMAL PROCEDURES
20 *
13

Before Takeoff
Al

1. Emergency Locator Transmitter Control Switch - ARM.


Rl
ig

It is recommended that the transmitter be checked, following landing by turning the aircraft
ht

VHF communication receiver to 121. 5 MHz and listening for ELT audio sweeps.
s
R
es

The ELT may be tested, but certain precautions must be observed, as follows:
er
ve

1. Test should be no longer than three audio sweeps.


d

2. Tests should be conducted only within the time period made up of the first five
minutes after any hour.
3. If the operational test must be made at a time not included within the first five
minutes after the hour, the test(s) should be coordinated with the closest FAA
tower or flight service station.

SECTION V
PERFORMANCE

There is no change to the operating performance data when this equipment is installed.

2 of 2 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED Issued: 1 October 1976


ROCKWFLL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENT 4

SUPPLEMENT 4

NARCO CP 136 AUDIO PANEL

SECTION I
GENERAL

The purpose of this Supplement is to provide information necessary for the operation of the NARCO CP
C

136 Audio Panel. When an airplane is equipped with the CP 136 Audio Panel, this Supplement must be
op

included in the Pilot's Operating Handbook.


y rig
ht

DESCRIPTION
C
om

The NARCO CP 136 Audio Panel provides central push-button control, for all airplane communications
m

and navigation audio signals. As many as seven audio inputs may be combined for routing to the cabin
an

speaker and headphones. The panel also contains Marker Beacon indicator lights and audio controls.
de *
r O *un

CONTROL PANEL
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig

o M I
MKR
ht

COM 1 COM 2 BOTH NAV 1 NAV 2 ADF DME

11
s
R
es
er
ve

X1914
d

HI-LO-TST SWITCH - Selects Marker Beacon sensitivity. Placing switch in HI enlarges the area in
which the marker beacon can be received. The momentary TST poSition lights the O-M-l lamps.
When the DME/MKR and SPKR pushbuttons are selected and the TST switch is depressed, a
steady tone will be heard on the speaker and headphones. The marker beacon receiver will be
on any time power is on the airplane and marker beacon circuit breaker is set.

MKR MUTE SWITCH - Allows the pilot to mute or disable MKR audio output for a period of 10 to 14
seconds. This is long enough to allow the MKR audio to remain muted as the airplane passes
over a marker beacon transmitter, yet permits reactivation of the MKR audio before next
Marker Beacon is reached. The switch is spring-loaded and requires only momentary contact.

Issued: 16 December 1977 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED


1 of 2
PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IX OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
SUPPLEMENT 4 114

CD O-M-I LAMPS - Outer, Middle and Inner Marker Beacon identifiers.


upon receipt of a signal from the Marker Beacon receiver.
The appropriate lamp 'W111 light

Pushbutton Operation

Pushing a button IN closes that circuit and lights that button. The button is locked in the IN
position. A second push releases the lock and allows the button to pop out and open the circuit
and extinguish the light.

COM 1 and COM 2 Pushbuttons - The COM 1 and CO:'vl 2 pushbuttons are the only two push-
buttons that are interlocked. Depressing one button causes the other to release. Depressing
either COl\I 1 or COM 2 button allows that particular COM transceiver to be used for transmit
and receive modes.

BOTH Pushbutton - Depressing the BOTH button permits the audio from both COM receivers to be
heard on the speaker and/or headphones simultaneously. It does not void the selection of the
COM transmitter selected by the COM 1 or CO:Vl 2 button.

NAVIGATION RECEIVER SELECTION Pushbuttons - Four pushbuttons provide navigation receiver


C
op

selection. Depressing one or more of these pushbuttons permits the audio Signal from the
y

selected unit(s) (NAV 1, NAV 2, ADF and DME/MKR) to be routed to the isolation combining
rig

circuits of the audio panel.


ht
C

SPKR Pushbutton - Depressing the SPKR button connects the combined audio Signals from all the
om

selected units to tile input of the cabin speaker amplifier.


m
an
de *

SECTION II
r O *un
w off

LIMITATIONS
ne ic
rs ial

There are no ch::mges to the airplane operating limitations when this equipment is installed.
G co
ro p
up y*

SECTION III
20 *
13

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
Al

There are no changes to the emergency procedures when this equipment is installed.
lR
ig
ht
s

SECTION IV
R
es

NORMAL PROCEDURES
er
ve

1. Comm Transceivers - ON and TUNED as desired.


d

2. COM 1 or COM 2 Button SELECT desired transceiver.


3. BOTH Pushbutton - AS DESIRED.
4. Navigation Receiver Selectors - AS DESIRED.
5. SPKR Pushbutton - AS DESIRED.

SECTION V
PERFORMANCE

There are no changes in airplane performance when this equipment is installed.

2 of 2 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED Issued: 16 December 1977


ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENT 5

SUPPLEMENT 5

NARCO COM 120 TRANSCEIVER

SECTION I
GENERAL

The purpose of this Supplement is to provide information necessary for the operation of the NARCO
C

COM 120 Transceiver. When an airplane is equipped with a COM 120, this Supplement must be
op

included in the Pilot's Operating Handbook.


yr
ig

DESCRIPTION
ht
C
om

The NARCO COM 120 is a 720 channel VHF transceiver which operates in the frequency range of
118.000 to 135.975 MHz with 25 kHz spacing. The unit operates on airplane DC power. In a dual
m

installation the units will be labeled COM 1 and COM 2.


an
de

CONTROLS
r O **un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig

VOLUME ON TST
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

X19 17

OFF-ON-TST Switch - Turning the switch clockwise past the click to the ON poSition energizes the
unit. Continued clockwise rotation to TST position will deactivate the automatic squelch feature.

FREQUENCY SELECTOR Knob - Selects frequency in the MHz range.

FREQUENCY SELECTOR Knob - Larger knob selects hundreds of kHz.

FREQUENCY SELECTOR Knob - Smaller knob selects tens of kHz.

FREQUENCY DISPLAY - Displays transmit/receive frequency selected.

VOLUME CONTROL - Controls audio volume. Turn clockwise to increase volume.

TRANSMIT LIGHT - Lights when transmitter is keyed by push-to-talk switch on the microphone
or airplane control wheel.

Issued: 16 December 1977 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED


1 of 2
PilOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IX OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
SUPPLEME~l 5 114

SECTION II
LIMITATIONS

There are no changes to the airplane operating limitations when this equipment is installed.

SECTION III
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

There are no changes in the emergency procedures when this equipment is installed.

SECTION IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES

1. Radio Master Switch - ON.


C

2. Appropriate COMM Circuit Breaker - C HECK IN.


op

3. OFF-ON-TST S'Witch - ON.


y
rig

4. Audio Control Panel - SET as desired.


ht

5. Communications Frequency - TUNE.


6. Volume - AS DESIRED.
C
om

7. Transmit Light - MONITOR for proper transmitter operation.


m
an
de *

SECTION V
r O *un

PERFORMANCE
w off
ne ic

There are no changes in airplane performance when this equipment is installed.


rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

2 of 2 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED Issued: 16 December 1977


ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENT 6

'-. .
SUPPLEMENT 6

NARCO NAV 121 NAVIGATION UNIT

SECTION I
GENERAL

The pur pose of this supplement is to provide information necessary for the operation of the NARC O
C

NA V 121 Navigation Unit. When a n airplane is equipped with the N A V 121 , this supplement must be
op

included in the Pilot' s Opera ting Handbook .


y rig

DESCRIPTION
ht
C

The NAV 121 i s a VOR/LOC Receiver, a r ec eiver control head and cour se deviation indi cator combined
om

in a single unit. The NAV 121 ope ra t es on ai rpl ane DC power .


m
an

INDICATOR AND CONTROLS


de *
r O *un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

SELE CTE D BEARING INDICATOR - A fixed yellow marker which inclicates the selected radio bearing
on the OMNI BEARING CARD.

OMNl BEARlNG CARD - A manually rotated compass card used to select the desired OMNI bearing.
Controlled by the OBS knob.

Issued : 16 Dec ember 1977 DATA ON THIS PAGE .s F.A.A, APPROVE.D 1 of 4


PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IX OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
SUPPLEI\.fENT 6 114

CD OFF-VOL-PULL INDENT - Rotating the knob clockwise, past the "click", applies power to the NAV
circuits; continued clock'Wise rotation increases the audio volume. Pulling the knob out allows
the 1020 Hz station identification code to be heard on the airplane audio system. A detent holds
the knob in the "pulled" position. Push to return.

TO-FROM-OFF FLAG - A red OFF flag will appear alerting the pilot to either the loss of a Signal or
inadequate signal level.

A TO or FROM flag will appear indicating whether the selected VOR radial is a bearing TO the
station or FROl\I the station.

RECEIVER FREQUENCY COr-."TROLS - Receiver frequency is selected by the concentric knobs. Whole
megahertz frequencies are selected by the large knob while fractional megahertz frequencies
are selected by the small knob. Clockwise rotation of either knob increases selected frequency.
If airplane is DME equipped, DME/VOR frequencies are tuned simultaneously when VORTAC
transmitting frequencies are selected.

FREQUENCY READOUT WINDOW - Displays frequency selected by Receiver Frequency Controls.


C

OMI\TI BEARING SF LECTOR (OBS) - A desired OMI\TI bearing is obtained by turning the OBS knob to set
op

that bearing, read on the Omni Bearing Card, under the yellow Selected Bearing Indicator.
yr
ig
ht

Pushing the OBS knob activates the Self Test Function. With a VOR signal (of any bearing)
applied to the receiver, rotate the OBS knob to set a 00 bearing under the selected bearing
C
om

indicator, then push in the OBS knob. If the unit is operating properly, the VOR/LOC Deviation
Indicator will center and VOR/LOC Flag will show TO.
m
an

VOR/LOC DEVIATION INDICATOR - In VOR mode, the indicator needle moves left or right to indicate
de

location of the selected VOR bearing relative to the actual airplane position; when centered, the
r O **un

indicator shows on-course condition.


w off
ne ic

In LOC mode, the indicator needle moves left or right to locate the center of the hori zontal
rs ial

component of an ILS glidepath relative to actual airplane position.


G co
ro p
up y*

VOR/LOC DEviATION SCALE - When tuned to a VOR frequency each dot represents 2-degrees of
deviation left or right of course. The inner circle represents one dot. When tuned to a
20 *

localizer, the deviation is approximately 1/2-degree per dot.


13
Al
l

SECTION II
R
ig
ht

LIMITATIONS
s
R
es

There are no changes to the airplane operating limitations when this equipment is installed.
er
ve
d

SECTION III
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

There are no changes to the emergency procedures when this equipment is installed.

SECTION IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES

Before Taxi

1. Radio Master Switch - ON.


2. Appropriate NAV Circuit Breaker - CHECK IN.
3. OFF- VOL- PULL IDENT Sv;'Uch - ON.
4. Receiver - TUNE to local VOR frequency.
5. Audio Control Panel - SELECT APPROPRIATE NAV.

2 of 4 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F,A,A. APPROVED Issued: 16 December 1977


ROCKWELL PilOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENT 6

6. Volume - INCREASE until NAV receiver noise is heard. No coded IDENT signal should be heard.
7. OFF-VOL- PULL IDENT Switch - PULL. Check coded IDENT and push switch in.
S. OBS Knob - SET 0 0 bearing under Selected Bearing Indicator. Depress OBS knob and note
VOR/LOC Deviation Indicator centers and TO flag appears.

In Operations

The NAV 121 will allow the pilot to track a selected VOR radial, will provide a TO/FROM indication
relati ve to the station and will pro vi de an indication of VOR station passage. When used as NA V - 2, the
system does not provide an autopilot coupled capability if airplane is equipped with a slaved compass
system, and does not provide computed steering commands for intercept or correction for wind drift.
The indicator provides a "FLY TO THE NEEDLE" indication during VOR operation.

The NAV 121 also provides the data necessary to track the localizer portion of an ILS glldepath. It does
not provide glideslope information and the TO/FROM flag does not operate when tuned to a localizer
frequency.

The indicator displays the location of the locali zer centerline relative to the airplane position. When
executing a "front course" ILS localizer approach the indicator presents a "FLY TO THE NEEDLE"
C

indication. During a "back course" approach the indications are reversed and the indicator presents a
op

"FLY AWAY FROM THE NEEDLE" indication.


yr
ig

VOR Navigation
ht
C
om

To establish the airplane on a desired VOR radial, proceed as follows:


m

1. Tune receiver to desired VOR frequency.


an

2. Identify VOR station.


de

3. Use OBS knob to set desired VOR radial under the selected bearing indicator.
r O **un

4. Check TO/FROM flag.


w off

5. Turn the airplane to the desired intercept heading.


ne ic

6. Airplane is on the selected radial when the deviation indicator centers.


rs ial

7. At station passage, the deviation indicator and the TO- FROM flag may oscillate and the warning
G co

flag may appear. Station passage occurs when the TO-FROM flag makes the first positive
ro p
up y*

change to FROM.
20 *

LOC Approach
13
Al

To establish the airplane on a localizer course, proceed as follows:


lR
ig

1. Tune receiver to LOC frequency.


ht

2. Identify LOC station.


s

3. Intercept inbound locali zer cour se.


R
es
er

NOTE
ve
d

Use of the OBS knob does not affect the LOC course. Recommend that
the published localizer course be set under the selected bearing indicator
to help maintain pilot orientation.

I WARNING'

When executing a "back course" LOC approach, course deviation indica-


tions are reversed. Course corrections are made away from the needle
during "back course" approaches.

VOR Approach

The procedure for a VOR approach is the same as for VOR navigation. Course deviation remains at
20 per dot.

Issued: 16 December 1977 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED


3 of 4
PilOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IX OPERATING HANDBOOK COM:MANDER
SUPPLEMEh"T 6 114

SECTION V
PERFORMANCE

There are no to airplane performance when this equipment is installed.

C
op
yrig
ht
C
om
m
an
de *
r O *un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

4 of 4 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED Issued: 16 December 1977


ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENT 7

SUPPLEMENT 7

NARCO NAV 124 NAVIGATION RECEIVER


(WITH NARCO HSI-100S HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR)

SECTION I
GENERAL

The purpose of this Supplement is to provide information necessary for the operation of the NARCO
C
op

NAV 124 with an HSI-100S Horizontal Situation Indicator. When an airplane is equipped with a NAV
y

124 and an HSI-100S, this supplement must be included in the Pilot's Operating Handbook.
rig
ht

DESCRIPTION
C
om

The NARCO NA V 124 is a 200 channel VOR/ILS Receiver with a frequency range of 108.00 to 117.95
m

MHz, plus a time multiplexed 40 channel Glideslope Receiver and a Marker Beacon Receiver. The
an

NA V 124 also automatically channels the DME system when tuned to a VORT AC frequency. The
de *

recei ver operates on airplane DC power.


r O *un
w off

The HSI-I00S is a Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) which displays airplane heading, VOR and LOC
ne ic

course deviation, glideslope deviation and VOR TO/FROM indications. The directional gyro is slaved
rs ial

to a NARCO compass system. Radio navigation signals are provided by the NAV 124 receiver. If the
G co

airplane is equipped with an Area Navigation System and the RNAV mode is selected, the HSI receives
ro p

its navigation data from the RNAV computer. The HSI-I00S will provide error signals to an autopilot
up y*

for coupled autopilot operation. The HSI operates on airplane DC power.


20 *
13

INDICATORS AND CONTROLS


Al

NAV 124 RECEIVER


lR
ig
ht
s
R
es

NAV 1

0
er
ve
d

VOLUME OFF ON
PULL
IDENT
C)
X1918

2 CD
VOLUME-IDENT KNOB - Rotating the knob clockwise increases audio volume. Pulling out on the knob
allows the 1020 Hz station IDENT tone to be heard. The knob is spring-loaded and must be held
in the IDENT position.

Issued: 16 December 1977 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 1 of 7


PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IX OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
SUPPLEMENT 7 114

The NAV 124 is a time-sharing receiver. When the receiver is tuned to a localizer frequency
which is paired with an operating glideslope frequency, the receiver automatically switches back
and forth between the localizer frequency and the glideslope frequency 15 times per second.
When the VOLUME- IDE},'! knob is held in IDENT position, time-sharing is defeated, the glide-
slope signal is blocked out and the receiver is in LOC mode. This will cause the GS indicator
on the HSI to slowly rise and the GS alarm flag to come into view. Releasing the spring-loaded
knob allows normal LOC/GS time-sharing to resume.

NOTE
If the VOLUME-IDENT knob is held in the IDENT pOSition during a
coupled ILS approach, after the glideslope has been captured, the
autopilot will cause the airplane to fly up in an attempt to satisfy
the false climb indication.

CD CD frequencies.
- RECEIVER FREQUENCY CHANNELING. - The single knob, 2 ,selects whole megahertz
The concentric knobs, 3 and 4 ,select fractional MHz frequencies. Clock-
wise rotation of the knobs increases the selected frequency.
C

o
op

FREQUENCY READOUT WINDOW - Displays selected frequency.


yr
ig

OFF-ON KNOB - Power is applied to the NAV receiver and the HSI-100S Horizontal Situation Indicator
ht

when the knob is placed in the ON position.


C
om
m

HSI-100S HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR


an
de
r O **un

LUBBER LWE TO-FROM INDICATOR


w off

SELECTED COURSE POWTER


ne ic
rs ial

VOR/LOC DEVIATION SCALE


G co
ro p

HEADWG BUG
up y*
20 *
13

GS :MASK
Al

~-l--- HEADWG FLAG


R l

GS DEVIATION
ig

WmCATOR
ht
s
R
es

1..Io.-J...---- NAV FLAG


er
ve

COMPASS CARD
d

COMPASS CARD SET KNOB

COURSE SELECT KNOB


HEADWG SELECT FI927
KNOB
VOR/LOC DEVIATION BAR
COURSE RECIPROCAL POWTER

REFERENCE AIRPLANE - A fixed, symbolic representation of the actual airplane, aligned with
the lubber line.

LUBBER LINE - An orange line, at top of display, which indicates airplane magnetic heading
on the Compass Card.

COMPASS CARD - A rotating card which indicates, beneath the lubber line, the airplane current
magnetic heading. The card is driven by the slaved directional gyro (00). The card is
also mechanically coupled to the COMPASS CARD SET KNOB and may be manually aligned
with the standby magnetic compass if the gyro slaving system is inoperative.

2 of 7 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED Issued: 16 December 1977


ROCKWELL PilOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENT 7

COMPASS CARD SET KNOB - Used to manually rotate the compass card to set the magnetic
heading under the lubber line.

HEADING BUG - The orange Heading Bug is used to select a desired magnetic heading. As the
airplane heading varies, the Bug rotates with the Compass Card. When coupled to an
Autopilot, heading error signals are generated to acquire and/or maintain a selected
heading.

HEADL'l"G SELECT KNOB - Used to rotate the Heading Bug to a desired point on the Compass
Card. Pulling the Knob out Vvill erect the gyro if it tumbles.

HDG FLAG - Red flag indicates loss of power to the gyro. Heading information is unusable with
flag in view, however, radio navigation information remains Valid.

SELECTED COURSE POINTER - On this two part arrow, the ''bead'' indicates the desired VOR,
Locali zer or RNA V course, and the "tail" indicates the courSe reCiprocal. The Course
Pointer rotates with the Compass Card. When coupled to the Autopilot, off course error
signals will be generated to acquire or maintain the selected course.
C
op

COURSE SELECT KNOB - Used to rotate the Selected Course Pointer to the desired course on
yr

the Compass Card.


ig
ht
C

VOR/LOC DEVIATION BAR - Forms the center section of the Selected Course Pointer and
om

represents a selected VOR radial or Localizer Course. When the airplane is located
precisely on the selected VOR radial or Localizer Course, the Bar will be pOSitioned
m
an

under the Reference Airplane and over the center dot in the Deviation Scale. When
de

airplane is off course, or approaching a new course, the bar will move to one side or
the other to indicate the location of the selected course. Since the entire VOR or LOC
r O **un

display rotates Vvith the Compass Card, the angular relationShip between the Deviation
w off

Bar and the Reference airplane provides a pictorial display of airplane poSition with
ne ic

respect to the selected course.


rs ial
G co

VOR/LOC DEVIATION SCALE - When receiver is tuned to a VOR frequency, each white dot
ro p
up y*

represents 5-degrees deviation right or left of selected course. When tuned to a


Localizer, the deviation is approximately 1. 25-degrees per dot. In RNAV ENROUTE
20 *

mode, scale is 2.5 nm per dot and in RNA V APPR mode is 0.625 11m per dot.
13
Al

TO-FROM INDICATOR - Indicates, with reference to the selected course, whether airplane is
l

flying TO or FROM the VOR station. It is out of view when the receiver is tuned to a
R
ig

Localizer frequency.
ht
s

NAV FLAG - Red flag indicates inadequate VOR or LOC signal, loss of VOR or LOC signal, or
R
es

loss of power to meter circuits. With the NAV FLAG in view, VOR or LOC information
er

is unusable, however, heading information is valid and glideslope information is valid if


ve

glideslope mask is out of view.


d

GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION INDICATOR - Triangular yellow pointer on left side of display.


During an ILS approach. the pointer represents the center line of the glide slope , while
the center dot on the deviation scale represents the airplane. This provides a visual
indication of the position of the airplane relative to the glideslope.

GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION SCALE - White dots which, in conjunction with the Glideslope Devia-
tion Indicator, indicates either "too high", "too low", or "on glideslope" during an ILS
approach. Each dot, above and below the center dot, represents approximately 0.4-
degree vertical deviation from the glideslope center line.

GLIDESLOPE MASK - Covers the Glideslope Deviation Indicator to indicate no usable glideslope
Signal is being received. Navigation and heading information is valid if their flags are
out of view.

RNAV - The legend "RNAV" will appear in the lower right corner of the instrument face when
the HSI is part of an Area Navigation system and the RNAV mode is engaged.

Issued: 16 December 1977 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 3 of 7


PilOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IX OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
SUPPLE:-'IENT 7 114

SLAVDl'G METER - A slaving meter is located in the upper right corner of the instrument face.
The meter needle will oscillate slowly when the slaved directional gyro is properly
aligned to the flux compass. If directional gyro is not properly aligned with the flux
compass, the slaving meter will display a constant deflection in the direction of the error.

DIG FREE/SLAVE SWITCH - A two position toggle switch labeled DG, FREE, SLAVE, located
in the upper center of the instrument panel, controls the slaving system.

With the switch in SLAVE position, the compass card will automatically rotate at the
rate of 15-degrees per second until the card is aligned 'With the directional gyro. The
gyro will slave to the correct magnetic heading, as determined by the remote compass
system, at the rate of 2-degrees per minute.

NOTE
Due to the slow sla...ing rate of the directional gyro, it may be
necessary to use the Compass Card Set Knob to manually set
the magnetic heading under the lubber line, using the standby
compass for reference.
C
op
yr

With the switch in FREE position, the directional gyro is unslaved and does not receive
ig
ht

heading information from the slave compass system. Heading must be adjusted manually,
C

at periodic intervals, to correct for gyro drift. Use the standby compass for reference.
om
m
an

SECTION II
de
r O **un

LIMIT ATlONS
w off

Placards
ne ic
rs ial
G co

SET COMPASS CARD


ro p

BEFORE TAKEOFF
up y*
20 *

Adjacent to IISI
13
Al

Below Glideslope Capture Light


R l
ig
ht

SECTION III
s
R
es

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
er
ve

If slaving system malfunctions place D/G switch in FREE position. Manually align compass card 'With
d

standby magnetic compass, at periodic intervals, to correct for gyro drift.

SECTION IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES

Before Taxi

1. Radio Master Switch - ON.


2. NAV 1 Circuit Breaker - CHECK IN.
3. D/G Switch - SLAVE.
4. Heading Flag - CHECK.

NOTE
Heading flag may take as long as 60 seconds to retract.

4 of 7 DA TA ON THIS PAGE IS F .A.A. APPROVED Issued: 16 December 1977


ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENT 7

5. Compass Card - :'vlANUALLY ALIGN v.'ith standby magnetic compass.


6. Slave Meter - CHECK.

NOTE
Gyro requires approximately five minutes to attain full speed.

7. NAV 124 Receiver - TUNE to local omni or test signal.


8. NAV - RETRACTED when valid radio nRlrigation signal is received.
9. Course Pointer - ROTATE until Course Deviation Bar centers, course pointer is pointing to
omni station and TO indicator appears.
10. Course Pointer - ROTATE 30-degrees clockwise; Course Deviation Bar should move left.
Rotate Course Pointer 3D-degrees counterclockwise; Course Deviation Bar should center.
Rotate Course Pointer 3D-degrees counterclockwise; Course Deviation Bar should move right.
Rotate Course Pointer 30-degrees clockwise. Course Deviation Bar should center.
11. Course Pointer - ROTATE 180-degrees. Course Deviation Bar should center and FROM
indicator should appear.
12. Course Pointer - SET as desired.
C

Before Takeoff
op
y

1. Directional Gyro - CHECK operation by observing the gyro during turns while taxiing.
rig

2. Heading - CHECK against known heading.


ht
C

NOTE
om

Perform VOR checks as required by FAR 91.33.


m
an
de *

In- Flight Operation


r O *un

NOTE
w off
ne ic

The following descriptions assume the airplane is maneuvered auto-


rs ial

matically by a Mitchell Century III Autopilot. If the autopilot is not


G co

engaged, the airplane must be maneuvered manually, but the HSI-


ro p

100S equipment management and displays remain the same.


up y*
20 *

Heading
13
Al

1. Autopilot - ENGAGED.
lR

2. Heading Bug - SET to desired heading.


ig

3. Guidance Mode Selector - HDG.


ht

4. Autopilot HOO Mode Switch - ON. Autopilot will turn airplane in shortest direction to intercept
s

and track selected heading. Turns up to l80-degrees may be programmed.


R
es
er

VOR Navigation
ve
d

To Intercept

1. Autopilot - ENGAGED.
2. Autopilot HOO Mode Switch - ON.
3. NAV 124 Receiver - TUNE to selected OMNI frequency.
4. Selected Course Pointer - SET to desired OMNI course (radial).
5. Guidance Mode Selector - OMNI. If airplane is IO-degrees, or more, off selected radial, a
45-degree interception angle will be established. Inside the lO-degree area, the system will
automatically direct a tangential intercept, without overshoot, and arrive on the radial with
crosswind correction established.

NOTE
Limit initial intercept angle to 90-degrees, or less.

Issued: 16 Decem ber 1977 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 5 of 7


PilOT' 5 ROCKWELL
SECTION IX OPERATING HANDBOOK COM:M.ANDER
SUPPLElVlENT 7 114

NOTE
If less than 45-degrees from selected radial, airplane will intercept
before station. If more Ulan 45-degrees, interception \\lill occur after
station passage.

Station Passage:

With GuidaI1Ce Mode Selector in OMNI, as the airplane nears the station (approximately 1 mile) the zone
of confusion will cause the Course Deviation Bar to swing from side to side, resulting in an "S" turn.
To ensure smooth station passage, set Heading Bug under the lubber line. When close to station, place
Guidance Mode Selector in HDG. Observe TO-FROM indicator and when it displays a constant FROM
indication, station passage has occurred. Place l\lode Selector back to OMNI and autopilot will track
outbound on selected course.

To Select New Course:

To select a new outbound course at station passage -


C
op

1. With Mode Selector in HDG mode, rotate Selected Course Pointer to new course.
yr

2. Rotate Heading Bug to new course. Airplane will turn to new heading.
ig

3. Place Guidance Mode Selector in OMNI. Autopilot will capture and track new course.
ht
C

VOR Approach
om
m

1. Track inbound to station.


an

2. At station passage, select outbound course.


de

3. After airplane is established on outbound radial, set Heading Bug to outbound procedure turn
r O **un

heading.
w off

4. Guidance Mode Selector - HDG.


ne ic

5. After one minute, rotate Heading Bug to inbound procedure turn heading, in direction of turn.
rs ial

6. Set Course Pointer to inbound course and when 90-degrees to inbound course set Mode Selector
G co

to Ol\1NI.
ro p

7. Place Heading Bug under lubber line when airplane is established on inbound course and use
up y*

HDG mode for station passage.


20 *
13

ILS Approach - Front Course


Al

To Intercept Localizer:
R l
ig
ht

1. NA V 124 Recei ver - TUNE to localizer frequency.


s

2. Course Pointer - SET to published inbound course.


R

3. Heading Bug - SET to desired intercept heading (90-degree, or less, intercept angle).
es

4. Mode Selector - HDG.


er

5. Use Altitude Hold or Pitch mode for altitude control.


ve

If Procedure Turn \\111 be accomplished:


d

6. Mode Selector - LOC REV when Course Deviation Bar indicates airplane is approaching
localizer course.
7. After intercept, and at appropriate time, descend to ~blished approach altitude and place auto-
pilot in Altitude Hold mode.
8. Heading Bug - SET to outbound procedure turn heading.
9. Mode Selector Switch - HDG.
10. After one minute, rotate Heading Bug, in direction of turn, to inbound procedure turn heading.
11. Mode Selector - LOC NORM when between 90 and 45-degrees to inbound heading.

NOTE
For optimum results switch to LOC NORM at 45-degrees.

6 of 7 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F,A,A. APPROVED Issued: 16 December 1977


ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENT 7

If front course is to be intercepted with turn directly to inbound course:


12. Mode Selector - LOC NORM when Course Deviation Bar indicates airplane is approaching
locali zer course.
13. Airplane ""ill intercept inbound localizer course. Autopilot should be on Altitude Hold and
GUdeslope deviation indicator should be up. If these conditions are met for 20 seconds or more,
automatic coupler \\ill be armed.
14. Heading SET to published GO AROUND heading.
15. Upon interception of glide path (when deviation indicator moves down to center) the gUdeslope
coupler "ill automatically engage, the Glideslope Coupled indicator light \\ill illuminate and
the airplane \\111 assume a pre-set nose down attitude for descent.

NOTE
Monitor deviation indicators for actual airplane pOSition relative to the
locali zer and glidepath.

WARNING'
C
op

If the VOLUME-IDENT knob on the NAV 124 receiver is held in the IDE!,;"!'
y
rig

pOSition \\ith an ILS frequency selected, the Glideslope Deviation Indicator


ht

\\ill move to a full scale "Fly Up" indication, regardless of the airplane
C

pOSition relative to the glideslope. If an autopilot coupled ILS approach is


om

being accomplished, and, if the glideslope has been captured, the auto-
pilot \\ill cause the airplane to fly up in an attempt to satisfy the false
m
an

climb indication.
de *
r O *un

16. Upon of approach, or when VFR, disconnect autopilot and adjust the airplane for
landing.
w off
ne ic

For Approach Control Vectors to ILS Front Course approach:


rs ial
G co
ro p

1. Use Altitude Hold or Pitch Control for altitude control.


up y*

2. Use HDG mode and Heading Bug to comply \\ith vector instructions.
3. NAV 124 Receiver - TUNE to published localizer frequency.
20 *

4. Course Pointer SET to published inbound locali zer course.


13

5. Guidance Mode Selector - LOC NO&'v1 when on inbound course or when instructed to intercept
Al

localizer and deviation bar is moving towards center.


lR

6. Autopilot Altitude Hold for at least 20 seconds prior to glideslope intercept.


ig

7. Bug - SET to published GO AROUND heading.


ht

8. ILS Approach - ACCOMPLISH.


s
R
es

ILS Approach - Back Course:


er
ve

ILS Back Course Approach procedures are same as ILS Front Course Approach except:
d

1. Use LOC REV mode.


2. Course Pointer must be set on published Front Course inbound heading during approach.
3. Altitude Hold must be disengaged prior to initiating descent.
4. Glideslope Coupler is inoperative \\ith Mode Selector in REV LOC mode.
5. Set Heading Bug under lubber line and use Hoo mode when approximately 1/2 mile from runway
to prevent "S" turn when passing over ILS transmitter.

SECTION V
PERFORMANCE

There is no change in airplane performance when this equipment is installed.

Issued: 16 December 1977 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 7 of 7


ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENT 8

SUPPLEMENT 8

NARCO ADF 141

SECTION I
GENERAL

The purpose of this Supplement is to provide information necessary for the operation of the NARCO ADF
C

141. When an airplane is equipped vlith an ADF 141, this Supplement must be included in the Pilot's
op

Operating Handbook.
y rig
ht

DESCRIPTION
C
om

The NARCO ADF 141 is an airborne Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) system. The system is made
up of a Receiver, an ADF 101 Indicator and a non-rotating Loop Antenna.
m
an

CONTROLS
de *
r O *un

ADF 141 RECEIVER


w off
ne ic

The ADF 141 Receiver is a digitally tuned, full band (200 to 1799 kHz) ADF Receiver. The receiver
rs ial

operates on airplane DC IXlwer.


G co
ro p

Station frequency selection is by means of knobs located on either side of the frequency read-out window.
up y*
20 *

The Receiver has Automatic Gain Control (AGC) circuitry that holds the audio output level constant over
13

a wide range of RF signal level.


Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er

Dim 0
ve

0 -----l1
d

VOLUME OFF ADF ANT

l. . . . -tDUE~- _
-I\C!) _ _ OaFD
X1915

CD 0)
VOLUME CONTROL/PULL IDENT - This knob is used to set the volume of the audio Signal. Clockwise
rotation increases the volume. Pulling the knob boosts the IDENT audio above the background
noise for easier station identification. Depressing the knob provides the clearest voice informa-
tion. Pulling or depressing the knob does not affect the ADF function.

Issued: 16 December 1977 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 1 of 4


PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IX OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
SUPPLEMENT 8 114

CD FUNCTION SWITCH This s;>,1tch controls the power to the ADF system and allows selection of modes.
OFF - Cuts off all power to the system.
ADF - This mode is used for automatic direction finding.
ANT - AN!, or antenna mode, provides optimum intelligibility of the received identification
signal. In this mode the loop signal is off, rendering the direction finding capability
inoperative and the indicator needle rests at 135 0 (:r 100).
BFO The BFO mode turns on a beat frequency oscillator to generate a tone in the presence
of a carrier. The BFO mode is needed to identify keyed carrier stations. The
needle rests at 135 0 C: 10 0 ) in BFO mode.

On modulated CW stations tone ;>,ill be continuous between IDENTS and two tones will
be present during IDENT. On "cw only" stations tone will be present between IDENTS
and !DENTS will be clear.

FREQUENCY SELECTION K.,.~OBS (200-1799 kHz)


Left knob controls Hundreds digit(s) from 2 to 17 \ith stops at each end. The right small
knob controls the Ten digit from 0 to 9 and has no stops. The right large knob controls
the Units digit from 0 to 9 and has no stops.
C

All knobs increase numeral readout when turned clockwise and may be rotated in either
op

direction.
y

CD
rig

FREQUENCY REAOOUT - Displays selected frequency.


ht
C
om

ADF 101 INDICATOR


m
an

The ADF 101 Indicator is a manually controlled indicator which displays the relative bearing to the
de *

station when the ADF 141 Receiver is tuned to a transmitting station.


r O *un
w off
ne ic

LUBBER LlliE
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *

AZIMUTH CARD
13

INDICATOR NEEDLE
Al
lR

....LO ..,,--~=.::-ol,-l-+--
ig

..
ht

LOW LEVEL
s

.....1 - ' - - l~--- SIGNAL LIGHT


R
es
er
ve
d

SYMBOLIC
AffiPLANE

lliDICATOR KNOB

X1920

CON!ROL OR INDICATOR FUNCTION

LUBBER LINE - A fixed marker that indicates airplane heading on azimuth card.

AZIMUTH CARD - Manually rotatable compass card, controlled by the indicator knob.
Displays magnetic bearing to the station when airplane heading is
manually placed under the lubber line.

2 of 4 DATA ON THIS PACE IS F.A.A.APPRDIIED Issued: 16 December 1977


ROCKWELL PilOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENT 8

CONTROL OR INDICA TOR (CONTD) FUNCTION

LOW LEVEL SIGNAL LIGlIT - A Light Emitting Diode (LED) which glows red when the signal
strength being received is marginal or unusable. When the light
is on, verify system is operating properly by depressing the
Indicator Knob. A proper reaction is seeing the indicator needle
rotate 90 0 CCW. When knob is released needle should return to
its oribrinal position. If system is operating properly, it is a good
verification that signal strength is marginal but usable. If system
does not test properly it usually indicates insufficient signal
strength.

SYMBOLIC AIRPLAt"l"E - A fixed representation of the airplane. Always points to lubber


line.

INDICATOR KNOB - Controls the azimuth card and accomplishes system test. Rotating
the knob sets the azimuth card to the desired heading.

Depressing the Indicator Knob tests the complete Receiver and


C

Indicator for normal operation and indicates that a reliable signal


op

is being recei ved. During the test function the loop is electrically
y

rotated 90 0 .
rig
ht

INDICATOR NEEDLE - The Indicator Needle points to the station when a usable Signal is
C

being received and Receiver is in ADF mode. With Receiver in


om

ANT or BFO mode, the needle will point to 135 0 (:!: 100 ).
m
an

Needle will indicate the magnetic bearing to the station when the
de *

airplane heading is set on the azimuth card under the lubber line.
r O *un

If airplane heading is not set under the lubber line the needle \vill
w off

indicate the relative bearing from the airplane to the station.


ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p

SECTION II
up y*
20 *

LIMITATIONS
13

There are no changes to the airplane operating limitations when this equipment is installed.
Al
lR
ig
ht
s

SECTION III
R
es
er

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
ve

There are no changes to the emergency procedures when this equipment is installed.
d

SECTION IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES

Before Taxi

1. Radio Master Switch - ON.


2. ADF Circuit Breaker - CHECK IN .
3. ADF Receiver Function Switch - ADF.
4. Audio Control Panel - ADF.
5. ADF Receiver - TUNE to local transmitter in 200 to 1799 kHz range whose geographical position
is known.
6. Indicator Needle - CHECK. Needle should point to station.
7. Indicator Knob - DEPRESS. Needle should rotate 90 0 CCW and return to original position when
released.

Issued: 16 December 1977 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 3 of 4


PilOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IX OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
SUPPLEMENT 8 114

In

1. ADF Receiver - TUNE to desired frequency.


2. Audio Control Panel - ADF.
3. Function Sv.itch - ADF.
4. Airplane Heading - SET under indicator lubber line to read magnetic bearing.
5. Low Level Signal Light - MONITOR.

SECTION V
PERFORMANCE

There is no change to airplane performance \\i.th this equipment installed.


C
op
y
rig
ht
C
om
m
an
de *
r O *un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

4 of 4 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED Issued: 16 December 1977


ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENT 9

SUPPLEMENT 9

NARCO AT 150 TRANSPONDER

SECTION I
GENERAL

The purpose of this Supplement is to provide information necessary for the operation of the NARCO
AT 150 Transponder. When an airplane is equipped with an AT 150 Transponder, this Supplement must
C
op

be included in the Pilot's Operating Handbook.


yrig

DESCRIPTION
ht
C

The NARCO AT 150 consists of a Receiver tuned to the frequency of a ground interrogation station
om

(1030 MHz), logic circuitry to check the validity of the received interrogation and encode a reply con-
m

taining pertinent identification information, and a transmitter which sends the coded reply to the ground
an

station. The transponder operates on airplane DC power.


de *
r O *un

When an optional encoding altimeter is installed in the airplane, coded standard pressure altitude
(29.92 In.Hg.) information will be transmitted to the ground station.
w off
ne ic
rs ial

CONTROLS
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al

[) (3
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

X1916

00
FUNCTION SELECTOR SWITCH - A five pOSition rotary switch. The five positions are:
OFF - Turns off all power to the transponder.
SBY - Turns transponder power supply on and applies power to the transmitter filament.
When in SBY, the transponder will not reply to any interrogation.

SBY is used at the request of the air traffic controller to selectively clear his scope
of traffic. The SBY mode not only prevents the transponder from replying to interro-
gations, but also permits the transponder to activate the ON and ALT modes instantly.

ON - Places the transponder in Mode A, the airplane identification mode. In addition to


the airplane's identification code, the transponder will also reply to altitude interro-
gations (Mode C) with discrete signals that do not contain altitude information.

Issued: 16 December 1977 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 1 of 3


PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IX OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
SUPPLEl'vIENT 9 114

ALT - The ALT position causes the transponder to respond to ATC (Air Traffic Control)
altitude interrogations and airplane identification interrogations 'With standard pressure
altitude (29. 92 In. Hg), provided airplane is equipped with an encoding altimeter.

The ALT position may be used in airplanes that are not equipped with an encoding
altimeter, however, the only response v.111 be discrete signals that do not contain
altitude information.

TST - The TST poSition injects a test Signal into the transponder. This test Signal tests all
transponder circuitry involved in a Mode A reply and causes the IDE~'T /DIM button
to come on at full brilliance. This full brilliance indicates that transponder has the
capability of receiving and responding to interrogations. The TST function may be
activated at any time, as it does not interfere with normal operation.

The TST poSition is spring-loaded and must be held in position during the test process.
Upon release, it will automatically return to the ALT position.

!DENT /DIM BUTTON - When the airplane comes within range of a ground station, the IDE NT /DIM
C
op

button will blink ON and OFF. Momentarily depressing the IDE NT /DIM button will activate the
y

SPIP (Special Position Identification Pulse) signal for approximately 20 seconds. This Signal
rig

will "paint" an instantly identifiable image on the controller"s scope. This signal must be used
ht

only upon request of a "Squawk IDENT" from the controller. Use at any other time could inter-
C

fere with another airplane sending a SPIP. During ''lDENT'' periods, the IDENT/DIM button
om

will glow continuously. Rotating the IDENT /DIM button will control the intensity at which the
m

button glows.
an
de *

CODE SELECTOR - The Code Selector consists of four, eight-position switches that provide 4096 active
r O *un

identification codes. The identification code to be used is directed by the traffic controller.
w off
ne ic
rs ial

SECTION II
G co
ro p

LIMITATIONS
up y*
20 *

Federal Regulations prohibit civil airplanes from transmitting on Code 0000. This code is reserved for
13

military operations.
Al
lR

SECTION III
ig
ht
s

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
R
es

1. Two-way radio communications failure.


er

TRANSPONDER-SQUA\VK 7700 for one minute then 7600 for next 15 minutes. Repeat procedure
ve

every 15 minutes.
d

2. . Hijacking.
TRANSPONDE R- SQUAWK 7500.

3. All other emergencies (MAYDAY).


TRANSPONDER-SQUA\VK 7700.

SECTION IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES

Before Taxi

1. Radio Master Switch - ON.


2. Transponder Circuit Breaker - CHECK IN.
3. Function Selector Switch - SBY.
4. Code Selector Switches - SET as required.
5. Function Selector Switch - TST. Observe IDENT/DIM button for maximum brilliance. Return
switch to SBY.

2 of 3 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED Issued: 16 December 1977


ROCKWELL PilOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENT 9

Before Takeoff

1. Code Selector - AS REQUIRED.


2. Function Selector Switch - AS REQUIRED.

After Landing

Place Function Selector Switch to SBY or OFF.

SECTION V
PERFORMANCE

There are no changes in the airplane performance when this equipment is installed.
C
op
y
rig
ht
C
om
m
an
de *
r O *un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

Issued: 16 December 1977 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVED 3 of 3


ROCKWELL PilOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENT 10

SUPPLEMENT 10

NARCO DME 195

SECTION I
GENERAL

The purpose of this Supplement is to provide the information necessary for the operation of the NARCO
C

DME 195. When an airplane is equipped \vith a DME 195, this Supplement must be included in the
op

Pilot f s Operating Handbook.


yrig

DESCRIPTION
ht
C

The NARCO DME 195 is the airborne "interrogator" portion of a navigation system which displays con-
om

tinuou s, accurate, direct-line di stance information from a fixed ground station to the airplane in flight.
m
an

for selection of the operating channel, which is accomplished by the VHF navigation receiver
de *

frequency selector, the DME is capable of independent operation. The equipment consists of a panel-
r O *un

mounted control unit which contains all of the operating controls and displays, a remotely mounted
w off

receiver-transmitter and an antenna. The receiver-transmitter transmits interrogating pulse pairs on


ne ic

200 channels between 1041 MHz and 1150 MHz; it receives associated ground-to-air repUes between
rs ial

978 MHz and 1213 MHz. The control unit digitally displays distances up to 200 NM, ground speed up to
G co

400 knots and time-to-station up to 89 minutes.


ro p
up y*

DME INDICATOR AND CON1ROLS


20 *
13

~__ DM,_0~
Al
lR

[11111
ig
ht

9
s

II
I - 1111:0
NM
1 I_ I I_I R m .-' - - I 1..1
R

" ilf e""F' -: 5


es

Nl 0 N2 DIM _
er
ve
d

CD CD
X1919

1 OFF ION, !DENT Volume Control - This knob turns the unit ON or OFF. Rotating knob fully counter-
clockwise turns unit OFF. Knob also adjusts identification volume. Clockwise rotation in-
creases volume.

2 DISTANCE DISPLAY - Displays slant range distance from ground station to airplane from 0 to 199.9 NM.
Displays horizontal bars when DME is not locked on a station.

3 RNAV INDICATOR LIGHT - This lamp is lit whenever the DME is used in conjunction \vith the NARCO
R-NAV system and is displaying RNAV distance (distance to waypoint). When this lamp is lighted,
only distance to waypoint is displayed, and only the RNAV receiver will channel the DME, re-
gardless of position of Nav Receiver Selector Switch.

Issued: 16 December 1977 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A, APPROVED 1 of 3


PILOT'S ROCKWELL
SECTION IX OPERATING HANDBOOK COMMANDER
SUPPLEMENT 10 114

4 VELOCITY DISPLAY - Displays velocity from 10 to 400 knots. Velocity is accurate only when airplane
is flying directly to or from the DME station. Display is extinguished when DME is not locked on
or Distance Display is reading RNAV distance to waypoint.

5 TD1E DISPLAY - Di time TO or FROM a station from 0 to 89 minutes. Display is accurate only
when airplane is directly TO or FROM the DME station. Display is extinguished when the
Dil.lE is not locked on, when it is displaying the RNAV distance or when the computed time is in
excess of 89 minutes.

6 DI:\I/PUSH-TO-TEST SWITCH - This knob controls the brightness of all digits and advisory lamps, as
well as N1/N2 lamps.

Depressing the switch conducts a test of all digits in the indicator. With DME ON and switch
depressed, distance display should read 188.8, velocity display should read 888 and time display
should read 88.

7 NAV RECEIVER SELECTOR SWITCH - A 3-position toggle switch which selects NAV receiver to be
used to channel the DME. A light illuminates N1 or N2 for night operation.
C

The HLD (hold) pOsition will hold the channel last tuned by either NAV 1 or NAV 2. Place the
op

selector switch to the desired NAV position and then into HLD. The unit will continue to display
yr
ig

the DME information from the last channel tuned just prior to selecting the HLD pOSition, but
ht

the NAV receiver may be tuned to another frequency, such as an ILS. When in HLD the yellow
C

annunciator light is illuminated as an advisory.


om
m

NOTE
an
de

If DME is switched OFF when Nav Selector is in HLD, the channel


r O **un

will be indeterminate when DME is turned on. Select N1 or N2


as desired to set channel.
w off
ne ic

8 HOLD ANNUNCIATOR - illumifu'1tes as an advisory when DME is in HLD.


rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*

SECTION II
20 *

LIMITATIONS
13
Al

There are no changes to the airplane operating limitations when this equipment is installed.
lR
ig
ht

SECTION III
s
R
es

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
er
ve

There are no changes to the emergency procedures when this equipment is installed.
d

SECTION IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES

Before Taxi

1. Radio Master Switch - ON.


2. DME Circuit Breaker - CHECK IN.
3. OFF ION Switch - ON.
4. Dim/Push-to-Test Switch - PUSH. Observe:
a. :N'M Display - 188.8.
b. KTS Display - 888.
c. MIN Display - 88.

2 of 3 DATA ON THIS PAGE IS F.A.A. APPROVEO Issued: 16 December 1977


ROCKWELL PILOT'S
COMMANDER OPERATING HANDBOOK SECTION IX
114 SUPPLEMENT 10

In Flight

1. OFF/ON Switch - ON.


2. Nl/N2 Switch - SET to NAV receiver to be used.

NOTE
AI ways verify station identification before relying on signal.

4. DME Display MONITOR as required.

DME may unlock due to loss of signal with certain combinations of


distance from station, altitude and airplane attitude.
C

SECTION V
op
yr

PERFORMANCE
ig
ht

There are no changes to the airplane performance when this equipment is installed.
C
om
m
an
de
r O **un
w off
ne ic
rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *
13
Al
lR
ig
ht
s
R
es
er
ve
d

Issued: 16 December 1977 DA T A ON THIS PAGE IS F .A.A. APPROVED 3 of 3


~!III!I;II :\m;rall Com pan: PILOT'S SECTION 9
114 OPERATING HANDBOOK SUPPLEMENT

ENCLOSED VERTICAL STABILIZER BEACON


This supplement must be attached to the FAA approved Commander 114 Pilot's Operating Handbook
and Airplane Flight Manual when an enclosed vertical stabilizer beacon has been installed.

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information of the basic Pilot's
Operating Handbook and Airplane Flight Manual only in those areas listed. For Limitations. Procedures
and Perfom1ance data not contained in this supplement. consult the basic Pilot's Operating Ha:Jdbook and
Airplane Flight Manual.

SECTION 1, GENERAL

The purpose of this Pilot's Operating Handbook Supplement is to provide additional infornation
C

appropriate to the Model 114 when the vertical stabilizer mounted beacon is enclosed by ,clear faring.
op
y rig
ht

NOTE
C

The three position strobe lights, originally an optional installation,


om

must be installed if the enclosed vertical stabilizer beacon is to be instaHd.


m
an
de *

SECTION 2, LIMITATIONS
r O *un
w off
ne ic

KINDS OF OPERATION LIMITS


rs ial
G co
ro p
up y*
20 *

INSTRUMENT. SYSTEM, KINDS OF OPERA nON


13

OR EQUIPMENT
DAY NIGHT IFR
Al
lR

'" Light(s), anti-collision;


--
ig

-- X
ht

(Three Position Strobes)


s
R

'" Light; Beacon


--
es

-- --
er
ve

'" NOTE: The beacon strobe is a supplemental light only and does not meet the field of C(~rage requirements of an
d

anti-collision light alone. Only the three position anti-collision strobes are qualified as an~ollision lights under Part
91 Night Operations.

PLACARDS
The following information must be displayed in the form of a placard:

Below the beacon switch:

j~~~~~~9,B';!~~Q~;~~'~
i9NBCNUSAGr::'>'
~

..t
....
....
0..
::J
U)
I
o
0...

~--------------------------------------------------------------------------
FAA Approved Page 1 of2
SECTION <) PILOT'S k.\"I"thl.5 A ircraft Company
SUPPLEMENT II OPERATING HANDBOOK Commander I 14

The Stobe Light switch must be re-placarded:

(SIN 14000 thru 14149) 1~~:ncoLl (SIN 14150 thru 14500)

The Anti-Collision Light Switch must be re-placarded:


C
op
yr
ig
ht
C
om
m

SECTION 3, EMERGENCY PROCEDURES


an
de
r O **un

No change from basic Pilot's Operating Handbook.


w off
ne ic
rs ial

SECTION 4, NORMAL PROCEDURES


G co
ro p
up y*

No change from basic Pilot's Operating Handbook.


20 *
13

SECTION 5, PERFORMANCE
Al
l
R
ig
ht

No change in airplane performance except for a small increase in speed due to reduction of drag.
s
R
es

SECTION 6, WEIGHT & BALANCE/EQUIPMENT LIST


er
ve
d

No change from basic Pilot's Operating Handbook.

Approved:
By: Date: f1y~ d-II lt~ 7
Michele M. Owsley Manager, Airplane C ificatlon t Ice
Federal Aviation Administration Fort Worth, Texas 76193-0150

Page 2 of2 FAA Approved

Você também pode gostar